JP6528803B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a slot machine or a pachinko gaming machine, which determines gaming results by combining gaming media, inserting a gaming medium, rotating the reel and then stopping it, and combining symbols displayed on the reel at that time. .

Conventionally, a slot machine (roll-type game machine) has been known as one of the game machines. In this slot machine, a player inserts game media such as game medals, and operates a start lever to rotate a plurality of reels (reels) on which symbols are drawn. Thereafter, the player operates the stop button to stop the respective turning drums, and it is possible to receive payout of a predetermined number of game medals or the like depending on the combination (display result) of the stopped symbols. Further, in the slot machine, in addition to such basic games, various effects are performed to improve the overall taste.
JP 2017-018540 A

  By the way, in this type of slot machine, a series of individual basic operations such as insertion acceptance of game media (game medals, etc.), rotation of reel (reel), effect control, stop of reel, payout of game medals, etc. Is repeated as the action of And in any case, it is desirable that these operations be properly performed, but it is also conceivable that unexpected operations are performed when various situations occur in combination. Therefore, it is effective to assume as many complex situations as possible, and to decide in advance what kind of operation to be performed at that time.

  The present invention has been made in view of these problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of smooth control even when various situations are combined.

In order to solve the above-described problems, the present invention provides a plurality of reels (first to third cylinders, etc.);
A plurality of stop switches (first stop button to third stop button etc.),
Setting related switches (such as setting key switches),
Setting value display means (setting display LED etc.) for displaying the setting value,
With internal lottery means (main CPU etc)
Reel control means (main CPU etc.) for controlling the reels;
Equipped with
When an event occurs in which the power supply to the gaming machine is shut off, and a power shutoff is detected thereafter, the power shutoff process can be executed.
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the reel control means is configured such that the predetermined symbol combination can be stopped based on the fact that the player's stop operation has been accepted. That one or more of a plurality of combinations of symbols related to the operation of the object and the feature continuous operation device can be stopped, etc.)
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop the specific symbol combination based on the fact that the player's stop operation has been accepted in the game in which the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means. That one or more of a plurality of combinations of symbols related to the operation of the object and the feature continuous operation device can be stopped, etc.)
When the setting related switch is switched from the first mode to the second mode (when the setting key is turned from ON to OFF, etc.), the setting value is displayed on the setting value display means. Have
The setting related switch is the first mode, a predetermined gaming state (such as a gaming state in which an error has not occurred after a power failure return), and a plurality of games in which the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means As the final stop operation of the player corresponding to the predetermined reel is accepted while the remaining predetermined reel of the reels is being rotated, the specific symbol combination is stopped, and then any of the games are performed in the game. When the stop switch is not operated, the game value corresponding to the specific symbol combination can be provided (the first stop and the second stop are not operated. Conditions of payment etc.),
In the game in which the setting related switch is the first mode, the predetermined gaming state, and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery unit, the remaining one predetermined reel of the plurality of reels is rotated As a result, when the final stop operation of the player corresponding to the predetermined reel is accepted, the specific symbol combination is stopped, and then the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the final stop operation is continued in the game. When there is no game value corresponding to the specific symbol combination, and thereafter the setting related switch is in the second mode, the stop switch corresponding to the final stop operation is not continued. When it comes to the situation of the game, the game value corresponding to the specific symbol combination can be given (at the time of the bell win) In the situation where the third stop is pressed, the power is not turned off, the setting key is turned on, and in the case where there is the third stop press release in the set value checkable state, the payout is started when released, etc. ),
In the game in which the setting related switch is the first mode, the predetermined gaming state, and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery unit, a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player is accepted. The symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are respectively stopped on the respective reels stopped thereby, and the predetermined symbol combination is stopped when a stop operation is accepted at a predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation thereafter. After that, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination can be provided.
In the game in which the setting related switch is the first mode, the predetermined gaming state, and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is displayed on each of the reels. The stop operation is accepted at the predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation between the occurrence of an event of stopping the power supply to the gaming machine and the detection of the power off after the occurrence of the event of the power supply being interrupted. After that, even if the predetermined symbol combination is not stopped due to the execution of the power-off process based on the detection of the power-off, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is played at the specific timing after power recovery. It is configured to be able to be awarded (such as executing payout of gaming medals even when the symbol relating to the winning combination deviates from the original stop position)
It is a game machine characterized by.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of smooth control even when various situations are combined.

It is a perspective view of a slot machine concerning one example of the present invention. It is a perspective view of a slot machine in the state where a front door part was opened. It is a rear view of a front door part. It is a front view which shows the inside of a housing | casing part. (A) is a block diagram which shows roughly the electric constitution of each control board, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the outline | summary of the components structure in a main control board. It is a perspective view showing a game medal selector. It is a perspective view which opens and shows a game medal selector. (A) is a chart showing detection modes of the insertion sensors 1 and 2 when game medals are normally inserted, (b) is a chart showing other detection modes of the insertion sensors 1 and 2 not regarded as an error, (c) is It is a timing chart which shows a detection mode of C0 error. (A) is a timing chart which shows a detection mode of C1 error, (b) is a timing chart which shows a detection mode of CH error. It is a timing chart which shows a detection mode of CE error. It is an explanatory view showing a memory map concerning a main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the power activation in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the setting change apparatus process in a main control board. It is a flow chart which shows game progress main processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the process of an internal lottery start. It is a flow chart which shows processing of a conditional device command set. It is a flow chart which shows display judging processing. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the power-off process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the process of error management. It is a flowchart which shows a power supply reset process. It is a flow chart which shows game medal acceptance start processing. (A) is a flowchart showing blocker ON processing, (b) is a flowchart showing blocker OFF processing. It is a flowchart which shows an error display process. It is a flow chart which shows input error set processing. It is a flow chart which shows game medal management processing. It is a flowchart which shows a storage injection | throwing-in process. It is a flow chart which shows game medal settlement processing. It is a flowchart which shows a recovery impossible error process. It is a flowchart which shows the process of RWM initialization 2 in 2nd control. It is a flowchart which shows the process of RWM initialization 3 in 2nd control. It is a flowchart which shows the process of the serial communication setting in 2nd control. It is a flowchart which shows the process of the symbol stop signal output in 2nd control. It is a flowchart which shows the process of the symbol stop signal set in 2nd control. It is a flowchart which shows the process of the test signal output in 2nd control. It is a flowchart which shows the process of the injection | pouring and delivery sensor abnormality set in 2nd control. It is a flowchart which shows the process of the injection | pouring and delivery sensor abnormality clear in 2nd control. It is a flowchart which shows the process of the error check in 2nd control. It is a flowchart which shows the process of the setting value error check in 2nd control. It is a flowchart which shows the process of the built-in random number check in 2nd control. It is a flowchart which shows the process of timer measurement 2 in 2nd control. It is a flowchart which shows the process of the game medal insertion check in 2nd control. It is a flowchart which shows the process of a game medal insertion check following FIG. It is a flow chart which shows processing of game medal passage state update in the 2nd control. It is a flowchart which shows the process of the injection | pouring and delivery sensor abnormality check in 2nd control. It is a flowchart which shows the process of the injection | pouring and delivery sensor abnormality check following FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the process of the error display request | requirement data clear in 2nd control. It is a flowchart which shows the process of the 8-bit random number test in 2nd control. It is a flow chart which shows return impossible error processing 2 in the 2nd control. (A) is a timing chart which shows an example of a management mode concerning the minimum game time at the time of normal, (B) is a timing chart which shows an example of a management mode concerning the minimum game time at the time of returnable error. (A) is a timing chart which shows an example of a management mode concerning the minimum game time at the time of a return impossible error, (B) is a timing chart which shows an example of a management mode concerning the minimum game time at the time of game medal settlement. (A) is a timing chart which shows an example of a management mode concerning the minimum game time at the time of game medal insertion, (B) is a timing chart which shows an example of a management mode concerning the minimum game time at the time of setting value check. It is a timing chart which shows the relation between the minimum game time and the signal output for a test. (A)-(c) is a chart showing the 1st correspondence to the 3rd correspondence at the time of a power failure generation. (A)-(d2) is a chart showing the 4th correspondence to the 7th correspondence at the time of a power failure generation. (A), (b) is a chart showing the first correspondence and the second correspondence when an error occurs. It is a flowchart which shows the injection | emission / payment sensor abnormality display process in 1st control. (A) is a flowchart showing a basic operation according to countermeasure pattern 1, (b) is a flowchart showing countermeasure pattern 1-1 according to the case where a power failure occurs, and (c) similarly a power failure occurs. It is a flowchart which shows the countermeasure pattern 1-2 which concerns on a case. (A) is a flowchart showing the basic operation according to countermeasure pattern 2, (b) is a flowchart showing countermeasure pattern 2-1 according to the case where a condition of rotational drum rotation failure occurs, (c) is the same It is a flowchart which shows the countermeasure pattern 2-2 which concerns when a condition generate | occur | produces. (A) is a timing chart showing an example of the change in rotational speed of the drum with respect to countermeasure pattern 2 etc., (b) is a timing chart showing the basic operation at symbol stop with respect to countermeasure pattern 3-2, (c) is the countermeasure pattern as well It is a timing chart which shows operation at the time of rotation failure generating about 3-2. (A) is a flowchart showing the basic operation according to countermeasure pattern 3, (b) is a flowchart showing countermeasure pattern 3-1 according to the case where a rotation failure occurs, and (c) similarly a rotation failure occurs It is a flowchart which shows the countermeasure pattern 3-2 which concerns on a case. (A) is a timing chart showing a countermeasure pattern 3-1-1A according to a situation where a power failure occurs while pressing the third stop, and (b) is a countermeasure according to a situation where a power failure occurs while pressing the third pause It is a timing chart which shows pattern 3-1-1B. (A) is a timing chart showing the countermeasure pattern 4-7-1 according to the door opening alarm sound and the payout sound, and (b) is a timing chart similarly showing the countermeasure pattern 4-7-2 according to the door opening alarm sound and the payout sound It is.

<Overview of Slot Machine According to this Embodiment>

  Hereinafter, a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view showing the appearance of the slot machine 10 according to the present embodiment. The slot machine 10 is configured by combining the front door 11 shown in FIGS. 1 to 3 and the housing 12 shown in FIG. 4 with the front door 11 facing forward. The front door 11 is supported by the housing 12 via a hinge device, and can be locked in a closed state with respect to the housing 12.

  On the front side (front side) of the front door 11, as shown in FIG. 1, the operation unit 14 is disposed in the middle in the vertical direction, and the rotating drum display unit 15 is disposed on the upper portion of the operation unit 14. . Further, at the lower part of the front door portion 11, a game medal payout opening 16 which is opened in a rectangular shape, and a tray 17 for receiving game medals discharged from the game medal payout opening 16 are disposed. The rendering unit 18 is disposed above the. Further, below the operation unit 14, a translucent lower panel 19 is provided on which a model-specific name or design image or the like is drawn.

  Among them, the operation unit 14 is provided with a game medal insertion slot 21, a game medal return button 22, a lock front 23 (also referred to as a locking unit), a stop button unit 24, a start lever 25 and the like. Further, a main input unit 26 and a sub input unit 27 are provided in the upper part of the operation unit 14, and the main input unit 26 does not show the reference numerals, but a checkout button, a sheet insertion button (so-called 1 BET) A button) and a three-sheet insertion button (so-called MAX BET (max bet) button) are provided. Further, although not shown, the sub input unit 27 is provided with a cross key, a sub input switch, and the like.

  The game medal insertion slot 21 is for inserting a game medal as a game medium through the guide, and the game medal return button 22 is for returning the game medal accumulated in the game medal selector (described later) Used for Further, the lock front portion 23 is used by inserting a predetermined key when the front door portion 11 is unlocked, and the stop button portion 24 is formed of three rotating bodies (first rotating bodies 51 L, It is used to stop the rotation of the second barrel 51C and the third barrel 51R.

  The stop button unit 24 is provided with three stop buttons (a first stop button 24L, a second stop button 24C, and a third stop button 24R). The stop buttons 24L, 24C, 24R are associated with the respective rotating cylinders 51L, 51C, 51R, and pressing the stop buttons 24L, 24C, 24R individually enables the corresponding rotating cylinders 51L, 51C, 51R. Is supposed to stop. In the present embodiment, the arrangement of the first to third barrels 51L to 51R is the first to fifth barrel 51L, the second toroid 51C, and the third toroid 51R as viewed from the front of the slot machine 10. The order of the stop buttons 24L, 24C, and 24R is also in the order of the first stop button 24L, the second stop button 24C, and the third stop button 24R from the left. In addition, the start lever 25 is also used when the rotation of the rotating drum and determination of the set value (described later) are performed.

  The settlement button in the main input unit 26 is used when paying out the inserted game medals and clearing the game medals stored in the storage device (described later). The one-sheet insertion button is used to insert stored gaming medals one by one, and the three-sheet insertion button does not exceed the number of stored gaming medals and the prescribed number (described later) relating to insertion. In the range, it is used when inserting up to 3 stored game medals. The sub input switch in the sub input unit 27 is for performing an operation relating to an effect, and is used for switching of display contents such as a liquid crystal screen provided in the effect unit 18 and for an input relating to an effect.

  Further, although not shown, the operation unit 14 is provided with various display units that show game contents by the presence or absence of light emission of an LED, the display mode of a 7-segment (7-segment) display, or the like. As various display units indicating the game status, there are an acquired number display unit, a stored number display unit, a replay display unit, an insertion display unit, a suspension display unit, a game start display unit, an insertion number display unit, and the like. In the vicinity of these various display units, printing and the like of characters are performed so that it can be known what display function each display unit has. Furthermore, among these display units, the acquired sheet number display unit and the stored sheet number display unit have a function of displaying numbers, characters, etc. using a 7-segment display, and the other display units are lighted by LEDs. Predetermined information is displayed depending on the presence or absence and the mode of lighting. And about the LED used as a light source in each display part, below, acquired number display LED, storage number display LED, replay display LED, insertion display LED, stop display LED, game start display LED, insertion number display It may be called LED.

  Further, among the various display units, the acquired number display unit is used for any one of display of the number of game medals according to the acquired number, display at the time of switching settings, and display of an error code according to the situation. Used. The stored number display unit displays the number of gaming medals stored in the storage device, and the replaying display unit displays the presence or absence of replaying operation. Furthermore, the insertion display unit displays that the game medals can be received, and the suspension display unit displays that the stored game medals are being settled. The game start display unit displays that the operation reception of the start lever 25 is possible in a state where the game can be started. Further, the inserted number display unit displays the number of inserted game medals, and when the replay is activated, displays the number of game medals as many as the previous game.

  The stop button unit 24 described above is provided with three stop buttons: a first stop button 24L, a second stop button 24C, and a third stop button 24R. Further, the rotating body display unit 15 is provided with a rotating body display panel 28 in which a display window opened in a rectangular shape is closed with a transparent panel, and the rotating body display panel 28 passes through to display in FIGS. 2 and 4. As shown in the drawing, three reels (reels) of the first to third barrels 51L to 51R housed in the housing 12 can be visually recognized. In addition, the effect unit 18 is provided with a liquid crystal display device or the like, and the effect unit 18 displays an effect accompanying the game.

  Further, the front door portion 11 is provided with various light sources (LEDs) used for effect. Although illustration is abbreviate | omitted as a light source for these effects, 3 sheets insertion display LED, stop button LED, sub input display LED etc. can be mentioned. Among these, the three-sheet insertion display LED illuminates the three-sheet insertion button disposed in the above-described main input unit 26 from the inside, and is used to display the contents of the effect using the three-sheet insertion button. The stop button LED illuminates the stop buttons 24L, 24C, and 24R from the inside, and is used to display the contents of effects using the stop buttons 24L, 24C, and 24R. Furthermore, the sub input display LED illuminates the sub input switch disposed in the above-described sub input unit 27 from the inside, and is used to display the contents of effects using the sub input switch.

  Other than these, although not shown, light sources for effect are not shown, but the upper part LED, lower part LED, side LED, chance LED, left wing LED, lower left circle LED, right wing LED, lower right circle There are LED, upper left circle LED, upper LED, upper right circle LED, AR lamp LED, lower panel illumination LED, left mini LED, right mini LED, V letter LED and so on. Either light source is used to display the contents of the effect depending on the arrangement and function.

  FIG. 3 shows the back side of the front door portion 11. On the back side of the front door portion 11, various substrates, devices for handling game medals, various sensors, and the like are arranged. Among these, as various substrates, a sub control substrate 31, an image control substrate 32, an image display connection substrate 33, an audio substrate 34, a production ROM (ROM) substrate 35, a switch sensor substrate 36, a display substrate 37, a door relay terminal plate 38, a toroidal illumination substrate 39, a lower panel illumination substrate 40 and the like are provided.

  Among these, the sub control board 31 is a board for controlling an image for effect, various solenoids, various LEDs, and sound effects. Then, the sub control board 31 is housed in the dedicated substrate case, and is screwed to the front door portion 11 so as to be mounted on the front door portion 11.

  The image control board 32 carries an audio board 34 and a rendering ROM board 35 described later, relays between the sub control board 31 and the image display connection board 33, and controls the image and sound effects for presentation. It is. The image control board 32 is housed in a dedicated substrate case, and is screwed to the front door portion 11 so as to be mounted on the front door portion 11.

  The image display connection substrate 33 is a substrate relaying between the image control substrate 32 and the liquid crystal display of the effect unit 18, and is screwed and fixed to a screw hole provided in the front door unit 11. . The audio substrate 34 is a substrate attached with a ROM in which audio data for effect is stored, and is fixed by screwing in a screw hole provided in the image control substrate 32. The effect ROM substrate 35 is a substrate attached with a ROM in which image data for effect is stored, and is fixed by screwing in a screw hole provided in the image control substrate 32. The various ROMs may be fixed by inserting pins provided on the ROMs into sockets provided on the mounted substrate. Furthermore, various substrates may be fixed not only by screwing, but also by fixing connectors provided on various substrates to connectors provided on a door, a case, a substrate or the like on the other side. Such a method for fixing a substrate can be similarly adopted to various substrates described below. Further, the image control connection substrate is not necessarily provided, and the image control substrate 32 may be directly connected to the rendering unit 18 and mounted.

  The switch sensor board 36 relays between the sub control board 31 and two solenoids (a first solenoid and a second solenoid) to be described later, and displays the effect contents by the LED or switches and inputs the liquid crystal screen. Is the substrate of The switch sensor substrate 36 is screwed and fixed to a screw hole provided in the dedicated substrate case.

  The display board 37 is a substrate on which the above-mentioned acquired number display LED, stored number display LED, replay indicator LED, insertion indicator LED, stop indicator LED, game start indicator LED and insertion number indicator LED are attached. It is fitted in and fixed to the hook provided at 11. The door relay terminal board 38 is a board relaying between a main control board (described later), various sensors disposed at various places of the front door portion 11, a blocker 47 (described later), and the display board 37. . Then, the door relay terminal board 38 is mounted in the front door portion 11 by being accommodated in the dedicated substrate case and screwing the substrate case to the front door portion 11

  The rotating cylinder illumination substrate 39 is a substrate attached with LEDs for illuminating the first to third barrels 51L to 51R, and is fixed by being fitted into hooks provided on the front door portion 11. The lower panel illumination substrate 40 is a substrate with an upper and lower split structure attached with an LED for illuminating the lower panel 19, and is fixed by being fitted into a hook provided on the front door portion 11. The lower panel illumination substrate 40 is a substrate attached with an LED for illuminating the lower panel, and is fixed by being fitted into a hook provided on the front door portion 11.

  Subsequently, as devices such as various sensors provided in the front door portion 11, the start lever sensor 41, the three-sheet insertion button sensor 42, the one-sheet insertion / clearing button switch 43, the game medal selector 44, the insertion sensor 45, the selector There are a passage sensor 46, a blocker 47, a game medal return passage 48, a stop button sensor 49, a speaker 50, and the like. Among them, the start lever sensor 41 is for detecting the operation of the start lever 25, and the three-sheet insertion button sensor 42 is for detecting the operation of the three-sheet insertion button.

  Further, the one-sheet loading / clearing button switch 43 is a device equipped with a one-sheet loading button and a clearing button switch. The game medal selector 44 is an apparatus to which an insertion sensor 45, a selector passage sensor 46 and a blocker 47 described later are attached, and is also an apparatus for selecting whether or not the inserted game medals fall within the acceptable range. The above-described insertion sensor 45 is a sensor for detecting insertion of a game medal, and the selector passage sensor 46 is a sensor for detecting passage of a game medal. Furthermore, the blocker 47 is a device for returning game medals according to the game state, and the game medal return passage 48 is a passage when the game medals are returned. The stop button sensor 49 is a sensor for detecting the operation of the stop buttons 24L to 24R, and a plurality of speakers 50 are provided to output sound effects.

  Moreover, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, in the front door part 11, the solenoid 1, the solenoid 2, and the cross key board | substrate are provided. Among these, the solenoid 1 and the solenoid 2 are devices for vibrating the sub input switch. In addition, the cross key substrate is a substrate for switching and inputting a liquid crystal screen, and the substrate is accommodated in a dedicated substrate case, and the dedicated case is screwed and fixed.

  FIG. 4 shows the front side of the housing unit 12. A main control board 61, a setting unit 62, a game medal payout device (hopper) 63, a power supply unit 64, and the like are disposed in the housing unit 12. Among these, the main control board 61 performs control to control the game by summarizing input and output with respect to the slot machine 10, and although the reference numeral is omitted, a stop switch, setting display LED, monitor LED and the like described later are attached. It is a substrate. The main control board 61 accommodates a substrate in a main substrate case 65 which is a dedicated substrate case, fixes the main substrate case 65 with a dedicated fastener, and is mounted on the casing 12. The setting display LED 66 displays a setting value that defines the theoretical hit ease (the player's degree of advantage). The stop switch is set to either the upper side or the lower side to select either the stop function or the automatic clearing function, but in this embodiment, since the stop function and the automatic clearing function are not provided, This stop switch is not used. Therefore, the stop switch does not affect the outcome of the game. An IC tag seal seal (not shown) is attached to the main substrate case 65, and the IC tag seal seal is a seal sheet in which an IC tag is embedded.

  Further, a door switch 60 is provided in the housing unit 12, and the door switch 60 is a switch for detecting the opening and closing of the front door unit 11. The setting unit 62 described above is a box storing a setting door switch 67, a setting key switch 68, and a setting / reset button 69 ("/" means "or") described later. Among these, the setting door switch 67 is a switch for detecting the opening and closing of the setting door which constitutes a part of the housing of the setting unit 62 and closes the setting unit 62. The setting key switch 68 is a switch for switching settings in the slot machine and confirming the setting, and the setting / reset button 69 is a button for selecting the above-mentioned setting value or canceling an error. The setting door switch 67 is not necessarily required. Moreover, although the setting / reset button 69 which combines the setting button and the reset button is used in this embodiment, it may be provided separately. Furthermore, when the lock front 23 has the setting and reset functions, for example, when the key inserted in the lock front 23 is rotated in the right direction, the lock is released and when it is rotated in the left direction. It may function as a setting / reset switch. Alternatively, any one of the setting key switch 68 and the setting / reset button 69 shown in FIG. 4 may be provided separately from the setting unit 62. As such a thing, the thing which provided setting key cylinder (not shown) provided with the setting key switch 68 in the power supply unit 64, and provided the setting / reset button 69 in the setting unit 62 etc. can be illustrated, for example.

  Furthermore, an external concentrated terminal board 70 is provided in the housing unit 12, and the external concentrated terminal board 70 externally outputs a medal insertion signal output, a medal payout signal output, and an external signal output 1 to an external signal output 5 to the outside. While outputting, it is a board to which monitor LED (seven pieces) were attached. The external concentrated terminal plate 70 is fixed to the housing 12 by being fitted into a hook provided on the housing 12.

  The above-mentioned game medal payout device 63 is provided with a payout sensor (not shown; sometimes referred to as a “payout sensor”), and this payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the paid game medals. It is.

  Furthermore, the game medal auxiliary storage 71 is provided in the housing unit 12, and the game medal auxiliary storage 71 is a storage for storing game medals exceeding the storage capacity of the game medal payout device 63. It is. The game medal auxiliary storage 71 is provided with a full detection electrode (not shown), and the full detection electrode is an electrode for detecting a full state of the game medal auxiliary storage.

  The power supply unit 64 described above is a box accommodating the power supply switch 72. The power supply switch 72 is a switch for turning on / off the main power supply. Then, by turning on the power switch 72 from OFF to ON, predetermined power is supplied to various devices including the control board and the like via the power supply unit 64.

  Further, the housing unit 12 is provided with the above-described first to third barrels 51L to 51R. The trunks 51L to 51R are devices for rotating the designs drawn on the outer peripheral surface. On the inner side of each of the rotating cylinders 51L to 51R, a rotating cylinder sensor (not shown) is provided, and this rotating cylinder sensor is provided with a reference position of the rotating cylinder during rotation, provided on the rotating cylinder as an index (below It is a sensor for detecting based on this part based on "an index".

  Furthermore, although not shown, the housing unit 12 is provided with a BL (backlight) relay substrate, a spinning device substrate, a backlight LED, an LED backlight substrate, and the like. Among these, the BL relay substrate is a substrate relaying between the sub control substrate 31 and an LED backlight substrate, a torso sensor or the like which will be described later. The BL relay substrate is mounted on the housing unit 12 by storing the substrate in a dedicated substrate case and fixing the substrate case with a dedicated fastener.

In addition, the spinning drum device substrate is a substrate relaying between the main control substrate 61 and the spinning drum stepping motor (described later) and the spinning drum sensor in order to rotate or stop the respective spinning drums 51L to 51R. It is also a board relaying between the main control board 61 and the aforementioned full detection electrode, the door switch 60, the game medal payout device 63, the external concentrated terminal board 70, and the power supply unit 64. The spinning drum device substrate is mounted on the housing portion 12 by storing the substrate in a dedicated substrate case and fixing the substrate case with a dedicated fastener. The back light LED is an LED that is disposed on the inner side of each of the rotating cylinders 51L to 51R, and illuminates the design on the rotating cylinders 51L to 51R from the back. The LED backlight substrate is a substrate on which the above-described backlight LED is mounted.
<Electric basic configuration of various control boards>

  Next, an electrical basic configuration of the main control board 61, the sub control board 31, and the image control board 32 described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 5A, the main control board 61 stores a main CPU 81 for controlling the progress of the game, a program (game control program) used for game control of the main CPU 81, and various data. There are provided various electronic components such as a main ROM 82, a readable / writable RWM 83 for temporarily storing data and the like for controlling the progress of the game, an interface unit (not shown) and the like. In the present embodiment, the game control program is roughly divided into two control programs, a first control program and a second control program. Then, control executed based on the first control program can be referred to as first control, and control executed based on the second control program can be referred to as second control. The first control may be referred to as "control for providing for gaming" and the second control may be referred to as "control for not providing for gaming" or the like, and the details of these will be described later.

  In addition, the sub control board 31 stores a sub main CPU 86 which performs control for effect based on a command from the main control board 61, a program (effect control program) used for effect control of the sub main CPU 86, and various data. A variety of electronic components such as a sub main ROM 87, a readable / writable RWM 88 for temporarily storing data for effect control, and an interface unit (not shown) are provided. Then, the sub control board 31 receives a command (main command) transmitted from the main control board 61, and performs control based on the main command. Then, the sub control board 31 transmits a command (sub main command) to the image control board 32 for image display and sound (sound) output.

The image control board 32 includes a sub sub CPU 91 that performs image control based on a sub main command from the sub control board 31, a program (image control program) used for image control of the sub sub CPU 91, and a production ROM 92 storing various data. The VDP 94 controls image display using image data stored in the character ROM 93 based on a command from the sub-sub CPU 91, the audio chip 96 controls audio output using audio data stored in the audio ROM 95, image display and audio Various electronic components such as a readable / writable RWM 97 for temporarily storing data for output and the like, an interface unit (not shown) and the like are provided. Here, the effect ROM 92 is mounted on the effect ROM substrate 35 described above, and the sound ROM 95 is mounted on the sound substrate 34 described above. However, the present invention is not limited to this mode, and a part of the functions of the image control board 32 and all the functions may be compensated by the sub control board 31. For example, the sub control board 31 may be provided with an audio ROM 95, audio data selection and output control may be performed without the image control board 32, and the sub control board 31 may be provided with a character ROM 93 and VDP 94. More specific operations of the main control board 61, the sub control board 31, and the image control board 32 will be described later.
<< Part configuration related to main control board >>

  Subsequently, an outline of the component configuration of the above-mentioned main control board 61 will be described. The main control board 61 is a rectangular plate-like wiring board having a printed wiring, and in the present embodiment, a multi-layer (here, two-layer) structure is used. Furthermore, a through hole for mounting a lead type electronic component is provided in a predetermined portion of the main control board 61, and a flow type soldering etc. is performed in a state where the lead is inserted in the through hole. Then, the lead type electronic equipment is mounted on the main control board 61. Further, not only lead type electronic components but also surface mount type electronic components can be mounted on the main control substrate 61.

  FIG. 5B schematically shows the mounting surface which is the surface side of the main control board 61. The main control board 61 is mounted with a main CPU 81 which is a lead type packaged device. The mounting of the main CPU 81 is performed by inserting and fitting the lead of the main CPU 81 into a lead type socket soldered to the main control board 61. Furthermore, various electronic components 181 and various connectors 182 are soldered on the main control board 61, as shown in part.

  Among them, the various connectors 182 are disposed along the peripheral edge portion (outer edge portion) of the main control substrate 61, and the connection port is exposed to the outside from the main substrate case 65 described above. And the connector provided in the harness from the board concerning the external apparatus, such as the above-mentioned sub control board 31, the rotating body device board, various LED boards, etc., is fitted in various connectors 182, and the main control board 61 , It is used for electrical connection with various external devices.

  Moreover, what is shown with the code | symbol 183 in FIG.5 (b) is a non-mounting area | region in which the connector is not provided. The non-mounting area 183 is an area secured for mounting of the extra connector for testing machine connection in the product development stage, and the development of the slot machine 10 according to the present embodiment is commercialized. The area where the emergency connector was removed at the time of transition. In the non-mounting area 183, the plate surface of the main control board 61 is exposed, and it is possible to visually check a plurality of through holes 184 for inserting leads of the emergency connector. Further, since the mounting position of the extra connector is at the peripheral portion of the main control board 61 as described above, the non-mounting area 183 is also located at the substrate peripheral portion on the outside of the board than the main CPU 81. In addition, in FIG.5 (b), in order to avoid that a drawing becomes complicated, only the through hole of a part of emergency connector is shown.

  The extra connector is used to connect the main control board 61 with a performance tester (not shown) used at the development stage, particularly at the public approval stage. More specifically, a test relay board (not shown) is connected to the emergency connector, and a performance tester is connected to the test relay board. Then, the test data signal extracted via the test relay substrate is input to the performance tester, and the performance tester uses the performance data of the slot machine 10 based on the input test data signal. get.

  The test relay substrate is not used in the commercialization stage, and is not provided in the commercialized slot machine 10. A test drive circuit (test driver) is used to output a test data signal. The test driver is mounted on the test relay board, and in the commercialized slot machine 10, the test is performed. The area for mounting the driver is not provided on the main control board 61. Furthermore, the components such as the shape, size, number of pins, and color of the extra connector are different from any of the other various connectors 182, and structurally with the mating connector to be connected to the other connectors. Connection is impossible.

  On the other hand, since the performance tester is not connected at the commercialization stage, the emergency connector is not mounted when the main control board 61 is manufactured. However, if the printed wiring of the main control board 61 and the game machine control program were changed in accordance with the absence of the extra connector, the manufactured slot machine 10 and the slot machine at the time of the test Conditions can not be matched. In addition, if you leave the extra connector in the commercialized slot machine 10 so as not to change the conditions, a connector that can be fitted with the extra connector is used for the equipment for fraud, making fraud easy It is possible to become

  Therefore, the printed wiring for the emergency connector is left in the same form as when the emergency connector is mounted, in order to remove the emergency connector and take measures against fraud and to minimize the change in conditions. . Also, solder is supplied to through holes 184 for the emergency connector, and the through holes 184 for the emergency connector are closed by the solder over the entire length. By plugging the through holes 184 with solder, it is possible to prevent the fraudulent acts such as utilizing the through holes 184. In addition, it is possible to electrically connect the wiring for the extra connector to other wiring (for example, the wiring for grounding) by the solder.

  Furthermore, during soldering, it is also conceivable that the solidified solder protrudes and protrudes from the substrate surface to a certain extent (for example, about 0.1 mm) due to the surface tension of the molten solder. However, as described above, since the emergency connector is not mounted at the time of commercialization, the raised solder does not come in contact with the emergency connector or other electronic components. Although it is possible to close through hole 184 with a material other than solder (for example, solder resist etc.), in this case, the solder for closing through hole 184 is unnecessary. It is also possible to leave the through holes 184 open without closing them. In this case, the material for closing the through hole 184 is unnecessary.

Although not shown, the main substrate case 65 described above is configured by combining a box base made of a transparent resin and having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and a box cover that is also made of a transparent resin and covers the opening of the box base described above. It is done. And the hole part which exposes the permanent connector 182 is provided in the position corresponding to the mounting area of the various permanent connectors 182 which are used also after commercialization among the box covers, but the non-implementation connector is not mounted. At the position corresponding to the area 183, the hole for exposing the non-recessed connector is not left, and the non-mounting area 183 is sealed.
<Mechanism pertaining to the rotation of the rotating drum>

  Next, a mechanism for rotating the first to third barrels 51L to 51R will be described. A reel tape is mounted on the outer peripheral surface of each of the rotating cylinders 51L to 51R, and a predetermined number of symbols are drawn on the reel tape. In the present embodiment, the number of symbols is 21 each. The sizes of all the toroids are set identical, and the rotation axes are located in the same straight line. Further, each of the rotating cylinders 51L to 51R is connected to a rotating cylinder rotating device 54 shown in FIG. 4 and is integrated with the rotating cylinder rotating device 54. It is rotationally driven in a state of being directed in the left and right direction. Here, the arrangement of symbols in the first to third torso 51L to 51R and the control mode relating to the symbol display will be described later. The number of symbols is not limited to 21 and may be, for example, 20 or 14.

  The rotating drum rotation device 54 is a device for rotating the first to third barrels 51L to 51R, and is operated by operating the start lever 25 so that the first to third barrels 51L to 51R are operated. It has a function to rotate.

  The spinning drum rotating device 54 is composed of a spinning drum stepping motor, a reel bush, a spinning drum sensor, a spinning drum substrate, and the like, which are not shown, and includes a first control program and a second control program as described later. It is controlled by a computer program (game control program). Respective winding drums of the first to third barrels 51L to 51R are incorporated into the stainless steel shaft of the winding stepping motor via concavities and convexities via a cylindrical reel bush, and the threading and resin washers are used to rotate the barrel stepping motor It is fixed to the axis of. Then, the shaft of the rotating stepper stepping motor is used as a shaft of the first to third barrels 51L to 51R, and the rotating stepper stepping motor is fixed to a metal motor frame or the like by a screw. The motor frame is inserted into a metal or other reel frame, which is the framework of the frame, and fixed by a latch (here, a so-called snap latch having a plunger and a grommet). The first to third barrels 51L to 51R do not move (do not swing in the rotational direction or the axial direction).

  When stopping the first to third barrels 51L to 51R, the spinning barrel rotating device 54 functions as a rotation stopping device. That is, the rotation stop device has a function of stopping the rotating drum and a function of displaying a combination of symbols. Among them, the function to stop the rotating drum is a function to stop the rotating drum corresponding to the pressed stop button when the above-mentioned pressing operation of the stop buttons 24L, 24C and 24R is performed. Moreover, the function of displaying the combination of symbols stops all the three first torso 51L to the third torso 51R by the above-mentioned function of stopping the torso, and the first to the third torso 51L to 51R. It is a function to display the combination of symbols by.

Furthermore, the rotation stop device includes stop buttons 24L, 24C, and 24R, a stop button sensor, a door relay terminal board, a rotary stepping motor, a rotary drum sensor, and a rotary drum unit substrate, under the control of the above-mentioned game control program. It operates when the player operates the stop button, and does not operate otherwise. Here, an index serving as an index of the rotation angle is formed in each of the rotating cylinders 51L to 51R, and based on the positional relationship between this index and each pattern drawn on each of the rotating cylinders 51L to 51R, the rotating cylinders The position of the symbol at the time of rotation stop is controlled.
<Control of the mechanism related to the rotation of the rotating drum>

  Each of the spinning drums 51L to 51R has various data described below, that is, a spinning drum drive state number, a spinning drum drive pulse output counter, a number of switching drum drive pulses during acceleration, a step number of one symbol, a symbol number (pass The position is managed using a symbol number (for stop position), a rotating drum rotation defect detection counter, a rotating drum drive pulse data search counter, a rotating drum rotation start standby counter, and the like. The driving state of each rotation drum is checked by the rotation drum drive management module every interrupt (2.235 ms), and excitation data is output according to the condition.

  Among the various data described above, the spinning drum drive state number has a value of 0 to 5, 0 is stopped or is fluctuating, 1 is rotation start standby, 2 is decelerating, 3 is decelerating start, 4 represents constant speed, and 5 represents acceleration. The spinning drum drive pulse output counter represents the number of interruptions for switching the excitation, and the number of spinning drum driving pulse switching times during acceleration represents the offset of the rise pattern (number of interrupts) table of the spinning drum, 1 symbol The step number of represents the number of steps of one symbol.

Furthermore, the symbol number (for passing position) indicates the symbol number (0 to 20) passing through the middle row, and if the value is FFH (H indicates that it is hexadecimal notation), It represents that the rotation sensor has not passed. The symbol number (for stop position) indicates the symbol number (0 to 20) to be displayed in the middle row, and when the value is FFH, it indicates that the symbol number is not set. The rotating drum rotation defect detection counter is a counter for detecting rotation defects of the rotating drum, and outputs a value of the number of steps after passing the sensor / 2. Further, when each of the rotating cylinders 51L to 51R passes the rotating cylinder sensor, the rotating cylinder drive state number becomes "4" which is "during constant speed".
<Game medal selector>
<< Configuration of game medal selector >>

  Next, the aforementioned game medal selector 44 will be described. As shown in FIG. 2 and FIG. 3, the game medal selector 44 is on the open end side (the left end side in FIG. 2 and FIG. 3) of the front door portion 11 on the back side of the front door portion 11 It is attached to a part of the middle of the vertical direction. Furthermore, the game medal selector 44 is located at a position immediately below the rotating drum indicator 15, and the game medal inserted into the game medal slot 21 (see FIG. 1) on the front of the front door 11 is displayed on the front. It is designed to be received behind the door portion 11.

  As shown in FIG. 6, the game medal selector 44 has a rectangular box-like outer shape, and includes a main body portion 101, an opening / closing portion 102, and a hinge mechanism portion 103. Among them, the main body portion 101 is fixed to the front door portion 11, and as shown in FIG. 7, the opening / closing portion 102 is attached to the main body portion 101 so as to be able to open and close via the hinge mechanism portion 103. Further, the arrangement of the hinge mechanism portion 103 is a right side portion when viewed from the back side of the front door portion 11, and the opening / closing portion 102 is a hinge mechanism portion 103 centered on the axis of the hinge mechanism portion 103 extending in the vertical direction. It can be opened in the horizontal direction while resisting the elastic restoring force of the provided coil spring 104 and the like.

  When the opening and closing unit 102 is closed, a medal passage 105 having a width somewhat larger than the thickness of one game medal is formed between the opening and closing unit 102 and the main unit 101. That is, the medal passage 105 opens upward in a slit shape, and bends and branches at a midway portion, and the side of the game medal selector 44 (right side when viewed from the back of the front door portion 11) or downward Is growing. An upper end of the medal passage 105 is an entrance (game medal entrance) 106 of the game medal, and an opening serving as the game medal entrance 106 communicates with the above-mentioned game medal insertion slot 21. Further, the exit (hereinafter referred to as "first exit") 107 on the side of the game medal selector 44 can discharge game medals to the above-mentioned game medal payout device 63, and the exit below (below The “second outlet” 108 can discharge game medals to the aforementioned game medal payout port 16.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 7, a deformed plate-like decelerating portion 111 is provided at a bending portion 110 located in the middle of the medal passage 105. The deceleration portion 111 is rotatable in the front-rear direction (front-rear direction of the front door portion 11) with the upper end side as the base end, and elastically protrudes in the medal passage 105 when there is no passage of game medals. ing. Then, when a game medal is inserted into the game medal insertion slot 21 and the inserted game medal contacts the decelerating unit 111 while passing through the bending unit 110, the decelerating unit 111 is pushed by the game medal and immerses in the main unit 101. Do. Furthermore, when the game medal passes and is released from the pressing force of the game medal, the decelerating unit 111 protrudes into the medal passage 105 again. Then, the game medals passing through the bending portion 110 change their course while being decelerated by the contact with the decelerating portion 111, and move toward the downstream side of the bending portion 110.

  The aforementioned selector passage sensor 46 is provided downstream of the bending portion 110. The selector passage sensor 46 includes a rectangular plate-shaped first movable portion 112. The first movable portion 112 has a longitudinal direction in the branch portion 113 of the medal passage 105 and a width direction of the medal passage 105 (passage Radial direction of the game medals). The first movable portion 112 is rotatable in the front-rear direction (the front-rear direction of the front door portion 11) with one upstream side of the medal passage 105 as a base end, and when there is no passage of game medals, the medal passage It protrudes into the 105. However, when the gaming medal having passed through the above-described decelerating portion 111 contacts the first movable portion 112, the first movable portion 112 is pushed by the gaming medal and is immersed in the main body portion 101. Then, when the game medal passes and is released from the pressing force, the first movable portion 112 protrudes into the medal passage 105 again.

  Further, a micro sensor (not shown) for the selector passage sensor 46 is incorporated in the main body portion 101, and the presence or absence of the immersing operation of the first movable portion 112 is detected by the micro sensor. That is, when the first movable portion 112 is pushed by the game medals entering the medal passage 105 and flowing down and the immersion operation is performed, the operation of the first movable portion 112 is detected, and the output signal of the micro sensor changes Do. Then, in the above-mentioned main control board 61, using the output from the micro sensor for the selector passage sensor, control (FIGS. 22 to 29, etc.) related to the insertion of game medals as described later is executed. Ru. Here, as micro sensors for the selector passage sensor 46, various micro sensors such as contact type and non-contact type can be applied. In addition, the first movable portion 112 is configured such that the foreign matter or the like flowing backward is caught (the foreign matter can not move upstream from the downstream side of the first movable portion 112). Thereby, it is possible to prevent the goto machine from being easily removed when the goto machine (a machine tool used for so-called goto action) is inserted.

  In addition, a second movable portion 114 is provided at the upper portion on the upstream side of the first movable portion 112, and the second movable portion 114 also normally protrudes elastically in the medal passage 105 and is pushed by the game medal In this case, the main body portion 101 is to be immersed. In the present embodiment, the selector passage sensor 46 is configured by movable portions such as the first movable portion 112 and the second movable portion 114 and a detection portion such as a micro sensor for the selector passage sensor 46. In the present embodiment, the selector passage sensor 46 is formed by the first movable portion 112 and the second movable portion 114. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even if only one of them is provided It does not have to be the shape as described above.

  The above-described insertion sensor 45 is provided at a position on the way from the selector passage sensor 46 to the first outlet 107 in the medal passage 105. The insertion sensor 45 is constituted by two sensors of an insertion sensor 1 denoted by reference numeral 115 and an insertion sensor 2 denoted by reference numeral 116, and each insertion sensor is built in the main body portion 101. In the following description, when the input sensor 1 and the input sensor 2 are denoted by the reference numerals in the drawing and described, the input sensor 1 (115) and the input sensor 2 (116) are described.

  Each of the input sensor 1 (115) and the input sensor 2 (116) uses a non-contact type micro sensor (not shown) built in the main body portion 101. Furthermore, the insertion sensor 1 (115) and the insertion sensor 2 (116) are arranged at a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 to 10 mm) smaller than the diameter of the game medal (here, 25 mm) in the flow direction of the game medal. Among these, the insertion sensor 1 (115) is located upstream of the medal passage 105 than the insertion sensor 2 (116).

  In addition, as a micro sensor used for the input sensor 1 (115) and the input sensor 2 (116), a light receiving type is used, and a light projecting portion disposed obliquely above the black rectangular window portion 117 The light (detection light) emitted from the light source 118 can be received. That is, a light emitter (not shown) using an LED or the like is built in the inside of the light projection unit 118, and the positional relationship between the light projector and the closing sensor 1 (115) and closing sensor 2 (116) is The detection light output from the light emitter is set to pass through the window portion 117 and be incident on the input sensor 1 (115) and the input sensor 2 (116).

  Then, when the game medals flowing down the medal passage 105 block the detection light, the detection light is not incident on the insertion sensor 1 (115) and the insertion sensor 2 (116), and the game medal is detected. 115) and the output signal of the micro sensor used for the input sensor 2 (116) changes. Then, in the main control board 61 described above, control relating to the insertion of game medals as will be described later, using the outputs from the insertion sensor 1 (115) and the insertion sensor 2 (116) (FIG. 22 to FIG. 29) is executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the insertion sensor 1 (115) and the insertion sensor 2 (116) are disposed at a position closer to the upper side of the medal passage 105, for example, even when a plurality of game medals pass continuously. The gap between the upper portions of the game medals passes through the insertion sensor 1 (115) and the insertion sensor 2 (116). And by this, a game medal can be detected certainly every 1 sheet.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 7, the opening / closing unit 102 is provided with the above-mentioned blocker 47. The blocker 47 is constituted by a plate-like movable block 119 and a solenoid (not shown) formed into an L-shaped cross section, and the movable block 119 is provided with a shielding plate 120 projecting in the horizontal direction. It is done. Furthermore, in the arrangement of the blocker 47, most of the movable block portion 119 is directed to the first outlet 107 rather than directly below the first movable portion 112 in the selector passage sensor 46 when the open / close portion 102 is closed. It is set to be located downstream with reference to the game medal. The blocker 47 advances and retracts the movable block portion 119 in the front-rear direction (the front-rear direction of the front door portion 11) with ON / OFF driving of a solenoid (not shown).

  In this embodiment, when the solenoid is off, the blocker is off. When the blocker is off, the movable block 119 is retracted into the inside of the opening and closing part 102 and the shielding plate part 120 is pulled into the opening and closing part 102. In a state of When the blocker is OFF, the lower second outlet 108 is open, and the game medals fall to the side of the second outlet 108 without being directed to the first outlet 107 and are guided to the second outlet 108, It is returned to the tray 17.

  On the other hand, when the solenoid is ON, the blocker is ON, and when the blocker is ON, the movable block portion 119 advances to the main body portion 101 side as shown in FIG. It is in the state of projecting into the 105. Then, when the blocker is ON, the lower second outlet 108 is closed by the shielding plate portion 120, and is guided along the shielding plate portion 120 to the side of the first outlet 107 side. Then, the game medals are discharged toward the first outlet 107 through the selector passage sensor 46 and the insertion sensor 45 and are discharged from the first outlet 107 to the game medal payout outlet 16.

Here, reference numeral 121 in FIG. 7 denotes a reject switch provided in the main body portion 101 to constitute a reject mechanism, and reference numeral 122 denotes a reject switch facing the reject switch 121 when the opening / closing unit 102 is closed. It is a receptacle for rejects arranged. The function of the reject switch 121 will be described later.
<< Function of game medal selector >>

  Subsequently, the function of the game medal selector 44 will be described. The game medal selector 44 has a game medal sorting function, a game medal non-acceptance function, and a game medal detection function. Among these, the game medal selecting function is a function of selecting whether or not the inserted game medal is within the range of acceptable dimensions. In addition, the game medal acceptance impossible function is a function to return the game medal without accepting the game medal by the above-mentioned blocker 47 according to the game state, and the game medal detection function detects the game medal having passed through the above-mentioned insertion sensor 45 Function.

  About the above-mentioned game medal acceptance impossible function, as a game state which returns without receiving a game medal, 50 game medals are stored by the storage device (described later), and a predetermined number (described later) of game medals The game medals that have been inserted and the game medals that have been stored during the period from the acceptance of the operation of the start lever 25 after the insertion of the prescribed number of game medals to the end of the game when the At the time of refund, in the case of error occurrence, it can be mentioned at the time of switching of settings and confirmation of settings.

  When a game medal within the range of acceptable game medal dimensions is inserted from the game medal insertion slot 21, it passes from the game medal entrance 106 of the game medal selector 44 through the medal passage 105, and the game medal exit (first exit 107 ) To the game medal payout device 63. When the game medal passes through the selector passage sensor 46 and the insertion sensor 45, a detection signal is sent from the sensors 45 and 46 to the main control board 61. The detection signal of the selector passage sensor 46 is used to confirm the number of game medals for which the game medal has passed the selector passage sensor 46 by the above-described game control program.

  The detection signal of the insertion sensor 45 is used to determine the time and the order in which the game medals passed through the selector passage sensor 46 in the aforementioned game control program. When the detection signals of the selector passage sensor 46 and the insertion sensor 45 are within a prescribed time, and in a prescribed order and a prescribed number, the game medals are normally detected. In the case of more than the prescribed time or other than the prescribed sequence and other than the prescribed number, an error occurs, and the inserted game medal becomes invalid. However, if the detection signal is only the output signal of the input sensor 1 (input sensor 1 signal) and there is no detection by the detection signal of the input sensor 2 (input sensor 2 signal), no error occurs.

  Here, as the case where only the insertion sensor 1 signal is detected and the insertion sensor 2 signal is not detected, the case where the game medal is returned from the insertion sensor 1 in the reverse direction can be mentioned. Moreover, the specific aspect of such a game medal detection is mentioned later.

  When a deformed game medal is inserted from the game medal insertion slot 21, it stays at the game medal inlet 106. By operating the game medal return button 22 (see FIG. 1), the above-mentioned reject switch 121 is pressed, and the opening / closing portion 102 of the game medal selector 44 is slightly opened. It is returned to the tray 17. When a game medal smaller than the size of acceptable game medals is inserted from the game medal insertion slot 21, after passing through the game medal inlet 106, the game medal payout outlet 16 returns the game medal to the tray 17.

Further, the above-mentioned blocker 47 is turned OFF according to the game state, and the movable block portion 119 retracts from the medal passage 105 by the above-mentioned game medal unacceptable function. At that time, when a game medal within the acceptable range is inserted from the game medal insertion slot 21, as described above, the game medal passes through the game medal entrance 106 to reach the bent portion 110 of the medal passage 105, and further by free fall. , And passes through the second outlet 108 and is returned to the tray 17 from the game medal payout outlet 16.
<Procedure of setting change>

  In the slot machine 10 of this embodiment, the normal operation for changing the setting for the setting unit 62 (see FIG. 4) is performed as follows. First, for example, a game arcade clerk or the like opens the front door portion 11 of the slot machine 10 in the power-off state (see FIGS. 1 and 2). When the front door 11 is opened, as described above, a predetermined key is inserted into the lock portion 23 (see FIG. 1) of the front door 11 locked in the closed state, and the key is released in the unlocking direction. Rotate (for example, counterclockwise).

  Further, the setting door provided in the setting unit 62 shown in FIG. 4 is opened, and although not shown, it is possible to access the setting key cylinder into which the setting key is inserted. Further, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder, and the setting key is turned (ON) in the ON direction (for example, clockwise direction). Then, the power switch 72 described above is turned on to supply power to the slot machine 10. As described above, when the power switch 72 is turned on while the setting key is turned on, a setting change device operation is performed in which a setting change device process (see FIG. 13) described later is performed.

  When power is supplied to the slot machine 10, the setting value is displayed on the setting display LED 66 mounted on the main control board 61 (see FIG. 4). For the setting display LED 66, a so-called 7-segment display is used. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, any one of setting values (here, six of “1” to “6”) which are integer values in a predetermined range is displayed on the setting display LED 66, and the displayed setting is displayed. The value becomes visible through the transparent main substrate case 65.

  When the setting change device is operated as described above, when the above-mentioned setting / reset button 69 (see FIG. 4) is pressed, the display of the setting value changes. In the present embodiment, each time the setting / reset button 69 is pressed, the display of the setting value is incremented by one step. For example, when the power of the slot machine 10 is activated at setting 1 (setting value is 1) and the setting / reset button 69 is operated once, setting 2 is obtained. After that, each time the setting / reset button 69 is pressed, the display of the setting values changes in ascending order such as “2”, “3”,.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the highest degree of advantage for the player is the setting value 6 which is the highest setting value, and the lower the value of the setting value, the lower the degree of advantage. Then, when the setting / reset button 69 is operated once with the setting value 6 which is the above-mentioned maximum setting value, the setting 1 which is the lowest setting value is obtained. Furthermore, in a situation where the value displayed on the setting display LED 66 is the setting value to be selected, the game clerk or the like operates the above-mentioned start lever 25 (see FIG. 1) to start the start switch (not shown). The setting value is fixed by turning it on.

  In addition, the mode of the change which concerns on the display of a setting value at the time of pushing the setting / reset button 69 as mentioned above is not limited to what the display of a setting value increments one step at a time, For example, the display of a setting value May be decremented one step at a time and change in descending order. Furthermore, the range of setting values that can be changed by setting change device processing (see FIG. 13) described later is not limited to six steps of “1” to “6”, for example, four steps of “1” to “4” It may be

  Subsequently, the setting key is turned in the OFF direction (for example, counterclockwise direction), the setting door provided in the setting unit 62 is closed, and the operation of the normal setting change is completed, and the game is possible. State (normal state).

  Here, the situation after the operation of the setting / reset button 69 becomes effective after the situation of the “setting change device operation” described above can be referred to as a “setting value changeable” situation . The “set value changeable” is a state where change (selection) of the set value is possible by the operation of the setting / reset button 69.

  Further, after “set value changeable”, the state in which the set value is determined by the operation of the start lever 25 (lever operation) can be referred to as the “set value determined” state. Then, when the setting value is changed, the setting / reset button 69 is operated as described above in the “setting value changing possible”, and the start lever 25 is operated in a state where the target setting value is reached. Will be in the state of "set value finalization". And in the situation of "setting value decision", even if it operates setting / reset button 69, the display of setting value does not change.

In addition, the state of waiting for the setting key to be turned off after the above-described “setting value determination” can be referred to as a “setting value determination waiting” state. Even in the “wait for setting value determination” state, it is impossible to change the setting value by operating the setting / reset button 69. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to divide the state in the setting change operation into the first state and the second state. When the power is turned on with the setting key turned on, the state shifts to the first state related to the setting change, and when the start lever 25 is operated thereafter, the first state shifts to the second state. Furthermore, when the setting key is turned off in the second state related to the setting change, the second state is ended.
<Procedure to play a game and processing when a game medal is inserted>

  Next, the procedure for playing a game and the process when a game medal is inserted will be described. In the processing when the game medal is inserted, when the game medal selector 44 (see FIG. 6) is in the game medal acceptance state (the game medal passable state), the game medals from the game medal slot 21 (see FIG. 1) Can be charged. Here, "insertion of game medals" is synonymous with "setting of the number of bets", and "setting of the number of bets" is synonymous with "betting". When a game medal is inserted, the above-mentioned insertion number display LED lights up according to the insertion number, and the start lever 25 can be effectively operated by inserting a specified number of game medals. Then, since the start lever 25 can be operated effectively, processing such as winning combination based on the operation of the start lever 25, freeze lottery (lottery for freeze effect described later), updating of spinning drum drive state, etc. can be executed. It will be. In addition, a game medal is used as a game medium, and it is also possible to use not only a game medal but a game ball, electronic data, etc. as a game medium.

  In addition, if it inserts more than the maximum regulation number for every game state, subsequent game medals will be stored by a storage device. The storage device has a function of storing game medals up to a predetermined number (here, 50) under control of the slot machine 10. However, when the number of stored game medals exceeds 50, which is the maximum number, the game medal selector 44 is in the game medal return state, and the game medals inserted from the game medal slot 21 are paid by the game medals. It is returned to the tray 17 from the outlet 16 (see FIG. 1). The storage device is also called "credit", and specifically refers to one that electrically stores (stores in the RWM) game medals.

  With regard to the spinning drum rotation, after inserting a prescribed number of game medals, the spinning drum can be rotated by operating the start lever 25 and operating the spinning drum rotation device 54. However, when any one of the settlement button, the stop button 24L to 24R, the one-sheet insertion button, and the three-sheet insertion button is operated, the rotating drums 51L to 51R can not be rotated even if the start lever 25 is operated. .

  When the start lever 25 is operated, the rotating drums 51L to 51R start accelerating rotation, and when the predetermined number of rotations (here, 79.90 rotations / minute) is reached, the constant speed state is established. When the start lever 25 is operated, the game medal selector 44 is in a game medal return state. Even if the predetermined time (4.1 seconds in this case) which is the minimum game time (the shortest game time) has not elapsed since the rotation drums 51L to 51R began to rotate in the previous game, even if the start lever 25 is operated , The rotating drums 51L to 51R do not rotate. The rotating drums 51L to 51R start rotating 4.1 seconds after the rotating drum starts rotating in the previous game. However, in the case of the game standby by the game effect (freeze effect etc.) which will be described later, it is also possible to control so that the turning drum starts to rotate after the game standby is finished. Here, in the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment, the management of the minimum game time is performed in various modes according to the situation, which will be described later.

  When it is detected that the rotating drums 51L to 51R start rotating and all the rotating drums 51L to 51R are rotating normally (in this case, rotation at a constant speed and not out of step), the operation of the stop buttons 24L to 24R Is ready to accept. However, when it is not detected that all the rotating bodies 51L to 51R are rotating normally, the operation of the stop buttons 24L to 24R can not be received until the rotating normally. After the start lever 25 is operated, the game medals inserted from the game medal insertion slot 21 until all the rotating bodies 51L to 51R stop are returned from the game medal payout opening 16 to the saucer 17.

  When stopping the rotation of the drum, the rotating drums 51L to 51R are arbitrarily selected, and the corresponding stop buttons 24L to 24R can be operated to stop the drums 51L to 51R. However, when any one of the settlement button, the start lever 25, the stop button corresponding to the rotating drum already stopped, the one-sheet insertion button or the three-sheet insertion button is operated, the rotation is performed even if the stop button is operated. It is not possible to stop the inner torso. In addition, regarding the buttons (main system buttons) managed by these main control boards 61, depending on the combination, it is possible to make some buttons operable (operations enabled). Then, the combination of the operable button or switch and the inoperable button or switch can be arbitrarily determined. For example, while any one stop button is being operated, the other stop button can not be operated, but while the start lever 25 is being operated (after the operation), any of the stop buttons can be operated. be able to.

  When the stop buttons 24L to 24R are operated, the corresponding rotating cylinders stop within a predetermined time (here, 190 ms). Similarly, any remaining rotating drums are stopped by operating the stop button corresponding to the arbitrarily selected one. If the stop button is continuously operated, the corresponding rotation cylinder does not stop even if the remaining stop buttons are operated. After the start lever 25 is operated, the rotating drums 51L to 51R do not stop unless the stop buttons 24L to 24R are operated. However, when the freeze effect is being performed, it is also possible to configure so as to stop the rotating drum during rotation without the operation of the stop buttons 24L to 24R.

  In the display determination of the combination of symbols, the display determination of the combination of symbols relating to winning or prize operation is performed on the activated line according to the prescribed number relating to insertion when all the rotating bodies 51L to 51R are stopped. However, if you continue to operate the start lever 25 or any one of the stop buttons 24L to 24R at the third stop which is the third stop, after winning the operation, win or operate on the activated line according to the specified number Perform display judgment of the combination of symbols. In addition, “display determination of symbol combination” or “display determination” is that the main CPU 81 detects the stopped symbol and directly determines what the stopped symbol is (see so-called appearance) ), For example, it is determined whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the control of the rotation drums 51L to 51R, and if there is no abnormality, it is determined that the symbol display is properly performed, and the symbol stop is performed normally. It means things like proceeding with the subsequent processing as being what they are. Here, although illustration is omitted, the prescribed number which can be inserted in the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment is two in the game at the time of the bonus game operation and three in the other games, and the effective line is There are three lines, the upper stage, the middle stage, and the lower stage of the revolving drum display unit 15 (see FIG. 1). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to adopt one in which the effective line is one line only in the middle, or five lines in which the diagonally upper right and diagonal upper left are added. And when the combination of symbols concerning winning is displayed on the effective line according to the specified number, the control in the corresponding case is executed, and the combination of symbols concerning the gift operation or the gift continuous operation device is displayed In the case where it is determined, control is performed when a combination of symbols relating to the item operation or the continuous item operation device is displayed.

  When a combination of symbols relating to winning is displayed, the game medals of the number corresponding to the combination of symbols relating to the winning for each specified number are paid out and are won by the player. The game medals to be acquired are stored in the storage device described above. However, in the case where the number of stored game medals exceeds 50, the acquired number of the game medals is paid out from the game medal payout opening 16 to the tray 17. The game medal inserted from the game medal insertion slot 21 during acquisition of the game medal is returned from the game medal payout opening 16 to the tray 17. When all the game medals corresponding to the number of symbols corresponding to the predetermined winning combination are obtained, the game medal selector 44 enters a game medal acceptance state when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Then, the processing at the time of game medal insertion described above is executed. In the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of game medals that can be acquired by one winning does not exceed 15.

  When the combination of the symbols related to the operation of the bonus is displayed, the process according to the corresponding bonus is executed. In this embodiment, as a character (as a character to be extracted), a character continuous relating to a so-called ordinary character, a first class special electric character, a second kind special electric character, a first kind special electric character Although there is no corresponding thing to the combination of the symbol that each of the actuating devices will operate, the combination of the symbols that the replay will operate, and the feature continuous according to the first kind special character A combination of symbols is provided that will cause the actuating device to operate. And when the combination of the symbols applicable to these is displayed, an applicable process is performed.

  On the other hand, when the symbols relating to winning and operation are not displayed, the game medal selector 44 is in the game medal acceptance state. Then, the processing at the time of game medal insertion described above is executed.

  Subsequently, a combination of symbols relating to a predetermined number of winnings and the number of game medals that can be obtained when the combination of the symbols is displayed will be described. The combination of symbols relating to winning and the number of game medals that can be obtained correspondingly are predetermined for each prescribed number. A game medal can not be acquired without displaying a combination of symbols relating to winning. Further, the combination of symbols relating to the winning is not displayed without the condition device relating to the winning being operated.

  And the combination of symbols pertaining to winnings when the prize and prize continuous actuation device are not activated and the number of game medals acquired is determined only for the specified number of three, and the combination of symbols pertaining to winnings (1 symbol or A predetermined number is defined for each number of acquired cards as the number of two symbols including those defined. Furthermore, the combination of symbols pertaining to winning in the first class special role product activation and the number of obtained game medals are determined only for the prescribed number of two cards, and the combination of symbols pertaining to winning (only one symbol or two symbols As the number of items specified, a predetermined number is specified for each acquired number. In addition, the specific relationship with the combination of the symbol which concerns on these prizes, and the number of acquisitions is mentioned later.

  Then, the combination of the symbol which concerns on the operation | movement for every prescription | regulation number is demonstrated. The combination of symbols relating to the operation of the replay, the article and the article continuous actuation device is predetermined for each prescribed number. A combination of symbols related to the operation of the replay, the article and the continuous action apparatus is displayed without the condition device for the operation of the replay, the article and the continuous action apparatus, etc. not operating (when not activated) It is supposed not to be

  And combination of the symbol which relates to the operation when the product and the product continuous actuating device not working and the operation name are decided only about the specified number of three sheets, the combination of the symbols related to the operation (only one symbol or 2 There are eight types of numbers in the present embodiment as the number of symbols specified including only the symbols. The specific relationship between these operation names and the combination of symbols will be described later. Then, when a combination of symbols relating to operation is displayed, game control corresponding to the operation name is executed thereafter.

  Subsequently, the combination of symbols that can be played again, the effect when the combination of the symbols is displayed, and the process when the combination of the symbols is displayed will be described. When all the combinations of symbols displayed on the activated line are combinations of symbols related to re-playing when all the rotating drums 51L to 51R have stopped, re-playing is activated. Further, the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment is provided with a game in which the probability that the condition device relating to replay is activated changes.

  The fluctuation trigger of the probability that the condition device according to replay is activated is when the condition device according to the operation of the continuous product actuating device according to the first kind special character is activated, the character continuous according to the first kind special character It is when the combination of symbols for which the actuating device is to be operated is displayed on the effective line, and when the operation of the character continuous actuating device according to the first kind special character is finished. As processing in the case where the combination of symbols that can be played again is displayed, the game medals are automatically inserted in the same number as the previous game, and the start lever 25 becomes operable. The game medal inserted from the game medal insertion slot 21 after the combination of symbols relating to replay is displayed is stored in the storage device when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Then, after that, similarly to the normal time (here, except in the case of replay), the control on the turning drum rotation, the control on the stopping of the turning drum rotation, and the control on the display determination of the combination of the turning drums Is executed.

  Next, the first-class special effects will be described. When the accessory continuous actuating device according to the first kind special character operates, at the same time, the first kind special servant with the character continuous actuating device activation according to the first kind special character operates at the same time. In addition, at the time of operation of the accessory continuous actuation device according to the first kind special prize, when the actuation of the first kind special bonus is finished, immediately after the operation of the prize continuous actuation device pertaining to the first kind special prize, A kind special character works again. As described above, when the first-class special-effects are activated, the processing when the game medal is inserted, and the rotation of the rotating drum, as in the above-described normal time (here, except for the game pertaining to the first-class special-effects). Play a game with control over

  Furthermore, when controlling the stop of the spinning drum rotation, the player can stop the spinning drum by arbitrarily selecting the spinning reel that is rotating and operating the corresponding stop button. However, if any one of the checkout button, start lever, stop button corresponding to the rotating drum already stopped, one-sheet insertion button or three-sheet insertion button is operated, the rotation is performed even if the stop button is operated Can not stop the torso. When the stop buttons 24L, 24C, 24R corresponding to the first to third barrels 51L to 51R are operated, the rotation of the corresponding toroids is within a predetermined time (here, 190 ms) as in the above case. Stop.

  If one of the stop buttons is continued to operate, the corresponding turning cylinder will not stop even if the remaining stop buttons are operated. After operating the start lever 25, the rotating drum does not stop unless the stop button is operated. And about display determination of combination of a pattern, control about display determination of combination of revolving drum is performed like the usual time mentioned above. In this embodiment, after the operation of the stop button is effectively received, a standby time (also referred to as a rotation stop acceptance standby time) of about 200 ms is provided until the next stop button is effectively accepted. There is. That is, when all the reels (51L to 51R) are rotating, for example, the middle or right stop button (second stop button 24C or the second stop button 24C or 200 ms after the left stop button (first stop button 24L) is operated. 3 stop button 24R) can be accepted.

  With regard to the termination of the operation of the first class special prize, the first class special prize assumes that the prescribed number of games have been completed or that the number of winning times has reached the prescribed number as the operation termination condition. When at least one of the operation termination conditions is satisfied, the operation is terminated.

Subsequently, an accessory continuous actuation device according to a first kind special actor will be described. In the game when the continuous action device for the first kind special role is not working, when all the turning cylinders are stopped, the combination of the symbols displayed on the effective line is the consecutive thing related to the first special kind If it is a combination of symbols relating to the operation of the actuating device, the game relating to the above-mentioned first-class special effects is executed. The trigger for the completion of the operation of the continuous-action product operating device according to the first-class special-prize is when the number of obtained game medals exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 465). After that, as in the normal time described above, there may be cases in which processing proceeds to the process of inserting the game medals.
<Game effect>

As the aforementioned game effects, there are typically freeze effects. The freeze effect is to suspend the progress of the game for a predetermined period and to delay it, and in this sense it can also be referred to as a delay effect. Furthermore, the freeze effect can be classified and captured as follows. That is, the freeze effect can be divided into those which allow the player to easily recognize the execution of the freeze effect, and those which can not be recognized (or difficult to recognize). Among them, those that do not respond to the operation of the start lever 25 and those that do not respond to the operation of the start lever 25 but that do not respond to the operation of the normal drum during the game play There are those that perform a reel effect (turn drum effect) that operates the body. Examples of a system that does not respond to the operation of the start lever 25 include one that does not start the operation of the rotation drum even if the start lever 25 is operated, and one that requires a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) to start operation. .
<Main operation of main control board>

  Next, the main operation of the main control board 61 functioning as the main control means of the slot machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described based on FIGS. First, in the main control board 61, the above-mentioned first control program or the above-mentioned first control program stored in the built-in ROM of the main CPU 81 or the external ROM (main ROM 82) mounted on the main control board 61, for example Based on the second control program (to be described later), using the built-in RWM of the main CPU 81, an external RWM (main RWM 83) mounted on the main control board 61, etc. It is something to execute.

  Furthermore, the main control board 61 controls the sub-control board 31 which performs control relating to effects using images etc., and commands ("main command", "sub control command", It has a function of sending “command” or the like. Then, power is supplied to the main control board 61 from the power supply unit 64 described above. Here, for convenience of illustration, the external ROM and RWM have been described with reference numerals 82 and 83 attached thereto, but in the following, the ROM 82 and RWM 83 are built in the main CPU 81 unless otherwise noted. It is used as a generic term for external ones.

Here, as the above-mentioned random number extraction, the above-mentioned role extraction such as re-game, character, a character continuous operating device etc., effect drawing such as freeze drawing, AT drawing etc. regarding execution of AT (assist time) etc. it can. In addition to the main control board 61, the main control means is a concept including the main CPU 81 and peripheral devices such as the main ROM 82 and RWM 83 which realize various functions of the main control board 61 in cooperation with the main CPU 81. It is. Furthermore, although the terms "lottery" and "lottery" are used as the case may be, they are terms having the same meaning.
<Relationship between first control and second control>

  Next, the first control and the first control program, and the second control and the second control program described above will be described. FIG. 11 shows an example of a memory map of the main CPU 81. The memory map in FIG. 11 indicates an address space from "0000H" to "FFFFH". Among these, the space from “0000H” to “2FFFH” is allocated to the built-in ROM, and the space from “F000H” to “F3FFH” is allocated to the built-in RWM.

  Further, in the space from “FE00H” to “FEBFH”, a register area (internal register area) for registers incorporated in each circuit in the main CPU 81 is allocated. Then, by making the main CPU 81 execute an instruction to access these addresses, it is possible to execute access to the corresponding hardware.

  The configuration of the above-mentioned built-in ROM (0000H to 2FFFH) can be divided into a first ROM area and a second ROM area. Among these, the first ROM area is an area that mainly controls the progress of the game. In addition, the second ROM area is an area for controlling processing related to a situation different from the normal progression of the game, mainly error related.

  The first ROM area has a first control area ("0000H" to "11FAH") and a first data area ("1200H" to "1D9EH") shown on the right side of the figure. The second ROM area also has a second control area ("2000H" to "22E4H") and a second data area ("22E5H" to "2346H") shown on the right side of the figure. .

  Furthermore, in the second control area, an unused area (1D9FH to 1FFFH) is interposed between the second control area and the first data area described above. Also, the final address (22E4H) of the second control area and the start address (22E5H) of the second data area are continuous, and after the final address (2346H) of the second data area, the unused area (2347H to 2FBFH) And management areas (2FC0H to 2FFFH) are provided.

  In the present embodiment, the first ROM area is configured to have a larger capacity than the second ROM area. For example, the first ROM area does not include the unused area, and consists of only the first control area and the first data area, and the second ROM area similarly does not include the unused area, and the second control area and the This relationship is also established when it is assumed that only two data areas are used. The memory map shown in FIG. 11 is an example, and the number of bytes of each area and the presence or absence of unused areas can be variously changed.

  The configuration of the above-mentioned built-in RWM (F000H to F3FFH) can be divided into a first RWM area and a second RWM area. Among these, the first RWM area may be referred to as an area (use area) in which information (game data) mainly based on the progress of the game is written and stored as necessary, or the written information is further updated ). In addition, the second RWM area is an area (sometimes referred to as outside the use area) that stores information based on processing that is different from the normal progression of the game, such as error-related operations. It can be said that the first RWM area is the RWM area used in the first control, and the second RWM area is the RWM area used in the second control.

  The first RWM area has a first work area ("F000H" to "F14AH") and a first stack area ("F1D7H" to "F1FFH") shown on the right side of the figure. The second RWM area also has a second work area ("F210H" to "F21EH") and a second stack area ("F3F3H" to "F3FFH") shown on the right side of the figure. . Here, it is also possible to define the second RWM region to start from F200H.

  The first stack area is an area used when the program related to the first control needs to store data internally, and the second stack area corresponds to the program related to the second control Is an area used when it is necessary to store data internally. In the first stack area and the second stack area, for example, information (return address data) of a return address stored at the time of transition to a subroutine is written as needed according to the game situation. Note that the memory map shown in FIG. 11 is an example, and the number of bytes in each area can be variously changed.

  An unused area (16 bytes of F200H to F20FH) of a predetermined size is provided between the first stack area and the second work area. It is conceivable that this unused area is essential. Furthermore, an unused area (F14BH to F1D6H, F21FH to F3F2H) of a predetermined size is provided between the first work area and the first stack area and between the second work area and the second stack area. ing. It is considered that these unused areas are not required.

  The first RWM area is larger in capacity than the second RWM area. Further, in the present embodiment, a set of the first work area and the first stack area is set as a first RWM area, and a set of the second work area and the second stack area is set as a second RWM area. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the first stack area is not included in the first RWM area and the second stack area is not included in the second RWM area. In this case, for example, the first RWM area may be allocated to the space from “F000H” to “F14AH”, and the second RWM area may be allocated to the space from “F210H” to “F21EH”. It is.

Here, with regard to the ROM mounted on the main control board, it is preferable not to provide an unused area (area not filled) in order to prevent writing of a program etc. which has been altered due to a fraudulent act. It is. In order to do this, for example, it is conceivable to fill the unused area with all 0s and to pack the used area at a young (small numerical address) address and write it. In the unused area in the present embodiment, all bits are "0", and in the area other than the unused area, any bit is "1" (not "0". Yes).
<Origin and scope of RWM initialization>

Next, the timing and range of initialization of the first RWM area and the second RWM area will be described. First, the timing and range of initialization of the first RWM area are determined as in the following (1) to (3) according to the situation of power failure recovery in this embodiment.
(1) When the power on / off recovery can not be normally executed when the setting change device is in operation Set data 0 in the first RWM area ("F000H" to "F1FFH").
(2) When the setting change device is operating, except in the case where the power failure recovery can not be normally executed: Within the first RWM area ("F000H" to "F1FFH"), setting value data, interrupt counter, built-in random number processing random number, Data 0 is set in a range ("F008H" to "F1FFH") excluding the soft random number initial value and the RT state number.
(3) In the case of recovery from power failure: The work area (first work area) of the first RWM area ("F000H" to "F1FFH") and the area excluding the maximum usage of the first stack area ("F14BH" to "F1D6H" Set data 0 to ").

Next, the timing and range of initialization of the second RWM area will be described.
(1) When the setting change device is in operation Data 0 is set in the second RWM area (for example, “F200H” to “F3F5H”) excluding the stack usage amount at the time of operation of the setting change device.
(2) In the case of recovery from the power failure: A working area (second working area) of the second RWM area (for example, "F200H" to "F3FFH") and an area excluding the maximum usage of the second stack area (for example, "F200H" Data 0 is set to "F20FH" and "F21FH" to "F3F2H".

  The first work area can be referred to, for example, as a "work area of use area". Furthermore, the first RWM area may include the first work area, for example, from the start address of the first work area to the end address of the first stack area (in the example of FIG. 11, unused F14BH to F1D6H) The region (including the region) may be the first RWM region. Furthermore, the same applies to the second RWM area, for example, from the start address of the second work area to the final address of the second stack area (including the unused area of F21FH to E3F2H in the example of FIG. 11) as the second RWM area. It is also good.

  Here, the first control area, the first data area, the second control area, and the second data area, which are used areas for ROM data, are not written during the game, for example, based on the application. It can be called "area" or the like. Further, the first work area, the first stack area, the second work area, and the second stack area can be referred to as, for example, an "area in which writing can be performed during a game" based on the application.

  And by arranging the area of the built-in ROM and the area of the built-in RWM via the unused area (3000H to EFFFH) as described above, the "areas where writing is not performed during the game" and the "games different from each other" are used. In the RWM, it is possible to clearly divide the structure (and the address) into an area in which writing can be performed.

  Moreover, in the present embodiment, the first data area is disposed after the first control area 1, and thereafter, the second control area 2 and the second data area continue with the unused area (1D9FH to 1FFFH) interposed therebetween. Are arranged. Further, the first work area, the first stack area, the second work area, and the second stack area are disposed with an unused area interposed therebetween. Therefore, any of the "area where writing is not performed during the game" and the "area where writing may be performed during the game" are divided without mixing according to the distinction between the first control and the second control. It can be arranged in the

  The distinction between the first control and the second control can be referred to as, for example, “control distinction”, “control classification”, “control type”, or “control classification”. The first control area and the second control area, the first data area and the second data area, the first work area and the second work area 2, or the combination of the first stack area and the second stack area, respectively. It can be regarded as the same type of information (data) between different control sections, and each of these sets can be referred to as having the same data type.

  In the present embodiment, the same data types (the first control area and the second control area, or the first work area and the second work area, etc.) between different control sections as described above are adjacent to each other. It can be said that the area arrangement is performed without.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the area of the built-in RWM, which is the "area where writing can be performed during the game", the unused area is provided between the first stack area and the second work area. Then, in the area of the built-in RWM, areas of different control sections (first control and second control) are arranged without being adjacent to each other and being mixed via the unused area.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, for example, when control is performed according to the first control program, writing (such as updating) to the second RWM area is not performed, and control is performed according to the second control program. When (1) is performed, writing (such as updating) to the first RWM area is not performed. However, for example, when control is performed according to the first control program, referencing (confirming etc.) data in the second RWM area may be performed, and control is performed according to the second control program. If so, referencing (eg, confirming) data in the first RWM area may be performed.

  Also, as described later, when shifting from the first control to the second control and returning to the first control, or when shifting from the second control to the first control and returning to the second control, The contents of the register are kept the same on return.

  According to the arrangement and handling of the RWM as described above, for example, in the same data type between different control divisions as in the first work area related to the first control and the second work area related to the second control It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation where corresponding data is stored in adjacent areas or addresses. For this reason, for example, even if a third party who performs fraud attempts to search the predetermined data generated during the game, the data stored in the RWM's address is checked in ascending or descending order to confirm necessary data. Can not be detected efficiently.

  That is, in the first work area and the second work area, various winning combinations and error information and the like in the game are stored. Therefore, even if a third party tries to search the first work area and the second work area, for example, by tracing addresses in ascending or descending order, there are stack areas for storing unused areas and return addresses before and after. Therefore, the first work area or the second work area can not be reached immediately.

  Also, even if it is attempted to shift the detection destination from the first work area to the second work area (or from the second work area to the first work area), the target work area is immediately obtained due to the existence of the unused area and the first stack area. Can not reach to. And as a result of these, it becomes possible to delay access to information necessary for fraudulent acts, and it becomes possible to prevent or deter fraud.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the program code existing in the first control area and accessed by the main CPU 81 and the program code existing in the second control area and accessed by the main CPU 81 are separated on the memory map. (In a non-consecutive arrangement of addresses). Furthermore, since the unused area (1D9FH to 1FFFH) is sandwiched between the first control area and the second control area, the arrangement of both program codes is visually clear on the program source code or dump list. It is possible to divide into And it is possible to aim at prevention of fraud also by such separation.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the writing of data to the RWM is limited to only the RWM area defined for the control section being executed. That is, between the first control and the second control, in a predetermined case, transition of the control division is performed, and in the situation where the first control is performed, data on the second work area and the second stack area In the situation where the writing and the data updating are not performed and the second control is performed, the data writing and the data updating on the first work area and the first stack area are not performed.

  Then, writing of data in each control section is performed only in the work area or stack area corresponding to the control section in the control section without shifting to another control section. Therefore, the first control and the second control can be clearly divided in terms of the processing of the main CPU 81, which makes it possible to suppress fraud and early detect.

The area (0000H to 2FFFH) of the built-in ROM is divided into an area (0000H to 1D9EH) related to the first control and an area (2000H to 22E4H) related to the second control. And, by shifting between the first control program and the second control program and performing the control processing, it becomes possible to perform the game control while clearly separating the first control and the second control.
<Process at power on of main control board>

  Next, processing at the time of power on in the main control board will be described. When power is supplied to the main CPU 81 of the main control board 61 via the power supply unit 64, the program code arranged at the address (first control area) which becomes "0000H" of the internal ROM (see FIG. 11) described above. It will be executed in order. The main CPU 81 sets the Q register to “F000H” based on the data in the ROM area and the RWM area related to the first control.

  Next, the main CPU 81 executes the function setting of the main control based on the data in the ROM area and the RWM area related to the first control. Furthermore, the main CPU 81 calculates a checksum based on the data in the ROM area and the RWM area related to the first control, and checks the first RWM and the second RWM (for example, holds the calculated checksum and checksum area). On the basis of the check sum data which has been stored, it is checked whether or not the data stored in the built-in RWM is properly held by power off / power off recovery), and power off recovery data is generated.

  If it demonstrates based on FIG. 12, the process at the time of the power activation shown in FIG. 12 by the power activation to the main CPU 81 of the main control board 61 ("program start process", "power ON process", or "power ON process" Also referred to as “etc.” is executed. In the process at the time of power on, setting of an initial value to a predetermined register is performed (S1), and in the process of initializing this register, an initial value is set in a register built in the main CPU 81. The contents of the setting include the setting of the communication speed of the serial communication circuit provided in the main CPU 81, the setting of the interrupt type (mode), and the setting of the parity given to the command to be transmitted. Furthermore, in this embodiment, only one type of maskable interrupt is used as an interrupt type among various usable interrupt types. Also, even parity is used in setting of parity.

  Subsequently, a maskable interrupt is set (S2), and access to the RWM is permitted (S3). Further, the setting of the built-in random number is performed (S4), and the RWM check is performed. In this RWM check, it is determined whether the backup at the previous power-off is normal or not, based on the calculation of the checksum (S5) and the power-off processed flag indicating that the power-off processing has been completed. Generation of power failure recovery data is performed. In the above-described checksum calculation (S5), the checksum for the same storage area range (here, "F000H" to "F3FFH" of the built-in RWM in FIG. 11) as the RWM checksum in the power-off process (described later). Run.

  Further, in the calculation of the checksum (S5), after the calculation processing, it is determined whether the calculation has been completed for the entire range to be processed (S6), and the calculation for the entire range has not been completed (S6) S6: NO), returns to the calculation process (S5). Then, the calculation of the checksum is repeated until the calculation for the entire target range is completed. Here, the determination as to whether or not the calculation for the entire range to be processed is completed may be performed after the calculation for each address, or may be performed after the calculation for each predetermined range.

  After the calculation of the checksum for the entire target range is completed (S6: YES), the power failure recovery data is stored in the register (S7). Here, the power failure recovery data is different between when the power failure execution processing flag or the RWM checksum is abnormal and when both are normal. Further, the data of the input port 1 is stored in the register (S8). Here, the data of the port (input port 1) to which the designated switch signal of the next step (S9) is input is acquired.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether the designated switch is turned on (S9). The designated switch refers to three switches: a door switch, a setting door switch, and a setting key switch. Then, the status of the door switch signal, the setting door switch signal and the setting key switch signal is checked (S9), and if all the switch signals are ON (S9: YES), the setting change device processing described later (see FIG. 13) I do. Here, in the present embodiment, when all switch signals are ON, the above-mentioned door (front door portion 11) is opened, the setting door of the setting unit 62 (see FIG. 4) is opened, and the setting key switch 68 Is a rotation in the ON direction, and when these three conditions are satisfied, the determination result of S9 is "YES". The setting door switch may be excluded from the designation switch, and the setting change device may be in the operating state if the two switches, the door switch and the setting key switch, are in the ON state.

  For example, when the door (front door portion 11) is closed (when the door switch is in the closed state), the setting door of the setting unit 62 (see FIG. 4) is in the open state, and the setting key switch 68 is on. Even if the rotation is in the direction, the determination of S9 does not become "YES". In such a case, there is a possibility that fraud has been made, so by not making the determination result "YES", it is not shifted to the setting change device processing (also referred to as "setting change processing") described later. It has become. If the setting door switch 67 (see FIG. 4) is not provided, the result of checking the states of the door switch signal and the setting key switch signal in the determination processing of S9 is that all switch signals are ON. Indicates that is turned on.

  If the condition is satisfied and "YES" is determined in the determination (S9) whether or not the above-mentioned designated switch is ON, it is determined whether the power failure recovery data is abnormal (S10) ). If a positive determination is made in the determination (S10) related to the power failure / return data, and if “YES” is obtained (if the power failure / recovery data is abnormal), a setting change device process described later (see FIG. 13) Transition to If a negative determination is made and the determination is "NO" (if the power failure recovery data is not abnormal), it is determined whether the setting change impossible flag is ON (S11), and a negative determination is made. Also, when the result is “NO” (when the setting change impossible flag is not ON), the processing shifts to the setting change device processing (see FIG. 13).

  Furthermore, in the determination relating to the setting change impossible flag (S11), when an affirmative determination is made and “YES” is obtained (when the setting change impossible flag is on), confirmation of power failure recovery data described later It shifts to processing (S12). The setting change impossible flag is one of the data stored in the RWM, and it is from the winning process (S60) to the check at the end of the game (S68) in the game progress main process (see FIG. 14) described later. Is data indicating that the setting can not be changed.

  If it is determined whether or not the designated switch is ON (S9), at least one of the switch signals is not ON (S9: NO), or the above-mentioned setting change impossible flag is ON. In the case (S11: YES), the process proceeds to the process (S12) of confirmation of the power failure recovery data. In the process (S12) of confirmation of the power failure recovery data, the power shutdown process (described later) is performed at the previous power shutdown, and calculation is performed for a predetermined RWM area at the previous power shutdown. If the value of the check sum is normal, it is determined that it is normal, otherwise it is determined that it is abnormal.

If it is determined that the power failure recovery data is abnormal (S12: NO), an error display is executed (S13), and an error code (corresponding to the acquired number of sheets display LED) (S12) Display E1) and stop the operation of the gaming machine. The E1 error, which is an error at this time, is an error that can not be canceled if the setting change device process (see FIG. 13) is not executed, and one of the non-returnable errors (non-returnable errors) described later. is there. If it is determined that the power failure recovery data is normal (S12: YES) in the process of confirming the power failure recovery data (S12), the process proceeds to the power recovery processing (see FIG. 21). The power supply recovery process (see FIG. 21) will be described later.
<Setting change device processing>

  FIG. 12 shows the above-mentioned setting change device processing. In the setting change device processing, the stack pointer is set to start the operation of the setting change device. Then, as shown in the figure, when the predetermined range of RWM initialization is stored in the register (S21), it is determined that the power-off process is normally executed as the "predetermined range" related to the RWM initialization here. The above-mentioned storage area range (here, addresses F000H to F3FFH in FIG. 11) is set. Furthermore, here, storage of the setting value data relating to the setting value described above, the RT state number relating to the replay time (RT), and the condition device flag relating to the condition device described above is not performed. Here, RT (replay time) is a gaming state in which the probability of winning a replay is improved more than usual, and the RT state number is a number for distinguishing a plurality of RT states having different tendencies of replaying. . Further, although the set value can be described as defining the theoretical hitability (the player's advantage) as described above, more specifically, the set value is different from the set value, for example. , It can be described that the winning probability of the part is different. In addition to this, the setting value may be used in a mode that the winning probability of the combination is the same but the winning probability of another lottery (AT lottery etc.) based on the winning of the combination is different.

  Subsequently, it is judged whether or not the power failure recovery data is normal (S22), and it is judged whether or not the power failure process (described later) is normally performed. The power failure recovery data is stored in a predetermined register after the calculation of the checksum is completed in the above-described power-on process. When it is determined that the power is not normally cut off (S22: NO), the above-mentioned set value data, RT state number, and condition device flag are included in the “specified range” to be initialized. The storage area range including these is stored in a predetermined register (S23). Here, the “specified range” is a range including the set value data, the RT state number, and the condition device flag, and is distinguished from the “predetermined range” described above.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the determination (S22) whether or not the power failure / return data described above is normal (S22: YES), the predetermined register (here, the AF register) is determined. Is saved (S24), and the contents (return address) of the register are stored in the above-mentioned first stack area. Then, transition from the first control to the second control is performed, and RWM initialization 3 (S25), which is a control module related to the second control described above, is executed. This RWM initialization 3 (S25) is a part of the second control program developed in the above-mentioned second control area. Then, in RWM initialization 3 (S25), of the RWM area (here, F200H to F3FFH) related to the second control, the stack usage amount at the time of operation of the setting change device (stack area required at the time of operation of the setting change device) The excluded RWM area (F200H to F3F5H) is cleared. Details of the RWM initialization 3 will be described later.

  After the RWM initialization 3 (S25), there is a return (S26) of the AF register, and a transition (return) from the second control to the first control is performed. Then, the timer interrupt is activated by the process of activation setting of the interrupt (S27). In the processing of activation setting of the interrupt (S27), the type of the interrupt and the cycle of the timer interrupt are set. After this processing, timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 18) which is timer interrupt processing can be executed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the period of the timer interrupt is 2.235 ms.

  Subsequently, data indicating "setting change start" is stored in the register (S28). The data indicating “setting change start” is a command for notifying the above-mentioned sub control board 31 that the setting change device processing has been started and is being executed. Further, processing of control command set 1 (S29) is performed, but in the present embodiment, processing of control command set 1 (S29) is processing of control command set 2. The processing of the control command set 2 is to carry out processing for storing the sub control command described above in a ring buffer (transmission buffer) temporarily stored before transmission. Here, in the process of control command set 1 (S29), the sub control command indicating "setting change start" is set in the ring buffer. The details of the process of the control command set 2 will be described later.

  Subsequently, it is checked whether the set value is within the predetermined range (S30), and the set value is not in the normal range (here, one of six from “1” to “6”) (S30) In step S30, the setting value is set to 1 (step S31), and the process proceeds to processing of displaying that the setting change device is in operation (step S31). On the other hand, when the set value is in the normal range (S30: YES), the process proceeds to the process (S32) of displaying the setting change device in operation without setting the set value (= 1) (S31). Here, in the present embodiment, the normal range of the setting value is “1” to “6”, and “0” is not used as the value of the normal range. This is because it is conceivable that the value accidentally becomes “0” when an abnormality occurs in the control for some reason, and such a case can be accurately determined as an abnormality.

  In the process (S32) of the setting change device operation display described above, the lamp (LED) is turned on during the setting change device processing, and the setting value is displayed. "Lit" and "display" to be performed here are processing to set data (flag) for "light" and "display". Specifically, the data set here is a timer after this By predetermined processing (here, processing of LED display in FIG. 18 (S 549)) in the interrupt processing (refer to FIG. 18), the setting display LED 66 is outputted to drive the obtained number display LED. Then, in the present embodiment, the set value is displayed on the setting display LED (66), and "-" indicating that the setting change device is in operation is displayed on the obtained number display LED.

  Furthermore, the process (S33) of determination related to the setting / reset button signal (setting / reset switch signal) is performed, and the setting / reset button signal changes from OFF to ON when the door switch signal and the setting door switch signal are ON. If it is (S33: YES), the process proceeds to the process of updating the set value (S34), and in other cases, it proceeds to the process of determination related to the start lever 25 (S35). Here, as described above, the setting / reset button (69) related to the above-mentioned setting / reset button signal shares one button device as a setting button (setting switch) and a reset button (reset switch). It is a thing. Further, based on the rising data of the setting / reset button signal, the determination (S33) related to the setting / reset button signal is performed.

  In the process of updating the set value (S34), the set value is incremented by one. However, if the value exceeds the maximum set value (here, 6) as a result of addition, the set value returns to 1. In the process of determination related to the start lever 25 (S35), when the start lever sensor signal (start sensor signal) changes from OFF to ON (S35: YES), the process of determination related to the setting key switch 68 (S36) In other cases (S35: NO), the process proceeds to processing of determination related to the setting / reset button signal (S33).

  In the determination process (S36) related to the setting key switch 68, when the setting key switch signal is turned from ON to OFF with the door switch signal and the setting door switch signal ON (S36: YES), the setting change The process proceeds to the processing of display clear during device operation (S37), and in the other cases (S36: NO), the processing of S36 is repeated. In the processing (S37) of display clear during operation of the setting change device, the lamp is turned off during the setting change processing, and the display end of the set value is performed. More specifically, the setting display LED is turned off, and "00" is displayed on the acquired number display LED. Here, “light off” and “display end” are processing for setting data (flags) for “light off” and “display end” as described above, and specifically, they are set here For the drive of the setting display LED and the obtained number display LED by predetermined processing (here, processing of the LED in FIG. 18 (S549)) in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 18) after this data Used for

  Subsequently, data indicating "setting change end" is set in the register (S38). The data indicating “setting change end” is a command for notifying the above-described sub control board 31 that the setting change device processing has ended. Furthermore, processing of control command set 1 (S39) is performed, and this control command set 1 (S39) uses the same control module as control command set 1 (S29) described above. Then, in the process of control command set 1 (S39), a sub control command indicating "setting change end" is set in the ring buffer. Then, after that, the process proceeds to a game progress main process (see FIG. 14) to be described later.

In addition, when making a setting change apparatus into an operation state, it was necessary for a plurality of switches to be in an ON state (S9 of FIG. 12), when making a setting change apparatus into a non-operating state, only a setting key switch Is confirmed (S36 in FIG. 13). That is, it can be said that the condition of the operation termination of the setting change device is relaxed compared to the condition of the start.
<< Control Command Set 2 >>

  Next, processing of the control command set 2 performed in the control command set 1 (S29, S39) described above will be described. In this control command set 2, the control command buffer address is set, and data of the control command write pointer is acquired. Further, the designated address is set, designated address data is acquired, and it is judged whether or not the control command is smaller than "64".

Then, if the control command is smaller than "64", the control command is set, the control command write pointer is updated, and the process is finished. In the process of determining whether the control command is smaller than "64", if the control command is not smaller than "64", the control command is not set or the control command write pointer is not updated. Finish the process.
<Game Progress Main Processing>

  Next, the game progress main processing will be described based on FIG. Here, an outline of the game progress main process will be described, and among various control modules used in the game progress main process, the main ones in the present embodiment will be described later. In the game progress main process, the stack pointer is set (S51), and in the process of the game start set (S52), the following process is performed. That is, in the processing (S52) of the game start set, the game state is set.

  That is, in the processing of the game start set (S52), the set at the game start is performed. Furthermore, although illustration is omitted, the game standby display start time is set, the draw-in symbol data is cleared, and the operation state is set.

  More specifically, based on the symbol combination stop-displayed in the previous game, whether the current game is a re-game or a game in which the bonus product continuous operating device according to the above-mentioned first kind special role is operated Data indicating whether it is (1 type BB game) is set. Furthermore, wait for the weight after the sub bonus. Here, the sub-bonus is a bonus managed on the side of the above-mentioned sub-control board 31, and, for example, when a specific replay (specific replay) is won, it is continued over a predetermined number of subsequent games. It means the game state such as.

  As a specific example, the symbol of "7" is displayed on the pay line in effect, and it becomes a prize state of specific replay, and further, from the prize of this specific replay over 30 games, AT (assist time) It is possible to cite a gaming state such as giving a profit by setting the state. And, the wait for the weight after the sub bonus means the waiting time for performing the bonus end demonstration in the same manner as the bonus (main bonus) managed by the main control board 61 when the AT state ends. . The start timing of the standby time can be set as when 30 games have passed since the main control board 61 has won the specific replay.

  Subsequently, in the processing of the game start set (S52), although not shown, commands indicating various game information are written in the command buffer. Further, the fullness detection signal is checked, and when the game medal auxiliary storage 71 is full, an error code (FE) indicating that is displayed on the number-of-acquisitions display LED, and the game is stopped.

  When the game medal auxiliary storage 71 is not full or the error is canceled, the game medal insertion is accepted. In accepting the game medal insertion, when the replay is not activated, the blocker signal is turned ON (passable state) to start accepting the game medal insertion. In the case of replay operation, if it is possible to insert the game medals into the storage device (if the number of credits has not reached 50, which is the maximum number), the blocker signal is turned ON (to form a medal channel) and to the storage device When the game medal can not be inserted, the blocker signal is not turned ON, and the game medal of the bet number in the previous game is automatically inserted. The blocker process at the time of replaying operation will be described later.

  Subsequently, in the game progress main process, as shown in FIG. 14, a process of reading the game medals (S53) is executed. In the game medal reading process (S53), the game medal quantity data is read, and the presence or absence of the game medal quantity is checked. After the process of reading the gaming medals (S53), the presence or absence of gaming medals is checked (S54), and if there are no gaming medals (S54: NO), display when waiting for gaming medals to be inserted (the medals can be inserted (S55), and if there is a game medal (S54: YES), the process proceeds to the game medal management process (S56). Here, the presence of the game medal indicates that the game medal is betted (betted) in order to satisfy the prescribed number for playing the game.

  In the process of displaying when waiting for game medal insertion (S55), when the setting key switch signal changes from OFF to ON, the blocker is turned OFF, and the control command at the time of starting the installation value display is set. Furthermore, the set value is displayed on the setting display LED until the set key switch signal is turned from ON to OFF. Then, the control command at the end of the setting value display is set, and the blocker is turned on. Then, if the game standby display start time has elapsed, the process proceeds to the process of clearing the acquired number display, and in the other cases, the process is ended.

  In game medal management (S56), blocker state confirmation processing is performed, and in the blocker state confirmation processing, insertion processing based on inserted game medals, clearing button, MAX bet button (3 sheets insertion button Perform processing based on the operation of). The game medal management (S56) will be described later (see FIG. 26). Furthermore, after the game medal management process (S56), soft random number update 1 (S57), which is a process for software random number update, is performed. In the soft random number update 1 (S57), the soft random number update 2 is performed, but the soft random number update 2 is to update the built-in random number processing random number.

  Subsequently, in the start lever check process (S58), the reception check of the start lever is performed. That is, although illustration is omitted, the insertion / withdrawal sensor abnormality display is performed, and when the number of inserted sheets does not match the specified number, the processing is ended. Furthermore, when the monitoring time at blocker ON (blocker ON monitoring time) has not elapsed, the game start display LED signal is turned OFF, and the processing is ended. Subsequently, the game start display LED signal is turned on. Then, when the start lever sensor signal changes from OFF to ON, the process shifts to start lever reception, and in other cases, the processing ends.

  More specifically, as the acceptance check of the start lever 25, the following processing is sequentially performed. That is, the selector passage sensor staying flag indicating whether or not the game medal is staying in the selector passage is checked, and when the game medal is staying, an error code (CH) corresponding to the acquired number display LED is displayed. Stop the game. In other cases or when the error is canceled, the input sensor abnormality detection data is checked, and when the abnormality input is detected, the error code (C0) corresponding to the number-of-acquisitions display LED is displayed, and the game is stopped. Do. Specific processes for these will be described later.

  Furthermore, in other cases (when abnormal input is not detected) or when the error is canceled, the dispensing sensor abnormality detection data is checked, and when abnormal input is detected, H0 is displayed on the acquired number display LED. Display and stop the game. Furthermore, in other cases (when abnormal input is not detected) or when the error is canceled, the overflow detection data is checked, and when the game medal auxiliary storage is full, the number of obtained sheets display FE is displayed Stop the game. In other cases (when the game medal auxiliary storage is not full) or when the error is canceled, the process further proceeds to the following.

  That is, the number of inserted game medals is compared with the specified number, and if it matches with the specified number, the processing proceeds to the next processing (processing to determine whether to accept start lever (S59)), and in other cases The process returns to the game medal reading process (53) as the start lever can not be accepted. Further, in the process (S59) for deciding whether or not to accept the start lever described above, the stop lever sensor signal changes from OFF to ON with no operation of the stop buttons 24L to 24R, the checkout button and each closing button. If it does, it will be the start lever acceptance, otherwise it will be the start lever non acceptance. Then, the blocker 47 of the game medal selector 44 is turned OFF (solenoid OFF), and the game medal selector 44 is put in a return state where passage of the game medals is impossible.

  If it is determined that the start lever is not received (S59: NO), the process returns to the game medal reading process (S53), and if the start lever is received (S59: YES) The internal random number (hardware random number) is taken in, and the process proceeds to the internal lottery start process (S60) which is a part extraction process. Here, when it is determined that the start lever is not received (S59: NO), loop processing (S53 to S59) is arranged after the set of stack pointers (S51), and therefore, the set of stack pointers (S51) Is always executed before loop processing (S53 to S59).

  In the internal lottery start process (S60), an internal lottery process for determining a symbol control number or the like is performed according to a winning combination relating to a condition device (replay, a winning combination, a combination, a combination continuous actuation device). In the internal lottery process, different combination lottery tables are used in accordance with the gaming state, and the type of winning number (winning combination) and the winning probability are different according to various gaming states and RT states. Further, as a random number for internal lottery, one obtained by adding a processing random number (here, software random number) to the above-mentioned internal random number is used. Furthermore, with regard to the lottery related to various roles, the order of the lottery is determined based on the type of the role. The details of the internal lottery start process (S60) will be described later (see FIG. 15).

  In the processing (S61 to S65) of the rotating drum management including the rotating drum rotation start processing (S61), management of acceleration to stop of the rotating drum is performed. Moreover, although the process (S61 to S65) of the turning drum management is omitted in the figure, it is also executed within the simulated game start process which is a process for performing the above-mentioned simulated game. Then, in the process (S61 to S65) of the drum management, control of a mechanism related to the rotation of the drum is performed, which will be described later.

  In the process of starting rotation of the drum (S61), a data set for starting rotation of the drum and inspection of a rotation defect are performed. More specifically, it is determined whether or not there is a data set request for which there is a rotating cylinder (data set request cylinder), and if there is a data set requested cylinder, data is set to the requested one. Furthermore, when a rotation failure is detected in the constant speed rotating drum, the required data of the acceleration state set is set to the relevant rotating drum, and the process returns to the above-mentioned determination of the presence or absence of the data set request rotating drum. Then, when there is no data set request rotation, the process shifts to soft random number update processing 1 which is the control module described above.

  Subsequent to the rotating drum rotation start process (S61), the number of shifted frames (pull-in point) is created (S62). In the process of creating the number of shifted frames (S52), data indicating the number of shifted frames is created for all the turning drums that have not been stopped. More specifically, although illustration is omitted, when there is no request for generation of the number of shifted frames, the processing is ended. Further, the following processing is performed on all the turning drums requested to make the number of shifted frames in the order of the 3rd time barrel (51R), the second time barrel (51C), and the first time barrel (51L).

  First, the RWM address storing the table search number used to create the number of shifted frames is stored. Subsequently, the control trunk number is stored in the RWM, and the drawing point initialization processing for the number of symbol arrangement frames is performed. Further, control control execution processing is performed, and table set control processing is performed. Furthermore, the control symbol number is initialized and the following processing is performed on each control symbol number.

  First, processing for creating a stoppable position is performed. Subsequently, the number of shifted frames is stored in RWM corresponding to the control torso and the control symbol number. Further, the request to create the number of shifted frames is cleared, and the process shifts to processing for waiting for an interrupt.

  After such a process for creating the number of shifted frames (S62), the process proceeds to a process for checking rotation stop acceptance (S63). In the rotation stop acceptance check process (S63), first, the sensors of all the cylinders are checked to check the stop operation. If the stop acceptance is not possible, the process is ended. Furthermore, when one of the output signals (stop button sensor signal) of the stop button sensor corresponding to the rotating drum is turned ON, the process shifts to processing for accepting the stop button. Further, the stop acceptance information data is set in accordance with the rotation or stop state of all the drums, the stop position is determined, and the process proceeds to the processing of the entire drum stop check (S64).

  In the full rotation stop check process (S64), it is checked whether all the rotation cylinders are in a stop state and whether the operation of the stop buttons (24L, 24C, 24R) and the start lever 25 is completed. In the full cylinder stop check process (S64), all the rotating cylinders 51L to 51R are stopped, and the operation of the start lever 25 and the stop buttons 24L to 24R is started, for example, at the third stop as described above. A check is made as to whether or not the lever 25 or any one of the stop buttons 24L to 24R is continued to operate, etc., and is properly terminated.

  Subsequently, in the process (S65) of the determination of the full cylinder stop (S65: YES), the process proceeds to the process of the display determination (S66), and in other cases, the process of the number of shifted frames created ( Return to S62).

  In the display determination process (S66), the following processes are sequentially performed. That is, as a result of the display determination, when the combination display of the symbols is abnormal, an error code (E5) corresponding to the acquired number display LED is displayed, and the game operation is stopped.

  Subsequently, the process proceeds to the process of paying out game medals by winning (S67). In the process of paying out game medals by winning (S67), when there is a payout of game medals by winning, game medals are paid out. Further, although illustration is omitted, at the time of payout of the game medals, display processing for displaying the number of the game medals paid out is performed. In this display processing of the number of game medals, every time one game medal is paid out, the value displayed on the display device (here, the stored number display portion) is updated.

  More specifically, in order to manage the payout of game medals due to winning and the number of payouts at the time of BB operation, first, a control command at the start of game medal payout start is set. Subsequently, the number of times of medal payout signal output is set, and when there is no game medal payout number, the processing is ended. Further, the number of obtainable medals at the time of BB operation is updated, and the processing described later is performed for the number of payouts, and a control command at the time of game medal payout end is set.

  As processing concerning the above-mentioned payout number, first, the following processing is performed according to the payout destination of the game medal. That is, when the payout to the storage device is possible, one stored number is added after waiting for the addition time, and when the payout to the storage device is not possible, one gaming medal is paid out. Subsequently, as a process according to the payout number, the acquired number data is incremented by one.

  Next, processing at the end of the game (S68) is performed. In the process at the end of the game (S68), first, the replay indicator LED is turned off. Subsequently, the re-play operation status flag and the winning and re-play condition device number are cleared. Furthermore, when BB is in operation, processing of BB operation management is performed, and when RB is operating, processing of RB operation management is performed. When the bonus is not in operation, the process shifts to RT state management processing.

  Thereafter, an output request at the end of the game is set (S69), the above-described control command set 1 is performed (S70), and the main processing of the game progress is executed again. In addition, even if winnings have occurred in the prizes and the continuous operation device, when the combination of the corresponding symbols is not uniform, the flag relating to these winnings is carried over. In addition, the flag relating to the condition device for replays and small winnings is cleared. That is, as the end processing according to the above-mentioned gaming state, RWM clear processing of the condition device number other than the carryover combination, RT number generation processing, freeze state transition processing, external signal data generation processing, etc. It will be.

  Subsequently, among various processes in the game progress main process (S51 to S70), the internal lottery start process (S60) will be described in more detail. As described above, the internal lottery start process (S60) is a process that shifts when reception of the start lever operation is detected in a situation where a game can be started. As shown in FIG. 15, in the internal lottery start process (S60), condition device number set (S81), symbol control number set (S82), drawn symbol data set (S83), control symbol set (S84), ball withdrawal The respective processes of lottery management (S85), condition device command set (S86), rotation start standby (S87), and rotation start preparation (S88) are sequentially executed.

  Among these, in the condition device number set (S81), it is first determined whether or not the bonus condition device is in operation. If the bonus condition device is not in operation, data indicating the bonus condition device number is stored (S 502), and data indicating the winning and re-playing condition device numbers is stored.

  In the above-described process of withdrawal ball extraction management (S85 in FIG. 15), data relating to the effect group number is set, a designated number is set, processing of main gaming state management is performed, and processing of condition device command set (FIG. It transfers to 15 S86).

  In the processing of the condition device command set (S86 in FIG. 15), as shown in FIG. 16, interrupts are prohibited (S511), the AF register is saved (S512), and the process shifts to the second control, and the symbol Processing of stop signal output (S513) is executed. The processing of symbol stop signal output performed as the second control (S513) is a processing for outputting symbol stop signal data for a test shot, and the details will be described later (see FIG. 33).

  When the symbol stop signal output process (S513) is completed, the process returns to the condition device command set process (FIG. 16) according to the first control, and the AF register is restored (S514). Further, the interrupt is permitted (S515), the command table at start lever acceptance time is set (S516), and the process returns to the calling source.

  In the process (S87 in FIG. 15) of the spinning drum rotation start standby, it is determined whether the aforementioned minimum game time has elapsed, and when the minimum game time has elapsed, data of the minimum game time is stored. Subsequently, the condition device output time is saved, and processing for waiting for command transmission is performed.

  In the process of preparation for starting rotation of the drum (S88 in FIG. 15), rotation stop data and push order data are initialized, and data relating to a generation request of the rotation stop flag and the number of shifted frames is initialized. Further, data of the number of initialized symbol groups is set, and the symbol control data table 1 is set. Also, the initialization start RWM address is set, and the stop symbol data is initialized.

  Subsequently, data relating to an output request at the start of full drum rotation is set, and the same control command set 1 as described above is executed. Then, the data relating to the full rotation drum rotation start bit and the rotation start preparation state is set, and the data indicating the rotation start rotation drum is set.

  Next, the display determination process (S66) in the above-described game progress main process (see FIG. 14) will be described. FIG. 17 shows the contents of the process of display determination (S66). In this display determination process, an acquired number display clear process (S401) is executed, and thereafter, various data set processes (S402, S403) and an E5 error set process (S404) are executed.

  The above-mentioned acquisition number display clear processing (S401) is for clearing the data of the acquisition number display, and the same processing as the acquisition number display clear processing (S339) in the above-mentioned storage input processing (see FIG. 27). It is. Furthermore, the above-mentioned various data set processing (S402, S403) is a set of RWM addresses (S402) according to predetermined stop symbol data, and a set of RWM addresses according to the number of control symbol groups and kicking symbol data (S404) It is.

  Here, the kicking symbol data is symbol data that constitutes a symbol combination that does not correspond to the result of the winning combination. The kicking symbol data corresponds to, for example, symbol data relating to a part of symbols constituting the symbol combination of BB when the player does not hit the above-mentioned BB (big bonus).

  Furthermore, a set operation relating to the kicking symbol is performed (S405), and the correlation between the kicking symbol data and the symbol displayed in the game at this time is calculated. Then, it is determined whether or not the displayed symbol corresponds to the kicking symbol (S406), and if the kicking symbol is displayed (S406: YES), the processing is returned to the non-returnable error process (see FIG. 29). Transition. This return impossible error process will be described later.

  On the other hand, if the kicking symbol is not displayed (S406: NO), the next stop symbol data address is set (S407), and the next kicking symbol data address is set (S408). Then, it is determined whether or not the determination according to the number of control symbol groups is completed (S409), and if it is completed (S409: YES), the process proceeds to one-line display determination processing (S421). In addition, when the determination according to the number of control symbol groups is not completed (S409: NO), the process returns to immediately before the arithmetic processing (S405) according to the kicking symbol.

  If it is determined in S409 that the determination corresponding to the number of control symbols has been completed (S409: YES), the process proceeds to S421, and the one-line display determination process is performed. In the one-line display determination process (S421), display determination of one effective line and data setting at the time of display are performed. Specifically, according to the symbol combination decided to stop on the activated line, the operation type, symbol combination display flag, game medal payout number data, payout number buffer, and winning symbol group are stored.

  Subsequently, processing for effect display at the time of full rotation stop is performed by processing of effect display at the time of full rotation stop (S 422). In this effect display process (S422) at the time of full drum rotation stop, it waits until the third stop time standby time related to the third stop operation passes, performs processing of main gaming state management, and stops full drum rotation Set the control command at the time, and perform RWM initialization at the time of full rotation stop.

  Further, the process proceeds to the processing of the insertion / withdrawal sensor abnormality display (S 423), and although the details will be described later, the processing of the insertion / withdrawal sensor abnormality set is performed. Then, the presence or absence of an error display request is checked, and if there is an error display request, an error display of the corresponding error is performed, and in the other cases, the processing is ended. Also, if the error is cleared, the switch on / off sensor abnormality clear is performed.

  FIG. 57 more specifically shows the above-mentioned insertion / dispensing sensor abnormality display processing (S423 in FIG. 17). In this closing / dispensing sensor abnormality display processing, as shown in FIG. 57, interrupts are inhibited (S431), the AF register is saved (S432), and processing of closing / dispensing sensor abnormality set pertaining to the second control is performed. Perform (S433). Details of the insertion / dispensing sensor abnormality setting process (S433) will be described later (see FIG. 36).

  After the loading / dispensing sensor abnormality setting process (S433), the AF register is restored (S434), the interrupt is permitted (S435), and the error display request data acquisition process is performed (S436). In this error display request data acquisition process (S436), error display request data is acquired. Then, it is judged whether or not there is error display request data (S437), and if there is no error display request data (S437: NO), the processing is ended. If there is error display request data in the above-described S437 (S437: YES), processing for error display (S438) is performed. Details of the error display process (S438) will be described later (see FIG. 24).

Thereafter, the interruption is inhibited (S439), the AF register is saved (S440), and the processing for clearing the abnormality of the insertion / withdrawal sensor according to the second control (S441) is performed. The details of the insertion and payout sensor abnormality clear processing will be described later (see FIG. 37). After the charge / detachment sensor abnormality clear process (S441), the AF register is restored (S442), the interrupt is permitted (S443), and the process returns to the leading interrupt prohibition process (S431).
<Timer interrupt processing on main control board>

  Next, timer interrupt processing will be described based on FIG. Here, an outline of the timer interrupt process will be described, and among various control modules used in the timer interrupt process, the main ones in the present embodiment will be described later. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed at predetermined intervals (here, 2.235 ms) based on the process at power on shown in FIG. 12 and the activation in the setting change device process (see S27) shown in FIG. It is.

  In the timer interrupt process, the value of the register is saved as an initialization process at the start of the interrupt (S 541), and the interrupt flag for inhibiting the duplicate interrupt is cleared (S 542). The process of saving the register (S 541) in this initialization process is for enabling the timer interrupt process to use the register used in the above-mentioned game progress main process (see FIG. 14). is there.

  Subsequently, a power off process (S543) is performed. In the power-off process (S543), various processes are performed after the determination of the presence or absence of the power-off detection signal, the details of which will be described later. Furthermore, the interrupt counter is updated (S544), input port data generation (S545), rotating drum drive management (S546), port output (S547), control command transmission (S548), LED display (S549), sub notification data output (S550) Each process of timer measurement (S551) is sequentially performed.

  Then, after these are executed, as shown in the figure, the process proceeds to the process of error management (S552, see FIG. 20). Subsequently, the external signal output data management process (S759) and the external signal output process (S760) are sequentially performed. Each of these processes (S759, S760) will be described later.

  Further, the AF register is saved (S761), and the process shifts to the second control to perform test signal output processing (762). The process of the test signal output (S762) will be described later (see FIG. 35). When the test signal output process (S762) is completed, the process returns to the first control, and the AF register is restored (S763). Then, processing of soft random number management (S764) is performed, and interrupt permission is performed after register return (S765), and the processing is ended.

In the following, each process (S543, S545 to 551 etc.) in the timer interrupt process will be described, but first, the power-off process (S543) among the processes described above will be described.
<< Power off process >>

  In the power-off process (S543), as shown in FIG. 19, it is judged whether or not the previous power-off detection signal is ON (S561), and if it is ON (S561: YES), Input port 0 data is input (S 562). Further, it is judged whether or not the power-off detection signal is ON (S563), and if it is ON (S563: YES), data of the clear output port address and the number of output ports are set (S564).

  Subsequently, the output port (0 to 6) is turned off (S565), and the data of the next output port address is set (S566). Further, it is judged whether or not the output is completed (S567), and if it is completed (S567: YES), the stack pointer is saved (S568). If the output is not completed at S567 (S567: NO), the process returns to the process (S565) of turning off the output port (0 to 6) of S565.

  After the above-described S568, the power-off process completion flag is set (S569), the RWM checksum data is cleared (S570), and the initial data for RWM checksum calculation is cleared (S571). Further, the RWM checksum is calculated (S572), and it is determined whether the calculation for all the bytes is completed (S573). Furthermore, if the calculation for all the bytes is completed (S573: YES), RWM checksum data is set (S574). Then, the access to the RWM is inhibited (S575), and the process is looped to wait for the reset (S576).

  If the power-off detection signal is not ON at the previous time (S561: NO), or if the power-off detection signal is not ON at S563 (S563: NO), the process ends. .

As a trigger for execution of the power-off process, hardware that generates a non-maskable interrupt (NMI) based on the fact that a power-off signal indicating a voltage drop is input to the NMI terminal (not shown) of the main CPU 81 In the processing, there is a software-like operation performed by confirming a power-off flag set when a voltage drop is detected. In addition, a power-off flag may be set based on a power-off signal input to the NMI terminal as an execution trigger of the power-off process.
<< Input port data generation >>

Subsequently, in the input port data generation process, the process of reading the input ports 0 to 2 is performed.
<< Spindle drive management >>

In the process of the above-described rotation drive control (S546), drive control of each rotation drum is performed. More specifically, the number of rotations is set and processing of the rotation data address set is performed. Furthermore, when the drum drive control is performed and the processing for all the drums is completed, the process proceeds to port output processing (S547 in FIG. 18). If it is determined in the above process that the rotating drum drive control has not ended for all the rotating cylinders, the processing returns to the process of setting the rotating drum data address.
<<< Turning drum drive control >>>

  Subsequently, the process of the above-described rotation drive control will be described. In the process of rotational drum drive control, it is determined whether or not the rotational drum is in a stop state, and if it is not in a stop state, it is determined whether or not it is a state of preparation for starting rotation. Furthermore, if it is in the state of preparation for the start of rotation, correction is made to the counter for search for spinning drum drive pulse data, setting data for acceleration state, and data for spinning drum drive state is set in the update address.

  Here, in the determination processing of whether or not the above-described turning drum is stopped, the processing is ended if it is not the situation that the turning drum is stopped. Further, in the process of determining whether or not it is in the state of preparation for the start of rotation, if it is not in the state of preparation for the start of rotation, data of the rotary drive state is set to the address for update described above Do the processing.

  After the process of setting the data of the rotating drum driving state to the update address, the rotating drum drive pulse output counter is decremented by one, and it is determined whether the output counter is 0 or not. Furthermore, when the output counter is 0, the drive pulse clear data and the stop state data are set, and the four phases of the motor (turning drum stepping motor) are turned off. Here, in the process of determining whether or not the output counter is 0, if the output counter is not 0, the process ends.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not deceleration is in progress, and if it is not in deceleration, the rotation drive pulse output counter is incremented by +1. Further, it is determined whether or not the rotating drum is in a state of constant speed, and if in constant speed, it is determined whether the counter for searching the driving pulse data is even.

  Then, if it is determined whether or not the above-described counter for driving the drum drive pulse data is even, if the counter for searching the driving pulse data is even, the rotational drum rotation defect detection counter is incremented by 1 and the rotational drum drive Perform pulse update processing. Further, in the process of determining whether or not the rotating cylinder is in a constant speed condition, it is determined whether the constant speed is not in progress or in the process of determining whether the rotating drum drive pulse data search counter is an even number. If the cylinder drive pulse data search counter is not an even number, processing in between is not performed, and the process of updating the rotating cylinder drive pulse is performed.

  Subsequently, processing for constant speed state setting is performed to determine whether or not acceleration is in progress. Furthermore, if acceleration is in progress, the number of pulse switching is decremented by one, and it is determined whether the number of switching is zero or not. Then, if the switching count is not 0, the data of the spinning drum drive pulse output counter is set to the update address.

  Further, data on the number of times of pulse switching is acquired, and a rotation rising pattern table is set. Then, processing of the designated address data set is carried out, the rotation control data set of the update address is updated, and the processing is ended. In the process of determining whether the number of switching times is 0, when the number of switching times is 0, the process is not performed and the process is ended.

  In the above-mentioned determination processing of whether or not acceleration is in progress, if it is not a situation where the turning drum is in acceleration, the step number RWM address of one symbol is set and it is determined whether or not constant speed is in progress. Furthermore, when the speed is low, the torso sensor signal is acquired, and it is determined whether or not the acquired toroidal sensor signal is that of the toroidal sensor of the toroid to be controlled.

  When it is determined in the determination process whether or not the acquired rotating body sensor signal is that of the rotating body sensor of the rotating body to be controlled, it is determined that it is that of the rotating body sensor of the control rotating body: It is determined whether the rising of the torso sensor signal has been detected. Furthermore, in the case where the rotation sensor is rising, the reference symbol number at the time of passing the rotation sensor is stored, and the rotation defect detection counter is initialized.

  Subsequently, a reference step number correction value is set to generate a reference step number at the time of passing through the rotation sensor, save the reference step number at the time of passing the rotation sensor, and the process is ended. In the determination processing as to whether or not the acquired torso sensor signal is that of the toroid sensor of the toroid to be controlled, the acquired toroid sensor signal is not that of the toroid to be controlled. Then, the process proceeds to the above-described process of acquiring the torso sensor signal. Further, in the process of determining whether or not the rising of the rotating body sensor signal is detected, if it is the rising of the rotating body sensor signal, it is determined whether or not the rotating body sensor has passed. Further, in the process of determining whether or not the vehicle is in the constant speed, it is determined whether or not the rotation sensor has been passed even when the vehicle is not in the low speed.

  In the process of determining whether or not the above-described turning-body sensor has passed, if the turning-body sensor has passed, the number of steps of one symbol is decremented by one and it is determined whether or not one symbol has moved. In the process of determining whether or not the rotation sensor has been passed, if the rotation sensor has not passed, the process is ended. Further, when one symbol has been moved, 16 which is the number of steps of one symbol is stored, and the symbol number is updated.

  Further, the step number RWM address of one symbol is set, the symbol number is increased by +3, and predetermined division ((symbol number + 3) ÷ 5) is performed. In addition, it is determined whether the value of symbol number +3 is a multiple of 5, and if the determination result is not a multiple of 5, the symbol step number is corrected and whether or not the deceleration start symbol position is reached Make a decision on

  In the process of determining whether the value of the symbol number +3 is a multiple of 5, when the determination result is a multiple of 5, the above-described deceleration start symbol without performing the correction of the number of symbol steps. A process of determining whether the position has been reached is performed. In the determination processing whether or not one symbol has moved, if the rotating drum has not moved one symbol, it is determined whether or not the deceleration start symbol position described above is reached without performing the processing in between. Perform the processing of

  In the process of determining whether or not the deceleration start symbol position is reached, when the deceleration start symbol position is reached, the deceleration pulse counter is set, and when the deceleration start symbol position is not reached, the process is ended. . Further, after setting the deceleration pulse counter, the deceleration state is set, deceleration pulse data is set, the four phases of the motor are turned ON, and the rotation state is set. Here, in the process of determining whether or not the vehicle is decelerating as described above, when the vehicle is not decelerating, the process of setting the above-described turning state is performed without performing the process in between.

After the processing of the setting of the turning drum state, it is determined whether or not the turning drum state has changed during deceleration from the start of deceleration, and when the turning drum state changes during deceleration, the rotation of the turning drum is stopped. Make a set of output requests. Then, the process (reference) of the control command set 2 described above is performed (S649), and the process is finished. In the process of determining whether or not the turning state has changed during deceleration from the start of deceleration, if there is no change in the turning state, processing in between is not performed, and the process is ended.
<< Port output >>

In the above-described port output processing (S547 in FIG. 18), output of output ports 0 and 1 is performed. More specifically, data of output port 0 is generated, and data of output port 0 is output. Furthermore, the data of the output port 1 is generated (S663), the data of the output port 1 is output, and the process shifts to processing of control command transmission (S548 in FIG. 18).
<< Send Control Command >>

  In the process of control command transmission described above (S548 in FIG. 18), the control command to be transmitted to the peripheral substrate is output. More specifically, the control command buffer address is set, and the data of the control command read pointer is acquired. Further, the designated address is set, and the transmission target control command address is set. Then, the presence or absence of a control command is determined, and when there is an unsent control command, processing of control command output is performed, and the control command is output to the output ports 7 and 8.

Subsequently, in a state where the sub control data strobe signal is turned on, the output data is output to the output port 2, the transmitted control command storage buffer is cleared, and the control command read pointer is updated. Furthermore, output data is output to the output port 2 in a state where the sub control data strobe signal is turned off. Then, clear data (control command clear data) is output to the output ports 7 and 8 to shift to the processing of LED display (S549 in FIG. 18). In the above, when there is no unsent control command (S 675: NO), the processing between is not performed, and the output data is output to the output port 2 in the state where the sub control data strobe signal is turned off. Do the process.
<< LED display >>

  In the above-mentioned LED display process (S549 in FIG. 18), the LED display counter is updated, and the LED digit 1 to 5 signals to be output are determined based on the counter value, and the LED digit 1 to 5 signals to be output are output. When the corresponding LED display request is made, LED segment signals A to G corresponding to the data to be output are set. When there is no display request, all the LED segments A to G are turned off. Then, when there is a display requirement of the LED displayed by the LED digit 1 to 5 signals and LED segment P signal to be output, the LED segment P signal is turned ON, the LED digit and the LED segment are output, and the LED digit and Update the LED segment output.

  More specifically, the output ports 3 and 4 corresponding to the LED digit segment are turned off, and the LED display counter is updated. Further, it is determined whether the LED display counter is 0. If the LED display counter is 0, the LED display counter is initialized to acquire data of the LED display counter and an LED display request flag.

  In the process of determining whether the LED display counter is 0, if the LED display counter is not 0, data of the LED display counter and an LED display request flag are acquired without initializing the LED display counter. Further, data relating to the confirmation of the segment display request of the digit to be displayed this time is set, and it is judged whether or not there is the display request. Then, when there is a display request, error display data is acquired and error display data is set.

  Subsequently, the 7-segment LED segment table 2 is set, and setting data is acquired. Furthermore, setting value display data is generated, and it is determined whether there is a setting value display request. Then, when there is no setting value display request, the stored sheet number data is acquired, and the data of the upper digit offset is acquired.

  Furthermore, it is determined whether there is a storage number (upper digit) display request, and if there is no storage number (upper digit) display request, it is determined whether there is a storage number (lower digit) display request. Do. If there is no request for displaying the number of stored sheets (lower digit) in S707, the display data during operation of the setting change device, the obtained number data, and the display data are acquired, and it is determined whether an error is displayed. Do.

  Subsequently, when it is determined that the error is displayed in the process of determining whether the error is displayed or not, the 7-segment LED segment table 1 is set, and data of the upper digit offset is acquired. Further, it is judged whether or not there is a display request for the acquired number (upper digit), and if there is not, the data of the lower digit offset is acquired. Also, segment output data is acquired, and it is determined whether there is a display request related to a predetermined segment P or not.

  Then, if there is a segment P display request (S 715: YES), segment P output data is set (S 716), and output to output ports 3 and 4 corresponding to the LED digit segment is performed.

  If there is no display request in the above-described processing for determining whether there is a display request or not, processing proceeds to the processing for confirming the display request relating to the segment P described above without performing the processing in between. In addition, when there is a setting value display request in the above-described determination processing of whether or not there is a setting value display request, the processing shifts to processing of segment output data acquisition.

  Furthermore, in the process of determining whether or not there is a request for displaying the stored number (upper digit) described above, when there is a request for displaying the stored number (upper digit), the process of acquiring the data of the offset for lower digits described above In the process of determining whether or not there is a request for displaying the number of stored sheets (lower digit) described above, if there is a request for displaying the number of stored sheets (lower digit), the process of acquiring segment output data described above Transition to Further, in the process of determining whether an error is displayed or not, if it is not an error display, data of the upper digit offset is acquired without setting the 7-segment LED segment table 1.

Furthermore, in the process of determining whether or not there is a request for displaying the number of acquired sheets (upper digit) described above, when there is a request for displaying the number of acquired sheets (upper digit), the process proceeds to the process of acquiring segment output data described above. . In addition, when there is no segment P display request described above, the processing shifts to the processing of the output to the output ports 3 and 4 corresponding to the LED digit segment described above.
<< sub notification data output >>

  In the process of the above-described sub notification data output (S550 in FIG. 18), in order to output notification data to be transmitted to the peripheral substrate, stop buttons 1 to 3 notification data are set by the stop acceptance information data. Furthermore, when all the predetermined conditions relating to whether or not the game medal limit (also referred to as the storage limit number, 50 here) is reached, the three-sheet input button notification data is set. Then, the setting / reset button notification data, the setting key switch notification data, the door switch notification data, and the setting door switch notification data are set according to the input port 0 level data. Also, the notification data set in the output port 6 is output.

  More specifically, stop acceptance information data is set, and game medal limit check processing is performed. Furthermore, it is determined whether or not the game medal limit has been reached, and if it has not, it is determined whether or not the blocker signal is OFF.

  If the blocker is not OFF, the determination for confirming the number of stored sheets is performed, and if there is the stored number, it is determined whether or not the game medal has passed. Then, in the process of determining whether or not the game medal has passed, if the game medal has not passed, the three-sheet insertion button notification data is set. Then, setting / reset button notification data, setting key switch notification data, door switch notification data, and setting door switch notification data are set. Subsequently, the notification data set in the output port 6 is output.

When the game medal limit has been reached in the determination processing of whether or not the game medal limit is reached, and if the blocker signal is OFF in the decision processing of whether or not the blocker signal is OFF, for confirmation of the stored number If there is no stored number in the determination process of, or if the game medal passage is detected in the determination process of whether or not the game medal has passed, a process of setting the three-sheet insertion button notification data is performed. Then, the setting / reset button notification data etc. is set.
<< Timer measurement >>

  In the above-described timer measurement process (S551 in FIG. 18), the timer update process is performed, and 1 is subtracted for all the timer RWMs (if it is less than 0, 0 is set). More specifically, the measurement start timer address is set, and the number of one-byte timers is set. Further, countdown processing is performed, and the next timer address is set. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not one-byte timer measurement has ended, and if it has ended, the number of two-byte timers is set. In the process of determining whether or not the one-byte timer measurement is completed, if the one-byte timer measurement is not completed, the process returns to the countdown process.

After the 2-byte timer number is set in the process of setting the 2-byte timer number, the 2-byte timer value is updated and the next timer address is set. Then, it is determined whether or not the 2-byte timer measurement has ended, and if the 2-byte timer measurement has not ended, the process returns to the process of updating the 2-byte timer value described above.
<< Error Management >>

  In the above-described error management (see FIGS. 18 and 20), as shown in FIG. 20, it is determined whether or not the rising of the output signal of the selector passage sensor (selector passage sensor signal) is detected (S751) . If the rise of the selector passage sensor signal is detected (S751: YES), the blocker OFF monitoring time (about 100.57 ms in this embodiment) and the blocker ON monitoring time are set (S752). Further, the AF register is saved (S753), and the process shifts to the second control to perform an error check process (S754). This error check process (S754) will be described later (see FIG. 38).

  When the error check process (S754) is completed, the process returns to the first control, and the AF register is restored (S755). Furthermore, it is judged whether or not an error is detected (S756), and if an error is detected (S756: YES), an output request at the time of error detection is set (S757). When the rising edge of the selector passage sensor signal is not detected in S751 (S751: NO), the processing in S753 is not performed, and the AF register saving processing of S753 is performed.

After the output request at the time of error detection is set in S757, the process of the control command set 2 described above is performed (S758), and the process is ended.
<< External signal output data management >>

  In the external signal output data management process (S759) described above, in order to perform output data generation process of external signals 1 to 5, external signals 1 to 3 are processed according to the values of the external signal flag and external signal 1 management time. Set output data. Furthermore, when the door switch signal or the setting door switch signal is ON, the output data of the external signal 5 is set. Further, when the setting key switch signal is ON and the power-off recovery time of the external signal 4 output time has elapsed or the error detection flag is output, the output data of the external signal 4 is set.

  More specifically, the external signal flag is acquired, and it is determined whether the external signal 1 management time has elapsed. If the external signal 1 management time has not elapsed, the external signal 1 output data is set, and it is determined whether the door switch signal or the setting door switch signal has become ON. Then, if it is ON, the output data of the external signal 5 is set, and it is judged whether or not the setting key switch signal is ON.

  If the setting key switch signal is not ON, the data detection of the error detection flag and the external signal 4 output time upon power failure recovery is performed, and it is determined whether all the data is lost. Then, if all the data are not lost, the external signal 4 output data is set, and the process shifts to the processing of the external signal output (S760 in FIG. 18).

  In the process of determining whether the external signal 1 management time described above has elapsed, if the external signal 1 management time has elapsed, the door switch signal or the setting door switch signal does not perform the external signal 1 output data setting. It is judged whether or not it has become ON. If the door switch signal or the setting door switch signal is not ON, it is determined whether the setting key switch signal is ON without setting the output data of the external signal 5.

Furthermore, if the setting key switch signal is ON, the external signal 4 output data set is performed without performing processing in between. If all the data are lost at S778, the process proceeds to the external signal output processing (S760 in FIG. 18) without performing the above-described external signal 4 output data setting.
<< External signal output >>

In the above-described processing of external signal output (S760 in FIG. 18), output data of external signals 1 to 5, a medal insertion signal, and a medal payout signal are output.
<< Soft random number management >>

In the process of soft random number management described above (see S764 in FIG. 18), the process of soft random number update 2 is performed.
<Power recovery process>

  Subsequently, the power recovery processing described in the above-described power-on processing (see FIG. 12) will be described based on FIG. The power recovery process is a process of shifting to the case where the power failure recovery data is determined to be normal (S12: YES) in the above-described process (see FIG. 12) at the time of power on in the main control board 61.

  In the power recovery process shown in FIG. 21, the value in the stack pointer is restored to the state at the time of power shutdown (S311), and the data of initialization start address at initialization and the number of initialization bytes are set (S312). Further, the range defined as the target of RWM initialization is initialized (RWM initialization 1 (S313)), and the AF register is saved (S314). Then, after shifting to the second control and performing RWM initialization 2 (see FIG. 30) described later, the process returns to the first control to restore the AF register (S316).

  Further, in a subsequent input port reading process (S317), the predetermined input port (0 to 2) is read, and the input data is updated from the one before power-off to the latest. Further, the timer interrupt is activated (S318), and the data indicating the power-off process completion flag (power-off execution process flag) is cleared from the RWM (S319). In the above-described interrupt activation setting process (S318), the type of interrupt and the timer interrupt cycle are set. After this processing, timer interrupt processing can be executed. In the present embodiment, the period of the timer interrupt is 2.235 ms.

Here, the timer interrupt is activated after the input port is read in the input port reading process (S317) (S318), and the input data is rewritten to the latest data in the input port reading process (S317) as described above. It is considered. For example, if the setting key switch 68 is ON when the power is turned off and the setting key switch 68 is turned off before the power is restored, and if there is no processing for input port reading processing (S317), timer interrupt processing Falling data of the setting key switch 68 is generated by the input port data generation process (see S545 in FIG. 18). Specifically, at the time of the above-mentioned "display while waiting for game medal insertion" (see S55 in FIG. 14), if the power is turned off and the setting key switch 68 is changed as described above, the power is turned off. At the time of recovery, an unintended process of shifting from the set value confirmation state to the normal state based on the falling data is executed. Therefore, as described above, after the reading of the input port (S317), activation of the timer interrupt (S318) is performed.
<Type of error>

  Next, among various errors in the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment, errors relating to the handling of game medals will be described. The errors relating to the handling of the game medal include an error that can be recovered after the error is canceled and an error that can not be recovered. Among these, errors that can be returned include errors relating to payout of gaming medals, HE errors, HP errors, HQ errors, and FE errors, and errors relating to the insertion of gaming medals, CP errors, There are C0 error, C1 error, CH error and CE error.

  Among the above-mentioned various errors, the HE error is an error when it is determined that the game medal in the game medal payout device 63 is empty, and the HP error is that the game medal is at the game medal exit in the game medal payout device 63. It is an error when it is judged that the printer is clogged. Furthermore, the HQ error is an error when it is determined that there is an abnormality input in the payout sensor (not shown), and the FE error is an error when it is determined that the gaming medal auxiliary storage 71 is full as described above. .

  The CP error is an error when it is determined that the inserted gaming medal has passed illegally, and the C0 error is when it is determined that the insertion sensor (here, the insertion sensor 2) has an abnormal input as described above. It is an error of Furthermore, the C1 error is an error when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the portion where the insertion sensor 45 and the selector passage sensor 46 are provided in the medal passage 105, and the CH error is played on the selector passage sensor 46 as described above. It is an error when it is determined that the medal has stagnated. The CE error is an error in the case where it is determined that the game medal has stagnated at the portion where the insertion sensor 1 (115) or the insertion sensor 2 (116) is provided.

  The error cancellation condition relating to these errors is that a cancellation operation for changing the signal of the setting / reset button 69 (setting / reset button signal) from OFF to ON is performed in the state where the factor is removed. Furthermore, when the door switch signal relating to the door switch 60 and the setting door switch signal relating to the setting door switch 67 are ON, the above-described release operation becomes effective.

On the other hand, errors that can not be returned include E1 error, E5 error, E6 error, and E7 error. Among these, the E1 error is an error when the power failure recovery can not be normally performed, and the E5 error is an error when the combination display of the symbols at the time of full stop is abnormal. Furthermore, the E6 error is an error when the set value is out of range, and the E7 error is an abnormal frequency of the clock input to the RCK terminal (not shown) for updating the random number in the main CPU 81, or an internal random number (16 bits) This is an error when an update status abnormality of a random number is detected.
<< CP error (gaming medal illegal passage) >>

  Subsequently, detection modes of a CP error, a C0 error, a C1 error, a CH error, and a CE error, which are errors relating to the insertion of game medals, will be described. First, for the CP error, the ON / OFF order of the insertion sensor as shown in FIG. 8A is normal in the above-mentioned processing at the time of game medal insertion (more specifically, the processing of game medal insertion check described later). It is determined that the game has passed, and one game medal is accepted. That is, in FIG. 8A, the insertion sensor ON / OFF order is shown in five stages at the left end. Furthermore, on the right side, the ON / OFF states of the input sensor 1 signal and the input sensor 2 signal at the stage of each sequence 1 to 5 are shown. The insertion sensor 1 signal and the insertion sensor 2 signal are normally in the OFF state, and turned ON when the game medal is detected.

  When the game medal is not detected, as shown in order 1, both the insertion sensor 1 signal and the insertion sensor 2 signal are OFF. Then, when a regular game medal enters the game medal inlet 106 of the game medal selector 44 and flows down the medal passage 105, as shown in order 2, the insertion sensor 1 signal located upstream of the medal passage 105 is first As shown in sequence 3, while the input sensor 1 signal is in the ON state, the input sensor 2 signal is also turned ON. Furthermore, with the flow of the game medal, as shown in order 4, the insertion sensor 1 signal is turned off first, and then, as shown in order 5, both the insertion sensor 1 signal and the insertion sensor 2 signal are turned off. Become. Then, when ON / OFF of the insertion sensor 1 signal and the insertion sensor 2 signal is detected in this order, the main CPU 81 (see FIG. 5) determines that one game medal has passed normally. . More specifically, with reference to the determination result of the error (CH error) of retention of selector passage sensor arrangement portion retention, which will be described later, and when both errors are not detected, the main CPU 81 is one game Judging that the medal has passed normally.

In other cases, it is determined that game medals have not passed, and an error occurs. However, as shown in the order 1 to 3 in FIG. 8B, when only the insertion sensor 1 signal is turned ON and the insertion sensor 2 signal is not detected, the gaming medal has returned to the upstream side. It is handled as a thing, does not become an error, and makes the input of the input sensor 1 signal invalid. As described above, the reason why no error occurs in the case shown in FIG. 8B is that only the insertion sensor 1 may detect the game medal even when the blocker is OFF. And even in such a case, when the notification of the error or the stop processing of the game is performed, the rhythm of the game of the player is broken, and therefore, the control is performed so as not to be determined as an error.
<< C0 error (input sensor error input) >>

  Next, in the C0 error, as shown in FIG. 8C, the blocker signal which is data for controlling the blocker (47) is switched from ON (passing state of game medals) to OFF (returning state of game medals) After the predetermined time (about 500.60 ms in this case) elapses after changing to (1), it is determined whether or not the input sensor 2 signal is input while the blocker is OFF (return state). The predetermined time is an input sensor abnormality input detection start time to be described later, and is a time until the detection of an abnormality input related to the input sensor is started.

  Then, after the predetermined time (input sensor abnormality input detection start time) elapses, there is an input in the input sensor 2 signal despite the blocker signal being OFF (the game medal return state) (the switch is ON) In the case (1), it is determined that the input sensor (45) receives an abnormal input, and as shown in the middle part of the figure, error monitoring is enabled (ON). Then, when an error is detected in this way, the input sensor 2 signal is turned on until the error cause is removed, an error display output request corresponding to the C0 error is made, and the C0 error is displayed at a predetermined timing thereafter. To be executed. The error display is performed during waiting for game medal insertion, during waiting for star lever reception, or after all rotations have been stopped.

However, in this embodiment, while the CE error, the CP error, the CH error, the C0 error, or the C1 error has already occurred, the C0 error detection factor as shown in FIG. 8C is satisfied again. Also, it is not judged as an abnormal input.
<< C1 error (Medal passage abnormality) >>

  Next, in the C1 error, as shown in the middle part of FIG. 9A, when the selector passage sensor 46 is switched from OFF to ON, as shown in the upper part of the figure, the insertion monitoring counter is incremented by one. Furthermore, as shown in the lower part of the figure, the insertion monitoring counter is decremented by one when the insertion sensor 2 signal is changed from ON to OFF when the game medal passes the insertion sensor 45 normally. Then, every time the closing sensor 2 signal switches from ON to OFF when there is a normal closing, the closing monitoring counter is decremented by 1, and the closing monitoring counter goes out of a predetermined range (for example, a range of 0 to 3). Is an error.

  That is, when the input monitoring counter is a value within a predetermined range, it is determined to be normal, and when it is out of the predetermined range, it is determined to be abnormal. The maximum value (3 in this case) of the predetermined range related to the insertion monitoring counter can be determined by the relationship between the distance from the selector passage sensor 46 to the insertion sensor 2 (105) and the size of the game medal. For example, when the distance from the selector passage sensor 46 to the insertion sensor 2 (116) exceeds the diameter of the game medal and is equal to or less than the dimension (here, 50 (= 25 × 2) mm) where two game medals are arranged. In the case where up to three game medals are arranged in the whole of one game medal and one copy of two game medals from the selector passage sensor 46 to the insertion sensor 2 (116). Be done. Therefore, the maximum value of the predetermined range related to the input monitoring counter can be set to 3.

Further, the present invention is not limited to such a concept. For example, in order to give more certainty in error detection, the maximum value of the predetermined range related to the input monitoring counter is set to “2” or the error detection accuracy is mitigated intentionally. It is also possible to set the maximum value to "4". Further, the maximum value may be set to a value other than “3” or “4” according to the distance from the selector passage sensor 46 to the closing sensor 2 (116). Furthermore, as the distance from the selector passage sensor 46 to the insertion sensor 2 (116), the most upstream portion of the selector passage sensor 46 to the central portion (optical axis portion) of the micro sensor of the insertion sensor 2 (116) The center position of the sensor 46 may be set as the most upstream portion of the input sensor 2 (116), or the like. The entry monitoring counter is cleared to 0 when the blocker signal is switched from OFF to ON, as described later.
<< CH error (Selector passage sensor placement site retention) >>

Next, in a CH error, as shown in FIG. 9B, when a predetermined time (here, the selector passage sensor residence time has elapsed 446.97 ms) has elapsed while the selector passage sensor 46 is ON, the game medal is displayed It is judged that it has stayed and an error occurs. The predetermined time is a staying determination passing time according to the selector passage sensor. When an error is detected, an output request for an error display corresponding to the CH error is made, and the display of the CH error is executed at a predetermined timing thereafter. The error display is performed during waiting for game medal insertion, during waiting for star lever reception, or after all rotations have been stopped. However, in this embodiment, when a CE error, a CP error, a CH error, a C0 error, or a C1 error has already occurred, the CH error detection factor as shown in FIG. 9B is satisfied again. Also, it is not judged as an abnormal input.
<< CE error (input sensor placement site retention) >>

  Next, in the CE error, as shown in FIG. 10, when the retention determination passing time according to the insertion sensor is out of the range of A to C in FIG. I get an error. Here, time A in the figure is the staying determination passing time from ON to OFF of the input sensor 1, and time B is the staying determination passing time from ON of the input sensor 2 to OFF of the loading sensor 1. Furthermore, time C is a staying determination passing time from ON to OFF of the input sensor 2. And in this example, each retention judgment passing time A to C is 4.47 ms ≦ A <143.03 ms, 2.23 ms ≦ B <98.33 ms, 4.47 ms ≦ C <143.03 ms. .

In addition, as a process at the time of an error display, at the time of the display start of an error, or an error detection, the detected error display output request | requirement is performed. Further, an error code corresponding to each error is displayed on the above-mentioned acquired number display LED, and the game is stopped. Here, the stop of the game will be described later. Furthermore, as processing at the time of error cancellation, the number-of-acquisitions display LED is restored to the state before the error, an output request at the end of the error display is made, and then the game is resumed.
<Control processing related to the insertion of game medals>

  Next, control processing relating to the insertion of the aforementioned game medals will be described more specifically based on FIGS. 22 to 29 and the like. The processing described here is a part of a control module (program module) that is executed according to the situation in each processing in the above-mentioned gaming progress main processing (see FIG. 14) and timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 18). . That is, what is described here relates to the first control in the control processing related to the insertion of the game medal, and the one related to the second control will be described later.

  Among the control processes related to the insertion of game medals, the processes related to the first control, including the process of starting to receive game medals (see FIG. 22), the process of blocker ON (see FIG. 23A), and the process of blocker OFF There are processing of error indication (refer to FIG. 24) and processing of input error set (refer to FIG. 25).

  Among these control modules, the processing of game medal acceptance start, the processing of blocker ON, the processing of blocker OFF, and the processing of error display shown in FIG. 22 to FIG. 24 are in the game progression main processing (see FIG. 14). It is executed as needed in various processes. More specifically, the process of starting game medal acceptance is executed in the process (S52) of the game start set in FIG. 14, and the process of displaying when waiting for game medal insertion is the same as the game in FIG. This process is executed in the display process (S55) when waiting for medal insertion. Then, after the game medal acceptance start process, the blocker ON process (described later) is performed, the above-mentioned blocker 47 is turned ON (passable state), and the game medal can be inserted.

  Furthermore, the blocker ON process, the blocker OFF process, and the error display process are versatile processes, and among these, the blocker ON process is, for example, the above-mentioned game medal acceptance start process (FIG. 22). Reference), processing of display when waiting for game medal insertion (refer to S55 in FIG. 14), processing of game medal settlement (refer to FIG. 28), etc. may be executed depending on the situation.

  In addition, processing of blocker OFF, processing of display when waiting for game medal insertion (see S55 in Figure 14), processing of the above-mentioned game medal liquidation (specifically, processing of blocker OFF before game medals are liquidated In the process of start lever check (S58 in FIG. 14), the process of start lever acceptance (S59 in FIG. 14), etc., the process may be executed according to the situation.

  Furthermore, the error display process is executed according to the situation, such as the game medal settlement process, the start lever check process (S58 in FIG. 14), and the game medal payout process by winning (S67 in FIG. 14). There is a case.

As for the control module executed in the timer interrupt process, there is data (for example, a flag indicating abnormality detection) set in the game progress main process (see FIG. 14) before the occurrence of the timer interrupt process of the cycle at that time. It will be handled. Below, each process mentioned as control processing which concerns on injection | throwing-in of a game medal is demonstrated, and the interrelationship of these processes is demonstrated after that.
<Start receiving game medals>

  The above-mentioned game medal acceptance start process (see FIG. 22) is to perform the process at the time of game medal acceptance start, and the game medal selector 44 (see FIG. 2, FIG. 6, FIG. 7) The game medal can be inserted from the game medal insertion slot 21 (see FIG. 1) by controlling to the game medal acceptance state (passable state) when the predetermined condition is satisfied from the state where it is not passable). We are doing the process to In the game medal acceptance start processing, as shown in FIG. 22, the game medal number data is first cleared (S101), and then the insertion number display LED is turned off (S102). Further, the game medal management flag is initialized (S103), and a process of operation flag check (S104) is executed. The process of checking the operation flag (S104) is a process for confirming whether or not the product, the product continuous operating device, and the re-play or the like are operated.

  Then, a determination is made as to whether or not replaying is in progress (S105), and if it is not in replaying (S105: NO), the above-mentioned blocker 47 (see FIG. 7) is in a state where gaming medals can pass. The process proceeds to blocker ON processing (see FIG. 23A) to be described later, and if it is at the time of replay operation (S105: YES), the automatic insertion standby time 1 (237 interruption: about 529.65 ms) is set ( S106). Further, it is determined whether the display type data is 0 (S107), and if the display type data is 0 (S107: YES), the process proceeds to processing for waiting for 2 bytes (S111). The processing for waiting for two bytes (S111) is processing for waiting until the designated waiting time (automatic insertion waiting time 1) becomes zero. Here, the display type data is data indicating the type of the re-play combination that has been stopped and displayed. Specifically, display type data 0 is obtained when a predetermined replay role is displayed on the active line or the inactive line. On the other hand, a specific replay player (eg, "bell-bell-bell", "red 7-red 7-red 7") in which "replay-replay-replay" is not displayed stopped on the activated line or the invalid line When it is stopped and displayed, it becomes display type data 1. This display type data is stored in the RWM 83 at the time of winning determination, and the purpose is to change the time until the automatic insertion processing is started based on the symbol combination stopped and displayed. For example, when symbol combination corresponding to display type data 1 is taken as an example, an automatic insertion standby time 2 (described later) is set, and an effect corresponding to a small combination or bonus combination is set when waiting for the set 2 byte time. By outputting a sound or the like, the player can be made to recognize the established combination as a small combination or a bonus combination.

  If the display type data is not 0 in the determination of the display type data (S107) (S107: NO), the automatic insertion standby time 2 (500 interrupts: approximately 1119.50 ms) is set (S108), The process proceeds to the above-mentioned processing for waiting for 2 bytes (S111).

  After the processing for waiting for 2 bytes (S111), processing for reading the stored number is executed (S112). In the stored sheet number reading process (S112), stored sheet number data is read, and the presence / absence of the stored sheet and the number of stored sheets are checked. After this, it is determined whether the number of stored sheets has reached the storage limit (in this case, 50) (S113), and if the number of stored sheets has not reached the storage limit (S113: NO), blocker ON The process (S114) is performed. The process (S114) of this blocker ON will be described later. On the other hand, if the number of stored sheets has reached the storage limit number (S113: YES), processing proceeds to processing of acquiring display type data (S116) without performing blocker ON processing (S114).

  With such a configuration, when replay is not in operation (S105: NO), blocker ON processing can be executed regardless of the number of stored sheets, and replay is in operation (S105: YES) In accordance with the number of stored sheets, blocker ON processing can be performed. Therefore, (1) uniform medals can be inserted even if the symbol combination stopped and displayed is a symbol combination which is not apparent at first glance to be replayed, (2) blocker ON processing can be realized with a small program processing, (3) medals It is possible to reduce the medal's swallowing (take-in) compared to the case where blocker ON processing is performed after detecting a (4) player has a medal insertion with a certain rhythm even if it is a game with a high probability of replay There are effects such as what can be done.

  After the determination process (S113) or the blocker ON process (S114) according to the above-mentioned number of stored sheets, display type data is acquired (S116), and it is determined whether display type data is 1 (S117) . If the display type data is 1 (S117: YES), the three-sheet insertion display LED-R (red) is turned on (S118), and the automatic insertion standby time 3 (8949 interruption: about 1999.49 ms) is set The input detection waiting time is stored (S120). Further, the inputs of the selector passage sensor signal, the one-sheet switch signal, the three-sheet sensor signal, and the clearing switch signal are checked (S121), and it is determined whether or not these inputs are received (S122). Here, lighting (S118) of the three-sheet insertion display LED-R (red) functions as a notification prompting the player to operate the BET (bet) button. Then, if any one is input (S122: YES), the input detection waiting time is cleared (S123), and the input information command is set (S124). Here, the input information command indicates a command indicating the state of “selector passage sensor signal, one-sheet switch signal, three-sheet sensor signal, three-sheet switch signal”. In S122 described above, if there is no input (S122: NO), the input information command is set without clearing the input detection waiting time (S123) (S124). In other words, the automatic insertion standby time 3 is canceled based on the passage of time or the above-mentioned input information (selector passage sensor signal, one-sheet switch signal, three-sheet sensor signal, or three-sheet switch signal). By adopting such a control mode, there is an effect that when a replay player combination belonging to the display type data 1 is displayed, it can be seen as a small combination or a bonus combination.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the input detection standby time has elapsed (S125). If the input detection standby time has not elapsed (S125: NO), the process returns to S121 to check input of various signals. If the input detection standby time has elapsed in S125 (S125: YES), the three-sheet insertion display LED is turned off (S126), and an output information output request is set (S127). If the display type data is not 1 in S117 described above (S117: NO), the process of S118 to S126 is not performed, and an output request for input information is set (S127). Then, although the process of control command set 1 is executed (S128), in the process of control command set 1 (S128) in the present embodiment, the process of control command set 2 is performed. The processing of the control command set 2 is to carry out processing for storing the sub control command described above in a ring buffer (transmission buffer) temporarily stored before transmission. In the following steps, there is also a processing step of “setting an output request”, which is processing of storing information (command) to be sent to the sub control means (here, the sub control board 31) in a register Point to

  After that, the replay indicator LED is turned on (S129), an output request at the time of automatic insertion is set (S130), and the process of control command set 1 (S131) which is the same as S128 described above is executed. Then, the processing of one game medal addition (S132) is executed, and in the processing of one game medal addition (S132), one game addition of the number of game medals is performed, and a display processing of the inserted number display LED is performed. More specifically, although the process of adding one game medal (S132) is not shown, one is added to the game medal number data to clear the acquired number display data. Further, the inserted number display LED signal data corresponding to the game medal number data is stored, the game medal limit set is processed, and the game medal read processing is performed. Then, when the game medal number data coincides with the game medal limit number (the above-mentioned prescribed number), the game medal limit flag is set.

After the process of one game medal addition (S132), the above-mentioned game medal limit flag is confirmed (S133), and if the number of game medals has not reached the game medal limit (S133: NO), one game medal is added The process returns to step S132. Then, in S133, if the number of game medals reaches the game medal limit (S133: YES), the process returns and returns to the process which was executed before the process of the game medal acceptance start which is a subroutine.
<Blocker ON>

  Next, the blocker ON process will be described based on FIG. As shown in FIG. 23 (a), this blocker ON process determines whether the blocker OFF time monitoring time (about 100.57 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed (S211), and if it has not elapsed (S211: NO), S211 is repeated until it passes. If the blocker OFF time monitoring time has elapsed (S211: YES), the interrupt is inhibited (S212), the blocker signal is turned ON (S213), and the closing monitoring counter is cleared (S214). Further, the blocker signal state is turned on (S215), the interrupt is permitted (S216), and the process returns to the process before the start of the blocker ON process. Here, “blocker signal_ON” in S213 refers to processing of storing “1” in the RWM area for turning on the blocker 47 in the present embodiment. In addition, the description of "_" is abbreviate | omitted in the figure (same below). By the process of S213, the blocker 47 is turned ON by the port output process (S547) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18) executed after the process. The process of S213 can be a process of storing "1" in the output port for outputting the blocker signal directly.

  Further, in the present embodiment, “input monitoring counter_clear” in S214 indicates processing for setting data in the RWM 83 of the input monitoring counter, which is updated when there is an input from the selector passage sensor 46, to 0. By this processing, for example, after the binary data determined to have passed through the selector passage sensor 46 is “10 B”, it is determined as an error when a game medal insertion check (see FIGS. 42 and 43) described later is executed. Can be prevented. Furthermore, "blocker signal state_ON" in S215 indicates storing information indicating that medals can be inserted in the RWM 83 in the present embodiment. By the process of S215, it is possible to light a lamp (game start display LED) indicating that the game medal can be inserted by the process (S75) of the LED display of the interrupt process executed after the process. The processing order of S213 to S215 is not limited to this.

  The above blocker signal ON processing (S213) is performed after the blocker OFF time monitoring time has elapsed (S211: YES). This is done to prevent the medals from being caught by not turning on the blocker 47 when there is a possibility that game medals are passing. That is, as in the present embodiment, it is determined whether the blocker OFF-time monitoring time has elapsed (S211) and then the blocker signal is turned ON (S213), and the ON operation of the blocker 47 is reserved for a predetermined period. Thus, it is possible to secure the time for waiting for the passage of the game medals, until the blocker 47 outputs the blocker signal from the main control board 61 and the blocker 47 performs the mechanical operation.

  Also, the above-mentioned interrupt prohibition (S212) is executed after waiting for the blocker OFF monitoring time to elapse (S211). In the present embodiment, as described above for the C1 error (see FIG. 9A) related to the closing sensor or the selector passage sensor, the value of the closing monitoring counter increases or decreases based on the detection of the selector passage sensor signal and the closing sensor 2 signal. When the value of the input monitoring counter exceeds a predetermined range (for example, a range of 0 to 3), the blocker 47 is turned off. Then, in the blocker ON process (see FIG. 23A), the process (S213, S215) related to the blocker signal and the process (S214) related to the closing monitoring counter are executed as a series of processes, and the operation of the blocker 47 And matching of the detection result of the selector passage sensor signal with the detection result of the closing sensor 2 signal.

  If a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18) occurs between the blocker signal ON process (S213) and the blocker signal state ON process (S215), the timer interrupt process at this time (the interrupt concerned) As described above, the blocker 47 can be in the ON state (passable state), as described above, through predetermined processing (here, S545 for creating input data and S547 for performing port output). However, in the game progress main process (see FIG. 14), since the blocker signal state ON process (S215) following the blocker signal ON process (S213) is not performed, the predetermined process of the interrupt (here) In S549), which is processing of LED display, it is not possible to light a lamp (game start display LED) indicating that a game medal can be inserted. That is, there may be a situation where the display of the game start display LED is not performed although the blocker 47 is turned on.

However, as in the present embodiment, interrupt prohibition (S212) is performed, and processing related to the blocker signal (S213, S215) and processing related to the closing monitoring counter (S214), timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 18) By performing the process as a series of processes that do not intervene, the operation of the blocker 47 and the LED display can be matched, and appropriate control related to the insertion of the game medal can be performed.
<< Blocker OFF >>

  Next, the blocker OFF process will be described based on FIG. As shown in FIG. 23B, the blocker OFF process determines whether the blocker signal is OFF (S221). If the blocker signal is not OFF (S221: NO), the interrupt is inhibited. (S222) The blocker signal is turned off (S223), and the blocker signal state is turned off (S224). Furthermore, the input sensor abnormality input detection start time (about 500.60 ms in this embodiment) described above for the C0 error is set (S225), the interrupt is permitted (S226), and processing before blocker OFF processing is started. Return. Here, “blocker signal _OFF” in S223 refers to processing of storing “0” in the RWM area for turning on the blocker 47 in the present embodiment. By this process, the blocker 47 is turned OFF by the port output process (S547) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18) executed after the process. The process of S223 can be a process of storing "1" in the output port for outputting the blocker signal directly.

  Furthermore, “blocker signal state _OFF” in S224 indicates that information indicating that the medal can not be inserted is stored in the RWM 83 in the present embodiment. By this processing, the extinguishing of the lamp (game start display LED) indicating that the game medal can be inserted is maintained. Further, in the input sensor abnormality input detection start time set in S225, a predetermined time (about 500.60 ms in this embodiment) related to the C0 error is set.

  Also in the blocker OFF process (see FIG. 23 (b)), the input sensor abnormality input detection start time set (S225) prohibits the interrupt (S222), blocker signal OFF (S223), blocker signal It is performed following each process of state OFF (S224). That is, in the blocker OFF process, the process related to the blocker signal (S223, S224) and the input sensor abnormality input detection start time set (S225) which is the process related to the input error check are executed as a series of processes.

  When a timer interrupt (see FIG. 18) occurs between the blocker signal OFF (S223) and the blocker signal state OFF (S224), a predetermined one of the timer interrupt processing (the interrupt) is generated. As described above, the blocker 47 may be in the OFF state (return state) through the process (here, S79 for creating input data and S82 for performing port output). However, in the game progress main process (see FIG. 14), since the blocker signal state OFF process (S224) following the blocker signal OFF process (S223) is not performed, the predetermined process of the interrupt (here, here) In S75), which is processing of LED display, it is not possible to reliably turn off the lamp (the game start display LED) indicating that the game medal can be inserted. That is, a situation may occur in which the game start display LED is on although the blocker 47 is off.

However, as in the present embodiment, interrupt prohibition (S222) is performed, and blocker signal OFF (S223) and blocker signal state OFF (S224) are a series of processes not involving timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 18). By performing this operation, the operation of the blocker 47 and the LED display can be matched, and appropriate control related to the insertion of the game medal can be performed.
<< Error display >>

  Next, processing of error display will be described based on FIG. As shown in FIG. 24, in the error display process, the error number is stored (S231), and state information related to the pre-error blocker signal and the hopper motor drive signal is saved (S232). When this state information is saved, data is saved from the state information storage area (blocker signal data storage area, hopper motor drive signal data storage area) in RWM 83 to a predetermined storage area (C register serving as the state information save area). To be executed. Further, the information of the hopper motor drive signal data storage area in the state information storage area is cleared (S233), and the blocker OFF process (S234) is executed. In the blocker OFF process (S234), the above-described blocker OFF process (see FIG. 23B) is performed. Then, the start lever acceptance permission flag is cleared (S235), the information on the acquired number display is evacuated (S236), and the error display is set (S237). At the time of saving the acquired sheet number display information, data saving from the acquired sheet number display information storage area in the RWM 83 to a predetermined storage area (B register as the acquired sheet number display information save area) is executed.

  Furthermore, the output request at the time of error display start is set (S 238), the processing of control command set 1 is executed (S 239), the rising of the setting / reset button signal (signal of setting button or signal of reset button) is detected. It is determined whether or not it is (S240). If the rising of the setting / reset button signal is not detected in S240 described above (S240: NO), S240 is repeated until it is detected, and if the rising of the setting / reset button signal is detected (S240: YES), the setting / reset button signal rising data is cleared (S241).

  Subsequently, the fullness detection signal inspection data is set (S 242), and it is determined whether it is the above-mentioned FE error related to the payout of the gaming medals (S 243). If it is determined in S243 that the FE error is not occurring (S243: NO), the payout inspection data is set (S244), and it is determined whether it is a payout related error (S245). Then, when it is determined that it is not a payout related error time (S245: NO), the inspection data of the input sensor and the selector passage sensor are set (S246), and the input state for each error based on the inspection data is checked (S247) . Specifically, it corresponds to processing of confirming the level data of the input sensor 45 (input sensors 1 and 2), the level data of the selector passage sensor 46, and the level data of the payout sensor (not shown). If it is determined that the FE error has occurred at S243 (S243: YES), and if it is determined that the payout related error has occurred at S245 (S245: YES), the above process is not performed. Move to S247.

After S247 described above, it is determined whether the error cause has been removed (S248). If the error cause has not been removed (S248: NO), the process returns to S240 described above, and the rising of the setting / reset button signal It is determined whether or not is detected. “Removal of error cause” in the present embodiment indicates that the level data of the various sensors described above is “0”. If the cause of the error has been removed (S248: YES), the error number is cleared (S249), the acquired number display is restored (S250), and an output request at the end of the error display is set (S250). Further, the processing of the control command set 1 is executed (S252), the state information of the blocker signal before the error and the hopper motor drive signal is restored (S253), and the hopper motor drive signal is restored (S254). Then, it is determined whether or not the blocker signal before the error is ON (S255). If it is ON (S255: YES), the blocker ON process (S256) is executed to start the error display process. Return to the previous process. On the other hand, if the blocker signal before the error is not ON (S255: NO), the processing returns (S256) without executing the blocker ON processing (S256).
<< Input error set >>

  Next, processing of the input error set will be described based on FIG. As shown in FIG. 25, in the process of the input error set, the abnormal input flag (also referred to as “abnormal occurrence flag”, “error flag”, etc.) is updated (S 301). In S301, although not shown, the data stored in the A register is saved in the D register. Furthermore, the logical operation (OR) of the data stored in the A register and the data stored in the E register is executed, and the operation result is stored in the A register. Then, the value of the A register is stored (updated) in the abnormal input data storage area provided at the predetermined address of the RWM 83.

  That is, S301 executes processing for storing data of the abnormality input flag stored in the abnormality input data storage area of the RWM 83 in the A register. Here, the abnormal input flag in this embodiment consists of 1 byte data, D0 to D3 bits are unused, D4 bit is selector passage sensor staying, D5 bit is input sensor 2 abnormal input, D6 bit is payout sensor abnormal input The D7 bit is unused. For example, when only the selector passage sensor stagnation is detected, the abnormality input flag is "00010000B". In addition, when an abnormality of the payout sensor is detected after detecting the stagnation of the selector passage sensor, the abnormality input flag becomes “01010000B”.

  Also, in the above-described S301, using the data of the above-mentioned abnormal input flag, creation of data as to whether or not to transmit (data for determining whether or not to make an output request), and a command for transmitting It is designed to create (control command). That is, in data creation of whether to transmit or not, the value of the D register is stored in the A register. Then, the logical operation (AND) of the A register and the E register is executed, and the operation result is stored in the A register. For example, when the value of the A register is "01000000B" and the value of the E register is "00010000B", the value of the A register after the logical operation (AND) is "00000000" (Example 1). Also, for example, when the value of the A register is "01010000B" and the value of the E register is "00010000B", the value of the A register after the logical operation (AND) is "00010000B" (Example 2) .

  On the other hand, in the creation of the command for transmission, the logical operation (XOR) of the A register and the E register is executed, and the operation result is stored in the A register. For example, if the value of the A register is "00000000B" as in the above example 1 and the value of the E register is "01000000B", the value of the A register after the logical operation (XOR) is "01000000B" . Also, for example, when the value of the A register is "00010000B" as in the above-mentioned example 2 and the value of the E register is "00010000B", the value of the A register after logical operation (XOR) is "00000000B. It becomes ".

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not an abnormal input error is detected (S302). The determination in step S302 is to check whether the abnormal input flag updated in step S301 is a new one (whether it is a duplicate or not). Such an inspection is performed by determining whether the data stored in the storage area (abnormal input flag storage area) targeted by the RWM 83 is the same before and after the update. More specifically, when the value of the A register is "0", that is, when the aforementioned Z (zero flag) is "1", it is determined as NO, and the value of the A register is other than "0", that is, the above Z (zero flag) It is determined as YES when) is "≠ 1".

Then, if a new abnormal input error is detected (S302: YES), an output request at the start of the error display is set (S303). In S303, a predetermined value (= 01H) is stored in the D register. Then, control is transferred to the process of control command set 1, and the control command set 1 which is the transfer destination of this input error check is to perform the process of control command set 2 as described above. Here, in the processing of control command set 2, processing for storing the above-mentioned sub control command in the transmission buffer is performed. This control command set 1 (control command set 2) makes it possible to transmit information such as the type of error to the sub control board 31. Further, in S302 described above, if an abnormal input error has already been detected (S302: NO), the process returns and returns to the original process.
<Relationship between blocker operation control and other processing>
<< Relationship with Replay >>

  Next, the relationship between the process for operating the blocker 47 described above and other processes will be described. First, here, the relationship between the above-described blocker ON process (see FIG. 23A) and replay is described. First, as described above, the blocker 47 (refer to FIG. 7) is in a state in which game medals can be passed when ON and is in a state where game medals are returned when OFF. Control for turning ON the blocker 47 is game The progress main process (see FIG. 14) is executed using the process of blocker ON shown in FIG. 23 (a).

  Also, after the processing of the blocker ON process described above, the drive signal is input to the blocker 47, and the port output process (S547) is performed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18) until the blocker 47 performs a mechanical operation. And control command transmission processing (S548) is required. The timer interrupt process is generated every predetermined period (here, 2.235 ms). Therefore, even if the blocker signal ON data is set in the blocker ON process (see FIG. 23A) (S213), a timer interrupt is generated after that and the blocker 47 can actually pass the game medals. Until then, it involves control and mechanical operational delays. Then, after the blocker signal ON data is set, the blocker 47 is in the OFF state, although the blocker is in the ON state in the main game progress processing, until the blocker 47 actually closes the second outlet 108 (see FIG. 7). It can be said that the situation is

  Furthermore, as described above, the selector passage sensor 46 (see FIG. 7) is capable of detecting the passage of game medals, and is disposed upstream of the insertion sensor 45 and the blocker 47 (upstream of the medal passage 105). ing. The determination regarding the presence or absence of the passage of the game medal using the selector passage sensor 46 can be made before the game medal reaches the insertion sensor 45 or the blocker 47. Furthermore, the first movable portion 112 and the second movable portion 114 of the selector passage sensor 46 also have a function of preventing the backflow of the game medal by projecting into the medal passage 105.

  Then, when the start lever 25 described above is operated, the blocker 47 is turned off and the medal is returned. In this case, the blocker OFF process shown in FIG. Data for turning off the blocker signal is stored in the area (blocker signal data storage area). Here, the presence or absence of the operation of the start lever 25 is performed in S59 of the game progress main process (see FIG. 14), but in the description of FIG. 14 and the main operation of the game progress main process, the blocker 47 is controlled. The related processing (not shown) and the description thereof are omitted.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in the processing of the game medal acceptance start in FIG. 22, it is determined in S105 whether or not it is time to start playing a game again. Furthermore, if it is at the time of replay operation (S105: YES), processing for reading the number of stored sheets (S112), determination as to whether or not the number of stored sheets has reached the storage limit number (S113), etc. are performed. Then, if the stored number has reached the specific value (here, 50) which is the storage limit number, the blocker ON process (S114) is executed.

  In the blocker ON process (S114), as shown in FIG. 23A, it is determined whether the blocker OFF monitoring time has elapsed (S211). This blocker OFF monitoring time is the same as that described above. As described above, in this embodiment, it is set to about 100.57 ms, and clocking is performed based on timer data stored in the blocker OFF monitoring time storage area of the RWM 83. The blocker OFF monitoring time substantially matches the time required to execute the above-mentioned timer interrupt cycle (here, 2.235 ms) a predetermined number of times (here, 50 times).

  Then, if the blocker OFF monitoring time has elapsed (S211: YES), the interrupt is prohibited (S212), and data for turning on the blocker signal is stored in the blocker signal data storage area of RWM 83 (S211) S213). Furthermore, after clearing the above-mentioned input monitoring counter (S214) and setting the blocker signal ON flag (S215), the interrupt is permitted (S216), and the process returns to the process before the start of the blocker ON process. Then, in the timer interrupt (see FIG. 18) generated at the timing after the permission of the interrupt (S216), the blocker 47 is mechanically driven through processing such as port output (S82), and the game medal can be received. It becomes.

  On the other hand, if it is not during replay operation (S105 in FIG. 22: NO), the blocker ON process shown in FIG. 23A is executed without passing through the above determination (S113) relating to the number of stored sheets. A series of processes from monitoring of the OFF monitoring time (S211) to interrupt permission (S216) is performed. As described above, by performing the processing of S113 and the like at the time of replay, it is possible to receive the insertion of the game medals, also at the time of replay, according to the status of the stored number.

  In the present embodiment, in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18), the input detection process related to the selector passage sensor 46, and the operation information output process for operating the blocker 47 based on the blocker ON signal data and the blocker OFF signal data. Has been done. That is, the input detection process based on the selector passage sensor signal is performed by the process (S545) of the input port data generation of the timer interrupt process and the error check process (refer to FIG. 38) of the second control described later. The drive data output process for operating the controller is performed in the control command transmission process (S548) of the timer interrupt process and the like. And these input detection processing and operation information output processing are executed at timing according to the control situation at that time in the timer interrupt processing based on the data set in the game progression main processing.

  In the blocker OFF process (see FIG. 23B) for setting the blocker 47 to the OFF state (return state) (see FIG. 23B), the input sensor abnormality input detection start time is set (S225) as described above. The input sensor abnormality input detection start time is set to about 500.60 ms in this embodiment. This input sensor abnormality input detection start time substantially coincides with the time required to execute the above-described timer interrupt cycle (here, 2.235 ms) a predetermined number of times (here, 224 times) (time taken for 224 interrupts) There is. Then, after the lapse of the input sensor abnormality input detection start time, the abnormality input relating to the input sensor is detected.

  According to the control mode relating to the replay as described above, if there is a possibility that the game medal is passing, it is possible to prevent the medal from being pinched by not turning on the blocker 47. That is, in the medal passage 105, in the vicinity of the selector passage sensor 46 and the blocker 47, the presence of the bending portion 110 (see FIG. 7), the eccentricity between adjacent game medals, and the blocker 47 turn on. Due to the influence of the timing etc., the game medals may be engaged with each other to cause pinching of the game medals.

  In particular, for example, when the player continuously inserts game medals continuously into the game medal insertion slot 21 (see FIG. 1) from the end of one game to the start of the next game, the medal passage 105 It is difficult to secure a gap between the game medals, and when the blocker 47 performs the ON operation, meshing of the game medals is achieved by the balance of factors such as the positional relationship of the plurality of game medals and the force applied from the blocker 47 to the game medals. It is possible that

  However, as in the present embodiment, it is determined whether the blocker OFF-time monitoring time has elapsed (S211) and then the blocker signal is turned ON (S213), and the ON operation of the blocker 47 is reserved for a predetermined period. Thus, it is possible to secure the time for waiting for the passage of the game medals, until the blocker 47 outputs the blocker signal from the main control board 61 or the mechanical operation of the blocker 47. And, it is possible to prevent the game medals from being caught.

  Also, as in the case where the blocker 47 is turned OFF (returned) as in the case where the start lever 25 is operated, wait for the lapse of the input sensor abnormality input detection start time (500.60 ms) as described above. An abnormal input related to the closing sensor is detected. Therefore, the blocker 47 performs the OFF operation almost simultaneously with the normal detection of the game medal by the insertion sensor 45 or the like, and the game medal counted normally is returned from the game medal payout port 16. This can be prevented from occurring.

  Also, when setting the blocker 47 to the OFF state (return state), as described above, the data of the blocker signal OFF is set to the RWM 83, and an output request is made, whereby the timer interrupt process (which occurs thereafter) ( 18), the blocker 47 performs mechanical operation to return. However, immediately after the data of the blocker signal OFF is set, when the abnormal input inspection by the input sensor 2 is started, the blocker 47 reaches the position just before the input sensor 2 while the ON state (passable state) is still maintained. It may also occur when the insertion sensor 2 subsequently detects the game medals being played. And although passage of such a game medal is a normal thing, judgment of the abnormality generation which concerns on the insertion sensor 2 will be made.

Under these circumstances, as in the present embodiment, determination of abnormality input related to the insertion sensor 45 is performed after the input sensor abnormality input detection start time of about 500 ms becomes effective from the timing of the data set of blocker OFF. Thus, it is possible to prevent the normal passage of the game medals from being determined to be abnormal, and it is possible to more accurately determine the occurrence of an error.
<< Process of interrupt prohibition in blocker ON / OFF processing >>

  As described above, in the blocker ON process (see FIG. 23A), after waiting for the blocker OFF time monitoring time (S211), the interrupt is prohibited (S212). In the present embodiment, as described above for the C1 error (see FIG. 9A) related to the closing sensor or the selector passage sensor, the value of the closing monitoring counter increases or decreases based on the detection of the selector passage sensor signal and the closing sensor 2 signal. When the value of the input monitoring counter exceeds a predetermined range (for example, a range of 0 to 3), the blocker 47 is turned off. Then, in the blocker ON process (see FIG. 23 (a)), the process (S213, S215) relating to the blocker signal and the process (S214) relating to the closing monitoring counter are executed as a series of processes. The operation of the blocker 47 is matched with the detection result of the selector passage sensor signal and the input sensor 2 signal.

  Also in the blocker OFF process (see FIG. 23 (b)), the input sensor abnormality input detection start time set (S225) prohibits the interrupt (S222), blocker signal OFF (S223), blocker signal It is performed following each process of state OFF (S224). That is, in the blocker OFF process, the process related to the blocker signal (S223, S224) and the input sensor abnormality input detection start time set (S225) related to the input error check are executed as a series of processes. Thus, the integrity of the operation of the blocker 47 in the return state and the error check is secured.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 18), input detection processing related to the selector passage sensor 46, addition processing of count values of the closing monitoring counter, blocker ON signal data and blocker OFF signal data Based on the operation information output processing for operating the blocker 47 is performed. That is, the input detection process based on the selector passage sensor signal is performed by the process (S545) of the input port data generation of the timer interrupt process and the error check process (refer to FIG. 38) of the second control described later. The process of adding the count value of the counter is performed in the error check process (see FIG. 38) of the error management (see FIG. 20) in the timer interrupt process, and further, the drive data output for operating the blocker 47. The process is performed in the control command transmission process (S548) of the timer interrupt process. Then, these input detection processing, insertion monitoring counter update processing, and operation information output processing are based on the data set in the game progress main processing, at timing according to the control situation at that time in the timer interrupt processing. To be executed.

Here, the relationship between the process of updating the count value of the insertion monitoring counter in the game progress main process and the process of updating the count value of the insertion monitoring counter in the timer interrupt process is limited to the correspondence relationship of addition and subtraction described above. is not. For example, the count value of the insertion monitoring counter may be added in the game progress main processing, and the count value of the insertion monitoring counter may be subtracted in the timer interrupt processing. In this case, for example, the initial value of the count value of the insertion monitoring counter is set to "3" or more, and the initial value is decremented by timer interrupt processing, and in the game progress main processing, the count value of the insertion monitoring counter A control mode may be considered such that the process of determining whether or not the count value is within the normal range is performed by performing addition to.
<< Relation to setting key switch operation >>

  Next, the relationship between the process for operating the blocker 47 and the setting key switch operation will be described. First, in the above-mentioned processing when waiting for game medal insertion, when the setting key switch signal is ON, that is, the data of the setting key switch signal of the predetermined area (setting key switch signal data storage area) of RWM 83 indicates ON. If it is a block, the process of blocker OFF shown in FIG. 23 (b) is executed. Then, data for turning off the blocker signal is stored in a predetermined area (blocker signal data storage area) in the RWM 83.

  Subsequently, the setting display LED 66 (see FIG. 4) for displaying the setting value is enabled. At this time, in the processing when waiting for game medal insertion (S55 in FIG. 14), each processing of lighting of the setting display LED is executed from the setting of the setting value display start output request. Furthermore, when the data stored in the setting key switch signal data storage area of the RWM 83 indicates OFF, the process of blocker ON is executed. The case where the data stored in the setting key switch signal data storage area is OFF means that the falling data is stored when the setting key switch signal rises.

  Then, as described above, when the blocker OFF time monitoring time has elapsed (S211: YES), a series of processes (S212 to S216) are performed, and the data for turning on the blocker signal in S213 Set The process of generating input data and falling data relating to the setting key switch is performed in the process (S545) of generating input port data of the timer interrupt (see FIG. 18). Therefore, in this case as well, it is possible to prevent the medals from being caught by not setting the ON data of the blocker signal while the game medal may be passing.

  In the present embodiment, in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18), the input detection process related to the selector passage sensor 46, the input detection process related to the start lever 25 and the blocker ON signal data and the blocker OFF signal data An operation information output process for operating the blocker 47 is performed. That is, the input detection process based on the selector passage sensor signal and the input detection process based on the start lever sensor signal are performed by the process (S545) of generating input port data of the timer interrupt process and the input error check process (S83). The drive data output process for operating the blocker 47 is performed in the control command transmission process (S548) of the timer interrupt process. And these input detection processing and operation information output processing are executed at timing according to the control situation at that time in the timer interrupt processing based on the data set in the game progression main processing.

According to the control mode as described above, the cooperation relating to the setting key switch operation and the blocker operation can be accurately performed, and the blocker operation control at the time of the setting key switch operation can be appropriately performed.
<< Relationship with error processing >>

  Next, the relationship between processing for operating the blocker 47 and error processing will be described. Here, an example of processing when the above-mentioned CE error (see FIG. 10) occurs is described, and the CE error is a portion where the input sensor 1 (115) or the input sensor 2 (116) is provided (FIG. 7) is an error when it is determined that the game medals have stagnated.

  First, in the game progress main processing (see FIG. 14), when the insertion sensor 1 signal or the insertion sensor 2 (116) is continuously detected for a predetermined time or more, it is determined that game medals are stagnated (CE error). Here, the predetermined time concerning determination of game medal retention is approximately 143.03 ms which is the upper limit value of the above-mentioned retention determination passing time A and C. Then, the process proceeds to the error display process shown in FIG. 24 to save the error number (S231) and save the state information related to the pre-error blocker signal and the hopper motor drive signal (S232). Further, after the hopper motor drive signal is turned off (S233), blocker OFF processing (S234) is executed, and data for turning off the blocker signal is set in S223 as shown in FIG. 23 (b). .

  Subsequently, when the cause of the error is removed (S248: YES), the blocker signal before the error passes through processing such as clearing of the error number (S249) and recovery of various information (S250, S253, S254). It is judged whether it was ON (S255). Then, if the blocker signal before the error is ON (S255: YES), the blocker ON process (S256) is executed, and after waiting for the blocker OFF monitoring time (S211), the blocker signal is output. Data for turning ON is stored (S213). Therefore, in this case as well, it is possible to prevent the medals from being caught by not setting the ON data of the blocker signal while the game medal may be passing.

  In the present embodiment, in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18), the input detection process related to the selector passage sensor 46, and the operation information output process for operating the blocker 47 based on the blocker ON signal data and the blocker OFF signal data. Is performed by timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 18). That is, the input detection process based on the selector passage sensor signal is performed by the process (S545) of the input port data generation of the timer interrupt process and the error check process (refer to FIG. 38) of the second control described later. The drive data output process for operating the controller is performed in the control command transmission process (S548) of the timer interrupt process. And these input detection processing and operation information output processing are executed at timing according to the control situation at that time in the timer interrupt processing based on the data set in the game progression main processing.

According to the control mode as described above, cooperation relating to error processing and blocker operation can be accurately performed, and blocker operation control can be appropriately performed when an error occurs.
<< game medal management processing >>

  Subsequently, the above-mentioned game medal management process (see S56 of FIG. 14) will be described based on FIG. The game medal management process is a process to shift to the case where there is a game medal (S54: YES) by the check (S54) of the presence or absence of a game medal in the above-mentioned game progress main process (see FIG. 14).

  In the game medal management process shown in FIG. 26, management of game medal insertion and clearing processes is performed. More specifically, it is determined whether or not a data set for turning on the above-mentioned blocker 47 (a state in which game medals can be passed) is set (S 321). Here, it is checked whether or not the blocker 47 which is a flow path switching portion of the game medal selector 44 for receiving or discharging the manually inserted game medal is in a receiving state (a medal flow path forming state).

  Then, if the data set for turning on the blocker 47 has been set (S 321: YES), it is checked whether or not the insertion sensor signal is ON (S 322), and it is determined whether or not the game medal is inserted. . The determination as to whether or not the insertion of the game medal is detected is to determine whether or not the actual game medal is detected by the above-mentioned insertion sensors 115 and 116, and it is determined whether or not betting is set (bet). This processing is different from the above-described S54 (see the game progression main processing in FIG. 14).

  Here, among the insertion sensor 1 (115) and the insertion sensor 2 (116), even when only the insertion sensor 2 (116) located on the downstream side of the medal passage 105 detects the game medal, the game medal Is determined (S322: YES). Then, if the insertion of the game medal is detected (S322: YES), the processing of the game medal insertion check of the second control that performs the insertion process such as determination of whether the game medal is properly inserted or not (FIG. 42, See FIG. 43). That is, when both the blocker signal and the insertion sensor signal are ON (S321: YES, S322: YES), the process proceeds to the game medal insertion check (FIG. 42, FIG. 43).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that blocker ON data is not set in the blocker state confirmation process (S321) (S321: NO), or if the insertion of gaming medals is not detected (S322: NO), It is determined whether or not the operation of the bet button or the checkout button in the main input unit 26 (see FIG. 1) can be accepted without performing the medal insertion check process (see FIGS. 42 and 43) (S323). The determination (S323) as to whether or not the button operation is acceptable is to determine whether or not the various bet buttons or the settlement button is in an acceptable state. Then, it is determined that the start lever 25 is not operated or the start lever 25 is operated, or any other stop button (24L to 24R) is operated.

  If the various bet buttons or the checkout button described above are not acceptable (S323: NO), the game medal management is exited and the original processing is returned. If an operation can be received (S323: YES), it is determined whether the operation has been received (S324). The determination (S324) as to whether or not the button operation has been accepted is processing in the case of performing the insertion in response to the button operation. Specifically, it is determined whether the number of bets has already reached the upper limit, and it is determined whether the operated input button is the above-mentioned 1 BET button. Then, if it is a 1 BET button, one piece of data is set, and if it is not a 1 BET button, it is determined that the above-mentioned MAX BET has been made, and the prescribed number of next games is set as the bet number scheduled number. Then, it is determined whether the bet number setting scheduled number is greater than the stored number (the stored medal number) indicating the stored number, and if the stored number is smaller, the bet number scheduled number is set as the stored number . Furthermore, a control command to the effect that the insertion button has been pressed is set, and the bet number is set, and the storage number is decremented for the number of times corresponding to the bet number setting planned number.

  In the process of determining whether or not the button operation has been received (S324), when the operation has not been received (S324: NO), the game medal management is exited and the process returns to the original process. On the other hand, if the operation has been received (S324: YES), it is determined whether the settlement button is ON (S325), and if the settlement button is not ON (S325: NO), storage input processing (see FIG. Move to 27). If the settlement button is ON (S325: YES), the game medal settlement process (S326) for performing settlement in response to the button operation is executed, and the process returns to the original process.

  More specifically, when the signal of the clearing button (clearing switch signal) changes from OFF to ON, the signal to the above-mentioned gaming start display LED (gaming start display LED signal) is turned off, and the gaming medal clearing processing is performed. It transfers to (S326). Further, when the above-mentioned one-sheet switch signal or three-sheet sensor signal is turned from OFF to ON, the game start display LED signal is turned OFF, and the process shifts to storage and insertion. If at least one of S321 and S322 results in a negative determination (NO), and also at S323 or S324 a negative determination (NO), the game medal management process is ended.

  FIG. 28 more specifically shows the contents of the above-mentioned game medal clearing process (S326). In this game medal clearing process, the operation flag is checked (S371), and it is determined whether or not the game is in operation (S372). If it is in operation (S372: YES), the number of bets is set The presence or absence of a medal is confirmed (S373), and if there is a game medal for which the number of bets is set (S373: YES), data of blocker OFF is set (S374), and the medal passage 105 of the game medal selector 44 (see FIG. 6). ) Can not be inserted. Then, a settlement start command is set as a control command (S375).

  Further, the number of game medals set for the number of bets is read (S376), and the settlement process is performed one by one up to the number set for the number of bets. Here, the number of bets (number of bets) is decremented by 1 each time one game medal is paid out (S377), and the number of game medals for which the number of bets has been set is read (S378). It is judged whether or not it has been made (S379). Then, if the settlement for the number of bets has been completed (S379: YES), the game medal limit flag is cleared (S380). The game medal limit flag is a flag used to prohibit the insertion button acceptance.

  Subsequently, a settlement end command is set as a control command (S 381), data of blocker ON is set (S 382), and the medal passage 105 (see FIG. 6) of the game medal selector 44 is returned to the insertable state. Then, the game medal clearing process is ended, and the process returns to the original process. In the determination (S379) whether or not the settlement for the bet number is completed (S379), if the settlement for the bet number is not completed (S379: NO), the bet number is read (S376), and the bet amount is returned. The processes of S376 to S379 are repeated until the settlement is completed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the replay is not in operation (S 372: NO), or it is determined whether or not the number of bets has been set (S 373). When there is no gaming medal for which the bet number has been set (S373: NO), a process (S383) for reading the stored number is executed. Then, it is determined whether or not there is a stored number (S384), and if there is no stored number (S384: NO), the game medal clearing process is ended, and the process returns to the original process.

  In the above-mentioned confirmation (S384) of existence of game medals stored, when there are game medals stored (S384: YES), data of blocker OFF is set (S385), and the game medal selector 44 The medal passage 105 (see FIG. 6) is placed in the insertion impossible state. Then, a settlement start command is set as a control command (S 386). The blocker OFF data set (S 385) and the settlement start command set (S 386) can be processed in the same manner as S 374 and S 375 described above.

  Further, the number of stored game medals is read (S 387), and a clearing process is performed one by one up to the number of stored game medals. Here, every time one game medal is paid out, the number of stored sheets is decremented by 1 (S388), and the number of remaining stored sheets is read (S389), and it is determined whether or not clearing for the number of stored has been completed. (S390). Then, if the settlement for the stored number has been completed (S390: YES), the above-mentioned settlement completion command is set (S381), the data set of blocker ON is performed (S382), and the game medal settlement processing is ended. Return to the original process.

In the determination (S390) as to whether or not the settlement for the storage number has been completed (S390), if the settlement for the storage number has not been completed (S390: NO), the number of stored sheets is read back (S387). The processes of S387 to S390 are repeated until the settlement is completed.
<< Reserved input processing >>

  Subsequently, the above-mentioned storage and introduction process will be described based on FIG. This storage and insertion process is a process to shift to the case where the settlement button is not ON (S325: NO) by the above-mentioned game medal management processing (see FIG. 26) and the determination (S325) whether the settlement button is ON or not. It is.

  In the storage insertion process shown in FIG. 27, it is determined whether or not the game medal limit flag is set (S331). If the game medal limit flag is set (S331: YES), the storage insertion process is performed. And return to the original processing in the game progress main processing. If the game medal limit flag is not set (S331: NO), the processing for the requested number-of-insertions set (S332) is executed. In the requested number of shots set (S332), "1" is set as the requested number of shots, and when the rising edge of the MAX BET switch signal is detected, the upper limit of the bet number and the currently set bet number are set. The difference is set as the requested number of insertions.

  Subsequently, processing for reading the stored number is performed (S333), and it is determined whether there is a stored number of game medals (S334). Then, if there is the stored number (S334: YES), the storage and insertion process is finished, and the process returns to the original process in the game progress main process. If the stored number is not present (S334: NO), the rising data of the insertion switch signal is cleared (S335), and the determination of the relationship between the game medal stored number and the requested insertion number is executed (S336). Then, if the game medal storage number is not more than the insertion request number (S 336: NO), the game medal storage number is set to the insertion request number (S 337), and one game medal addition processing (S 338) is performed. . In the above-described S336, if the number of game medals stored is equal to or more than the number required to be inserted (S336: YES), the process of adding one game medal (S338) is not performed without setting the value of the number of game medals stored (S337). Transition.

  In the process of one game medal addition (S 338), “1” is added to the bet number. After that, the process of displaying the number of acquired coins (S339) is executed, the process of displaying the number of bets (S340) is executed, and the specified number and the number of game medals are read (S341). Further, the process of determination related to the game medal number limit (S342) is executed to determine whether the number of bets has reached the upper limit. Then, if the number of bets has reached the upper limit (S342: YES), the game medal limit flag is set (S343), and the number of stored sheets is read (S345). If the number of bets has not reached the upper limit (S342: NO), the game medal limit flag is not set (S343), and the process proceeds to stored number read processing (S345).

After the stored sheet number reading process (S345), the stored sheet number subtraction process (S345) is executed, and it is determined whether a series of processes related to the requested sheet number has been executed for the requested sheet number (S346) ) Is executed. Then, if the processing for the insertion request number has been completed (S346: YES), the storage and insertion processing is completed, and the processing returns to the original processing in the game progression main processing. If the processing for the required insertion number has not been completed (S346: NO), the processing after the processing of one game medal addition (S338) is executed again.
<Various processings related to the second control>

Next, various processes in the second control described above will be described.
<RWM initialization 2>

  FIG. 30 shows the process of RWM initialization 2 used in the above-described power supply recovery process (see FIG. 21) and the like. In the process of RWM initialization 2, the second working area provided in a predetermined RWM area (F200H to F3FFH) and the maximum usage of the second stack area (F210H to F21EH, F3F3H to F3FFH) have not been removed. Clear the used area.

  More specifically, the stack pointer is saved (S871), the area outside the use region of the stack pointer is set (S872), and a predetermined register is saved (S873). Further, the RWM initialization start address is set (S874), the RWM initialization byte number is set (S875), and the RWM is initialized (S876). Then, the next RWM address is set (S877), and it is determined whether the initialization of RWM is completed (S878).

  In the above S878, if the initialization of the RWM is completed (S878: YES), the RWM initialization start address is set (S879), and if it is not completed (S878: NO), the RWM of the S876 in the above Return to the initialization process. After the above S879, the RWM initialization byte number is set (S880), and the RWM is initialized (S881).

Further, the next RWM address is set (S 882), and it is determined whether the initialization of RWM is completed (S 883). If the initialization of the RWM is completed in the above S883 (S883: YES), the register is restored (S884), and if not completed (S883: NO), the RWM initialization processing of the above S881 Return to After the above S884, the stack pointer is returned (S885), and the process is ended.
<RWM initialization 3>

  Next, the process of RWM initialization 3 used in the setting change device process (see FIG. 13) and the like described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 31, in the process of RWM initialization 3, the stack pointer is saved (S891), the area outside the use region of the stack pointer is set (S892), and a predetermined register is saved (S9). S893). Further, the RWM initialization start address is set (S894), the RWM initialization byte number is set (S895), and the RWM is initialized (S896).

  Subsequently, the next RWM address is set (S897), and it is determined whether the initialization of the RWM is completed (S898). If the RWM initialization is completed in S898 (S898: YES), the register is restored (S899), and if it is not completed (S898: NO), the RWM initialization process in S896 above Return to After the above S899, the stack pointer is returned (S900), and the process is ended.

In addition to the RWM initialization 2 and the RWM initialization 3 described above, for example, the RWM initialization 1 related to the first control is provided as a control module related to the RWM initialization. This RWM initialization 1 is to shift from the control module used in the processing (S52) of the game start set of the power-on process (see FIG. 12) according to the first control, but the RWM initialization 1 The description of the process of is omitted.
<Serial communication setting>

  Next, processing of serial communication setting used for serial communication will be described. In this serial communication setting, the transmission function setting of the SCU 1 used in the output for the test shot is performed. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 32, the stack pointer is saved (S911), the area outside the use region of the stack pointer is set (S912), and a predetermined register is saved (S913).

Further, the SCU1 baud rate register address (lower order) is set (S914), and the SCU1 baud rate register is set (S915). Subsequently, the SCU channel 1 transmission function use, FIFO mode, data length 9 bits, parity use and even parity are set (S916), the register is recovered (S917), and the stack pointer is recovered (S918) , End the process.
<Pattern stop signal output>

  Next, the processing of the symbol stop signal output used in the processing of the condition device command set described above (see FIG. 16) and the like will be described. In the processing of the condition device command set, symbol stop signal data for a test shot test is output. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 33, the stack pointer is saved (S921), the area outside the use region of the stack pointer is set (S922), and a predetermined register is saved (S923).

  Further, the SCU1 data register is set (S924), and the first command (rotational cylinder information designation) is written (S925). Subsequently, the second command (rotational body information designation) is lighted (S926), and the symbol stop signal set is processed (S927). The process (S927) of this symbol stop signal set will be described later.

  Further, the number of transmissions and the setting of the first command (pushing order designation) data are performed (S 928), and the first command is written (S 929). Further, the second command data is acquired from the stop acceptance specification table (S930), and the second command is written (S931). Also, the next first command data is set (S932), and the next table address is set (S933).

Subsequently, it is judged whether or not the transmission is completed (S934). If the transmission is completed (S934: YES), the register is recovered (S935), the stack pointer is recovered (S936), and the processing is terminated. Do. If the transmission is not completed at the above S934 (S934: NO), the process returns to the processing of the first command write of the above S929.
<Pattern stop signal set>

  Next, the processing (S927) of the symbol stop signal set used in the processing of the symbol stop signal output described above (see FIG. 33) will be described. In the processing of the condition device command set, the symbol stop signal data table for the test shot is set according to the instruction number, the operation state flag and the bonus condition device number.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 34, the stop acceptance designation table 2 is set (S941), and the offset is set (S942). Further, it is judged whether or not the instruction number is 0 (S943). If the instruction number is 0 (S943: YES), the stop acceptance specification table 1 is set (S944). Further, it is judged whether or not the bonus is activated (S945), and if the bonus is not activated (S945: NO), the stop acceptance designation table 2 is set (S946).

  Subsequently, the offset is set (S947), and it is determined whether the bonus condition device is not operating (S948). If the bonus condition device is not in operation (S948: NO), an offset is generated (S949), a stop acceptance designation table corresponding to the offset is set (S950), and the process is ended.

If the instruction number is not 0 in S943 (S943: NO), processing of the stop acceptance designation table set according to the offset (S850) is performed without performing processing in between. If it is determined at S945 that the bonus is activated (S945: YES) or if the bonus condition device is not activated at S948 (S948: YES), the subsequent processing is not performed and the processing is ended. Do.
<Test signal output>

  Next, processing of test signal output used in the above-described error management processing (see FIG. 20) and the like will be described. In the processing of the test signal output, the test signal for simulation test, the condition device information, and the replay status identification information are output. Then, the bonus operation information and the replay operation information are output to the output port 10, and the output data is output to the port 9 according to the condition device output time and the replay state identification information flag. Then, when the item condition differential device information is output, the item condition device information is output, and when the winning and re-playing condition device information is output, the winning and re-playing condition device information is output. The state identification information is output, and otherwise clear data is output.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 35, the stack pointer is saved (S961), and the stack pointer (outside the use area) is set (S962). Subsequently, the register is saved (S963), and test signal output data is generated (S964). Further, the test signal is output (S965), and the RT state number is acquired (S966).

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the bonus is activated (S 967), and if the bonus is activated (S 967: YES), re-playing except when the predetermined bonus (here, 1 type BB-A) is activated A state identification signal is set (S968). Further, it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned predetermined bonus (type 1 BB-A) is activated (S969), and if it is activated (S969: YES), the predetermined bonus (type 1 BB- A) A setting of a re-playing state identification signal relating to time is performed (S970).

  Then, the re-playing state identification signal is generated (S971), and it is determined whether the re-playing state identification information flag is ON (S972). Here, the re-playing state identification information is information generated by the RT state number and the operation type. If it is determined in S967 that the bonus operation is not in progress (S967: NO), processing in between is not performed, and it is determined whether the replaying state identification information flag in S972 is ON. If the predetermined bonus (type 1 BB-A) is not activated at S969 (S969: NO), the above-mentioned S970 is not performed, and the replaying state identification information flag at S972 is It is judged whether or not it is ON.

  If the replaying state identification information flag is not ON at the above S972 (S972: NO), the condition device information clear data is set (S973), and it is determined whether or not the condition device information is output. (S974). If it is time to output the condition device information (S974: YES), set the data at the time of character condition device information output (S975), and set the bonus condition device number RWM address (S976).

  Furthermore, it is judged whether or not it is at the time of output of the item condition device information (S977), and if it is not at the time of output of the item condition device information (S977: NO), the winning and re-playing condition device information A set of data (S978), a winning and re-playing condition apparatus number RWM address is set (S979), and a condition apparatus number is acquired (S980). If it is the time of output of the item condition device information at S977 (S977: YES), the processing in between is not performed, and the condition device number at S980 is acquired (S980).

  Subsequently, condition device lower information (information of lower digits) is set (S981), and it is judged whether or not the condition device lower information is output (S982). Furthermore, if not conditional device lower information (S982: NO), conditional device upper information (upper digit information) is set (S983), and conditional device information is generated (S984). Then, the condition device information is output (S985), the register is recovered (S986), the stack pointer is recovered (S987), and the process is ended.

If the replaying state identification information flag is ON at the above S972 (S972: YES), and if it is not at the time of outputting the conditional device information at the above S974 (S974: NO), the processing in between is Without performing, the condition device information of the above-mentioned S985 is outputted (S985). If the condition device lower information is output at S982 (S982: YES), the condition device information generation process of S984 is performed without performing S984 (S984).
<Put-off sensor malfunction set>

  Next, the processing of the above-mentioned insertion and payout sensor abnormality set according to the insertion of the game medal, the error detection of the payout, and the like will be described. In the processing of the insertion / dispensing sensor abnormality set, the display request of the corresponding error is made according to the error detection flag.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 36, the stack pointer is saved (S991), and the stack pointer (outside the used area) is set (S992). Further, the register is saved (S993), and a CH error display request is set (S994). Further, it is judged whether or not a CH error is detected (S995), and if not detected (S995: NO), the error display request is cleared (S996).

Subsequently, error display request data is stored (S997), the register is restored (S998), the stack pointer is restored (S999), and the process is ended. If a CH error is detected in the above S995 (S995: YES), the error display request clear processing of the above S996 is not performed, and the error display request data of the above S997 is stored.
<On / off sensor abnormality clear>

  Next, the processing of the insertion and payout sensor abnormality clear related to the processing at the time of the error display of the insertion and the payout of the game medal will be described. In the process of clearing the input / output sensor abnormality, when an error display request is made, the corresponding error detection flag and the related data are cleared. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 37, the stack pointer is saved (S1011), and the stack pointer (outside the use area) is set (S1012).

Further, the register is saved (S1013), and the error detection flag is set (S1014). Further, it is judged whether or not there is a request for CH error display (S1015), and if there is a display request (S1015: YES), the CH error detection flag is cleared (S1016). Then, the register is restored (S1017) and the stack pointer is restored (S1018), and the process is ended. If there is no display request at the above S1015 (S1015: NO), the above S1016 is not performed, and the processing of the above-described S1017 is performed.
<Error check>

  Next, an error check process used in the above-described error management process (see FIG. 20) and the like will be described. In the error check process, various error check processes are performed. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 38, the stack pointer is saved (S1021), the area outside the use region of the stack pointer is set (S1022), and a predetermined register is saved (S1023).

Furthermore, in the error check process, the process of set value error check (S1024), the process of built-in random number check (S1025), the process of timer measurement 2 (S1026), the process of game medal insertion check (S1027), game medal passing State Update Process (S1028) Insertion / Disbursement Sensor Abnormality Check Process (S1029) Error Display Request Data Clear Process (S1030) is sequentially performed, but these processes will be described later. Then, after the error display request data clear processing (S1030), the register is restored (S1031), the stack pointer is restored (S1032), and the processing is finished.
<Set value error check>

  The set value error check process (S1024) used in the above-described error check process (see FIG. 38) will now be described. In the process of this setting value error check, it is checked whether the setting stage is within the normal range, and if it is not within the normal range, the process shifts to return impossible error processing 2.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 39, E6 error, which is one of non-returnable errors, is set (S1036), and it is determined whether the set value is less than the maximum value (here, 6). (S1037). Further, in S1037, if the set value is less than the maximum value (S1037: YES), the process is ended, and if the set value is not less than the maximum value (S1037: NO), the process shifts to return impossible error processing 2. The non-returnable error process 2 will be described later (see FIG. 49).
<Built-in random number check>

  Next, the process (S1025) of the built-in random number check used in the above-mentioned error check process (see FIG. 38) will be described. In this built-in random number check process, when an occurrence of a built-in random number update related abnormality is detected, the process proceeds to return impossible error processing 2, and when it is not detected, an 8-bit random number is checked.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 40, E7 error, which is one of non-returnable errors, is set (S1041), and built-in information register data is acquired (S1042). Furthermore, it is judged whether or not a built-in random number update related abnormality has occurred (S1043), and if it has not occurred (S1043: NO), an 8-bit random number maximum placement inspection table is set (S1044). Then, the RS0 soft latch random number register address is set (S1045), the 8-bit random number inspection process is performed four times (S1046 to S1049), and the process is ended.

Further, in the processing of determining whether or not the built-in random number update related abnormality has occurred in S1043 described above, when an abnormality has occurred (S1043: YES), the processing shifts to return impossible error processing 2. The non-returnable error processing 2 will be described later (see FIG. 63). Here, the reason why the 8-bit random number inspection process is performed four times in the above S1046 to S1049 is because there are four corresponding registers, and these four registers are checked in order.
<Timer measurement 2>

  Next, the process (S1026) of timer measurement 2 used in the above-mentioned error check process (see FIG. 38) will be described. In the timer measurement 2 process, the timer RWM 1 used for error check is subtracted (if it is less than 0, 0 is set).

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 41, the measurement start timer address is set (S1051), and the one-byte timer number 2 is set (S1052). Further, the 1-byte timer value is updated (S1053), and the next timer address is set (S1054). Further, it is judged whether or not the measurement of the 1-byte timer is completed (S1055), and if it is completed (S1055: YES), the process is ended. If the measurement of the 1-byte timer has not ended in S1055 (S1055: NO), the process returns to the process of updating the 1-byte timer value in S1053.
<Game medal insertion check>

  Next, the game medal insertion check (S1027) used in the above-mentioned error check process (see FIG. 38) will be described. In the game medal insertion check process, inspection of the insertion sensors 1 and 2 is performed when the medal insertion inspection flag is ON or the blocker signal is ON, and when a passage abnormality is detected, a display request for each error is made. Then, if the insertion sensor 1 passage check time or the insertion sensor 2 passage check time is exceeded, a display error request of CE error is made, and if a game medal passes illegally, a display error request of CP error is made. Furthermore, if the input monitoring counter is not within the normal range, a C1 error display request is issued.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 42, blocker signal data is set last time (S1061), and blocker signal data is generated (S1062). Further, blocker signal data is generated this time (S1063), and blocker signal data is generated (S1064). Further, it is judged whether or not the rising of the blocker signal is detected (S1065), and if it is detected (S1065: YES), the closing monitoring counter is cleared (S1066).

  Further, it is determined whether the medal insertion inspection flag is ON (S1067), and if it is not ON (S1067: NO), it is determined whether the blocker signal is ON (S1068). Furthermore, if the blocker signal is ON (S1068: YES), data of the previous game medal passing state is acquired (S1069). Then, it is judged whether or not the insertion sensor signal is ON (S1070), and if it is ON (S1070: YES), the medal insertion inspection flag is set (S1071).

  If the rising edge of the blocker signal is not detected at S1065 (S1065: NO), S1066 is not performed, and it is determined whether the medal insertion inspection flag is ON (S1067). If it is determined in S1067 that the medal insertion inspection flag is ON (S1067: YES), processing in between is not performed, and it is determined whether or not the insertion sensor signal in S1070 is ON. If it is determined in S1068 that the blocker signal is not ON (S1068: NO), the process ends.

  After the above S1071, it is judged whether or not the input sensor 1 signal is ON (S1072), and if it is ON (S1072: YES), a CP error is set (S1073). Furthermore, it is determined whether or not the game medal passing state 1 or 3 last time (S1074), and if a negative determination is made (S1074: NO), it is whether or not the game medal passing state 0 last time A determination is made (S1075).

  If an affirmative determination is made in S1075 (S1075: YES), the input sensor 1 passage check time is set (S1076), and the CE error is set (1077). Then, it is determined whether or not the passing time of the insertion sensor 1 has been exceeded (S1078), and if it has not been exceeded (S1078: NO), the process is ended. If a negative determination is made in S1075 (S1075: NO), the CE error is set in S1077 without performing S1076 (1077).

  If the input sensor 1 signal is not ON at S1072 (S1072: NO), as shown at S1079 in FIG. 42, it is determined whether the signals of the input sensors 1 and 2 are ON. . Furthermore, if the input sensors 1 and 2 signals are ON (S1079: YES), a CP error is set (S1080), and it is determined whether or not the game medal passing state 0 or 1 last time. (S1081).

  Then, if it is not the situation of game medal passing state 0 or 1 last time, it is judged whether or not it is the situation of game medal passing state 2 last time (S1082), and in the case of affirmative judgment (S1082: YES And setting of the passing sensor 2 passage check time (S1083). Also, the CE error is set (S1084), and it is determined whether the passage time of the input sensor 2 has been exceeded (S1085).

  If it is determined in S1085 that the passage time of the insertion sensor 2 has not exceeded (S1085: NO), it is determined whether the passage time of the insertion sensor 1 has exceeded (S1085). (S1086: NO), the process ends. When it is not the situation of game medal passing state 2 last time in the above-mentioned S1082 (S1082: NO), S1083 is not performed but CE error setting of the above-mentioned S1084 is done (S1084).

  If it is determined in S1079 that the input sensor 1 and 2 signals are not ON (S1079: NO), as shown in FIG. 43, the CP error is set in S1087. Furthermore, it is judged whether the game medal passing state was 0 or 2 last time (S1088), and in the case of a negative judgment (S1088: NO), CE error is set (S1089) and the passing of the insertion sensor 2 It is determined whether the time has been exceeded (S1090). And when the passage time of the injection | throwing-in sensor 2 exceeds (S1090: NO), a process is complete | finished.

  When the insertion sensor signal is not ON at step 1070 shown in FIG. 42 (S1070: NO), the processing proceeds to step S1091 shown in FIG. 43, and the medal insertion inspection flag is cleared. Further, the data of the insertion sensor 1 passage check time and the insertion sensor 2 passage check time is cleared (S1092), and it is judged whether or not the game medal passage state 0 last time (S1093).

  And if it is not the situation of game medal passing state 0 last time (S1093: NO), it will be judged whether it is the situation of game medal passing state 2 last time (S1094), if a negative judgment is made (S1094: NO) And set the CP error (S1095). If it is determined in the above S1093 that the previous game medal passing status is 0 (S1093: YES), or if the above S1094 is the previous gaming medal passing status 2 (S1094: YES), the process ends. Do.

  After the above S1095, it is judged whether or not the game medal passing state 1 is in the previous state (S1096). If a positive judgment is made (S1096: YES), the insertion monitoring counter is decremented by 1 (S1097). It is determined whether the value of the monitoring counter is in the normal range (S1098). Furthermore, if the input monitoring counter is not within the normal range (S1098: NO), error display request data is stored (S1099), and the process is ended.

If it is not the situation of the previous game medal passing state 1 at the above S1096 (S1096: NO), the above S1074, S1078, S1081 and S1086 shown in FIG. 42 and the above S1088 and S1090 shown in FIG. If YES is determined, the process proceeds to the above S1099, and the error display request data is stored (S1099). If it is determined in S1098 that the input monitoring counter is in the normal range (S1098: YES), the process ends.
<Game medal passing state update>

Next, the process (S1028) of the game medal passage state update used in the above-mentioned error check process (see FIG. 38) will be described. In the game medal insertion check process, as shown in FIG. 44, the game medal passage state is updated according to the insertion sensor signal. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 44, the input sensor signal information is acquired (S1106), the game medal passing state is updated (S1107), and the process is finished.
<On / off sensor abnormality check>

  Next, the process (S1029) of the input / output sensor abnormality check used in the above-described error check process (see FIG. 38) will be described. In the game medal insertion check process, the input abnormality of the insertion sensor, the input abnormality of the payout sensor, and the passage abnormality of the selector passage sensor are monitored.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 45, the previous error detection flag is updated (S1111), and it is determined whether or not the falling of the blocker signal is detected (in this case, it is OFF or not). (S1112). Furthermore, when the falling of the blocker signal is detected (S1112: YES), the input sensor abnormality input detection start time is set (S1113), and it is determined whether it is an insertion related error or not (S1114) .

  If the falling edge of the blocker signal is not detected in S1112 (S1112: NO), whether or not it is a closing related error without setting the closing sensor abnormality input detection start time (S1113) A determination is made (S1114). If it is determined in S1114 that the input related error is not occurring (S1114: NO), the blocker signal ON is checked (S1115), and the input sensor abnormality input detection start time effective check is performed (S1116) .

  Furthermore, it is judged whether or not there is an insertion sensor abnormality detection test (S1117), and if the result is a positive judgment (S1117: YES), it is judged whether there is an abnormality detection of the insertion sensor 2 (S1118) ). Then, if the abnormality of the insertion sensor 2 is detected (S1118: YES), the C0 error detection flag is set (S1119), and it is determined whether the rising of the selector passage sensor signal is detected (S1120) ).

  If it is determined in S1117 that the insertion sensor abnormality detection test has not been made (S1117: NO), or if it is determined in S1118 that the abnormality related to the insertion sensor 2 has not been detected (S1118: NO), C0 Without setting the error detection flag (S1119), it is determined whether the rising of the selector passage sensor signal is detected (here, whether it is ON or not) (S1120).

  When the rising edge of the selector passage sensor signal is detected in S1120 (S1120: YES), the insertion monitoring counter is incremented by 1 (S1121), and the selector passage sensor residence time is set (S1122). Then, it is judged whether or not the selector passage sensor is ON (whether there is a dead coin) (S1123), and if it is ON (if there is a dead coin) (S1123: YES), the selector aisle time is It is determined whether or not has passed (S1124).

  If it is determined in S1124 that the selector passage residence time has elapsed (S1124: YES), the CH error detection flag is set (S1125), and it is determined whether it is an HP error (S1126). Furthermore, if the selector passage residence time has not elapsed at S1124 (S1124: NO), it is determined whether it is an HP error or not (S1126) without setting the CH error detection flag (S1125). ).

  If it is determined in S1126 that the HP error is not detected (S1126: NO), the RWM address of the dispensing sensor abnormality detection 1 data is set (S1127), and the RWM address of the dispensing sensor abnormality detection 2 data is set (S1128). If it is determined in S1126 that the HP error has occurred (S1126: YES), the process ends.

  Following S1128, the dispensing sensor 1 and 2 mask data and the data of the dispensing sensor 2 bit are set (S1129). Further, it is judged whether or not the hopper motor drive signal is ON (S1130), and if it is not ON (S1130: NO), data for payout sensor check is generated (S1131). Further, it is determined whether only the dispensing sensor 2 is ON (S1132). If only the dispensing sensor 2 is ON (S1132: YES), the dispensing sensor abnormality detection 1 data and the dispensing sensor abnormality detection 2 data Is cleared (S1133), and the process ends.

  If it is determined in S1114 that the error is an input related error (S1114: YES), if the rise of the selector passage sensor signal is not detected in S1120 (S1120: NO), the selector passage sensor is ON in S1123. If not (S1123: NO), the process proceeds to S1126 described above without performing the process between them, and it is determined whether it is an HP error or not.

  When ON of the dispensing sensor 2 alone is not detected in S1132 (S1132: NO), as shown in FIG. 46, the dispensing sensor 1 mask data and the dispensing sensor 1 bit are set (S1134). Further, data for dispensing sensor check is generated (S1135), and data for clearing abnormality detection data is set (S1136).

  If the hopper motor drive signal is ON at S1130 (see FIG. 45) (S1130: YES), the process for generating the payout sensor check data (S1135) shown in FIG. Do.

Subsequently, the payout sensor abnormality detection 3 data is cleared (S1137), and the payout sensor abnormality detection data not to be checked is cleared (S1138). Further, it is judged whether or not the abnormality of the dispensing sensor 1 or 2 is detected (S1139), and when the abnormality is detected (S1139: YES), the dispensing sensor abnormality detection time is measured (S1140). Finish. When the abnormality of the dispensing sensor 1 or 2 is not detected at S1139 (S1139: NO), the process is ended without measuring the dispensing sensor abnormality detection time (S1140).
<Error display request data clear>

  Next, the process (S1030) of the error display request data clear used in the above-mentioned error check process (see FIG. 38) will be described. In the error display request data clear process, the error display request data is cleared when an error is displayed.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 47, it is determined whether or not an error is displayed (S1146). If an error is displayed (S1146: YES), the error display request data is cleared. Then (S1147), the process ends. If it is not at the error display time at S1146 (S1146: NO), the process is ended without clearing the error display request data (S1147).
<< 8-bit random number inspection >>

  Next, the process (S1046 to S1049) of 8-bit random number inspection used in the above-mentioned internal random number check process (see FIG. 40) will be described. In this 8-bit random number inspection process, 8-bit random number inspection is performed, and the 8-bit random number value is equal to or greater than the random number maximum inspection data and the random number maximum value is set, or the acquired maximum 8 pieces of 8-bit random number values are all If they match, the process shifts to return impossible error processing 2.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 48, 8-bit random number values are acquired (S1151), and it is judged whether the random number value is smaller than the random number maximum inspection data (S1152). Furthermore, when the random number value is not smaller than the maximum random number inspection data (S1152: NO), it is determined whether or not the random number maximum value is set (S1153), and the random number maximum value is not set. (S1153: NO), the 8-bit random value is reacquired (S1154).

  When the random number value is smaller than the maximum random number inspection data in S1152 (S1152: YES), the 8-bit random number value is acquired again without performing the determination process (S1153) related to the setting of the maximum random number value (S1152) S1154). If it is determined in S1153 that the maximum random number is set (S1153: YES), the process proceeds to return error processing 2 (see FIG. 49) which will be described later.

  After S1154, it is determined whether the random numbers match (S1155), and if they match (S1155: YES), 8-bit random values are reacquired (S1156). Furthermore, it is judged whether all the acquired three random number values match (S1157), and if they do not match (S1157: NO), the 8-bit random number maximum value inspection table is updated (S1158). Then, the 8-bit random number soft latch random number value register address is updated (S1159), and the process ends.

If the random number values do not match in S1155 (S1155: N), the 8-bit random number maximum value inspection table in S1158 is updated without performing the processing in between. If all the acquired three random number values match in S1157 (S1157: YES), the process shifts to return impossible error processing 2 (see FIG. 49) described later.
<< Return impossible error processing 2 >>

  Next, about the non-returnable error processing 2 used in the above-mentioned set value error check processing (see FIG. 39), built-in random number check processing (see FIG. 40), 8-bit random number check processing (see FIG. 48), etc. explain. In the non-returnable error process 2, processing is performed when a non-returnable error is detected.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 49, the error display data of the lower digit is set (S1171), and the error display data of the upper digit is set (S1172). Further, the clear output port address and the number of ports are set (S1173), and the output ports (0 to 6) are turned off (S1174).

Further, the next output port address is set (S1175), and it is judged whether or not the output is completed (S1176). If the output is completed (S1176: YES), an error display for output ports 3 and 4 is made The output is performed (S1177). Then, the upper digit and the lower digit are switched (S1178), and the process returns to the processing of the clear output port address and the number of ports set in S1173. Further, if the output is not completed at S1176 (S1176: NO), the process returns to the process of the output port (0 to 6) OFF of S1174.
<Operation effect of the invention concerning medal insertion>

  As described above, according to the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the insertion sensor 45 and the selector passage sensor 46 are provided in the game medal selector 44, both of the insertion sensor 45 and the selector passage sensor 46 are detected The result can be used to determine the state of the game medals. Therefore, for example, compared with the case where only the feed sensor 45 is used, it is possible to perform the fraud countermeasure more firmly. Furthermore, since the operation state relating to the insertion of gaming medals can be monitored using the insertion sensor 45 and the selector passage sensor 46, error monitoring and operation control of the blocker 47 can be properly performed based on the various control modes as described above. It is possible to Then, various functions other than the detection of the presence or absence of fraud can be given to the selector passage sensor 46, and the selector passage sensor 46 can be effectively used. In addition, it is possible to execute at the proper timing in relation to other processing also with regard to the stop of the game executed after the detection of the abnormality.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the test signal output process (S762) is executed in the error management process (see FIG. 18 and FIG. 20) related to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18). Execute signal output processing. Then, a test signal output process (S762) sets a test signal corresponding to the combination determination result (combination extraction result), and the combination determination result can be output as a test signal. Further, the main control board 61 having the main CPU 81 which is the arithmetic processing means is not provided with an extra connector used for connection with the test apparatus at the product development stage, but it is not used for arranging the extra connector. The mounting area 183 is left as it is. Therefore, it is possible to provide a product under the same conditions as at the time of test, and to reduce the risk of illegally acquiring internal information from a test signal.

  Furthermore, in the process at the time of power on (see FIG. 12), the initial setting process is first executed based on the fact that the power is turned on. Then, after initializing (S1) the register as the initial setting process, although not shown, an initial value is set in the register to set the type of interrupt and the like. Furthermore, when such initial setting processing is completed, the RWM checksum is calculated (S3), and it is determined whether the designated switch (here, the door switch, setting door switch, setting key switch) is operated. (S9) If not operated (S9: NO), the power failure recovery process (see FIG. 21) is executed.

  Therefore, when the power is turned on, the initial value can be set in the register at an early stage, and the process at the time of power on is always performed in the same state without being influenced by the data remaining in the register at the previous power off (FIG. 12). Most of the processes (S2 to S13) can be performed.

  In addition, in the process at the time of power on, after setting the initial value in the register, it shifts to the setting change device processing (see FIG. 13), and in the setting change device processing, the set value is in a predetermined range (here, “1”) It is checked whether it is in “6”) (S30 in FIG. 13), and if the set value is not within the predetermined range (S30: NO), the set value is corrected (S31), and the setting is made. A set value display process is performed to display the value on the game information display means (S32). Furthermore, in the display process, information indicating that the setting is being changed and the stored setting value are output to the display device (here, the setting display LED 66 (see FIG. 4)) (S32) and set according to the operation of the setting switch. The values are updated (S33 to S34).

  Therefore, the process for displaying the setting value can be properly defined from the time of power-on, and the setting value can be accurately displayed. Then, it is possible to properly perform a series of processes from the power-on to the process for displaying the setting value. In addition, it is possible to prevent an abnormal display on the setting display LED 66 (see FIG. 4) which is a display device for displaying the setting value.

  As a condition for transition to the setting change device process (FIG. 13), for example, it is conceivable to adopt a condition based on the state of the built-in RWM (see FIG. 11). More specifically, checksums are performed for all areas within the range of the target of the built-in RWM, and that the value of the checksum (checksum data) is normal is regarded as a transition condition to the setting change device processing. It can be illustrated. In addition, although a checksum is performed, the result of the checksum is not used for any determination condition, and even if there is an abnormality in the checksum value, a control mode in which no special processing is performed can be adopted. .

  Furthermore, establishment of a plurality of conditions may be used as the transition condition to the setting change device processing, in which case both the power-off execution processing flag is normal and the checksum result is normal. It may be considered as a transition condition to the setting change device processing.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, when the setting change switch (setting key switch 68 in FIG. 4) is operated, the change of the switch signal (setting / reset button signal) is detected by the rising of the signal (FIG. 13 S33). Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, in the game progress main process (see FIG. 14), the presence or absence of a game medal is determined at the start of the game (S54), and there is no game medal (when there is no bet) (S54) : NO) As described above, the set value confirmation state in which the set value currently set is visibly displayed on the display device (setting display LED 66) is enabled. If there is a game medal (if there is a bet number) (S54: YES), the setting value currently set is not displayed on the display device (setting display LED 66), and the setting value can not be confirmed.

  Then, in the processing (S55) of the display while waiting for game medal insertion which is executed when the set value confirmation possible state is entered, the set value can be confirmed by operating the setting change switch (setting key switch 68) It becomes. Furthermore, in this set value check enabled state, blocker OFF data is set so that game medals can not be inserted, display processing of stored set values is performed, and a change in switch signal is detected (falling detection), The setting value display processing ends, and processing for setting blocker ON data is executed.

  Further, in the set value checkable state, processing for advancing the game, such as from the game medal management (S56 in FIG. 14) to the game end check (S68 in FIG. 14), is not performed. Furthermore, although illustration is omitted, in the state where the set value can be confirmed, errors related to random numbers are detected but other error monitoring is not performed. Further, while transitioning to the set value checkable state is made by detecting a change in the switch signal, when the bet number is set (S 54: YES), a change in the switch signal relating to the bet number is detected. Even if it does not shift to the setting confirmation state, progress of the game is possible (see S56 or later).

  By executing the process for making the set value confirmation impossible state in this way and setting restrictions on the confirmation of the set value, it is possible to make it impossible to confirm the set value without going through a predetermined procedure. It becomes. Then, it becomes possible to prevent the fraudulent act of trying to confirm the set value by a method other than the appropriate method.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, when the game medals are paid out based on the display determination (S66) of the game progress main process (see FIG. 14), the display process according to the number of game medals paid out is performed Every time one medal is paid out, the value displayed on the display device (here, the acquired number display unit) is updated. Then, the value corresponding to the number finally paid out is displayed until the next game medal is inserted, or the above-mentioned game standby display start time (when the game medal is not inserted even if a predetermined time has elapsed from the end of the game) Be done. Further, even when the information relating to the number of paid out game medals is being displayed, when an error occurs, the value is changed to the value corresponding to the displayed number, and the display corresponding to the generated error is performed.

  Then, according to the present embodiment as described above, the display related to the number of game medals can be changed to another display mode at an appropriate timing by defining the condition for turning off the display of the above-mentioned acquired number, Compared to the case where the switching is not performed, or the timing of the switching is too late or too early, it is possible to prevent misidentification of the game result.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, in the game progress main processing (see FIG. 14), the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value (start address) (S51). Then, the game medal management process (S56) and the start switch input confirmation process (S58) are performed. Furthermore, the management process of game medals (S56) and the input confirmation process of the start switch are repeated (S58) until the start switch is effectively accepted. Therefore, the stack pointer can be cleared each time in the early stage of the start in the game progress main process (see FIG. 14), and when any abnormality occurs, it is possible to prevent the process from looping as it is in an abnormal state.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, display determination (S66) is performed in the game progress main process (see FIG. 14), and when there is a payout of gaming medals, processing (S67) for payout of gaming medals is performed. Then, when the payout of the game medals is finished or when the payout of the game medals is not made, the processing according to the game state is performed by the game end check (S68 etc.).

  Then, in the game end check process (S68 etc.), the RWM clear process of the condition device number other than the carryover combination (clear the condition device of the non-overtakeover combination), turn off the replay indicator LED, clear the replay activation flag, Set the game state such as bonus (here BB) or RT. Further, when the game end check (S68 etc.) is finished, a predetermined value (start address) is set to the stack pointer at the head of the game progress main processing (see FIG. 14) (S51). Therefore, the stack pointer can be cleared every time after the game end check (S68 etc.), and it is possible to prevent the processing from being looped as it is in the abnormal state when any abnormality occurs.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the value of the stack pointer is set to the first predetermined storage set in the built-in RWM area (F000H to F14AH) shown in FIG. The checksum data is stored in the area (S568), and the checksum data is calculated for the storage area range (F000H to F3FFH) of the RWM including the work area, and the checksum value obtained by the calculation is the first predetermined value in the same work area. The storage area is stored in the second predetermined storage area (S574). Furthermore, the first predetermined storage area and the second predetermined storage area described above are set in areas other than the first and the last of the work area. Therefore, it is possible to save the value of the stack pointer and the value of the check sum data avoiding the beginning and end of the work area where the position can be easily identified, making it difficult for a third party to specify the storage location of these values. This makes it possible to prevent fraud.

The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and various control modes as described below can be employed.
<Control mode related to error notification>

  First, a control mode relating to error notification will be described. As a control mode relating to the error notification, in the error management process (see FIG. 20) subsequent to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20), the error check (S754) etc. relating to the second control Monitoring is performed (see FIG. 38), and when an error occurs, a main command is transmitted to the sub control board 31, and based on the main command, the sub control board 31 performs, for example, the rendering unit 18 (see FIG. 1). It is conceivable to use the error notification. In other words, error notification can be performed before stopping the progress of the game (before the error display process in each situation).

Further, after an operation of the start lever 25, that is, in a state in which the blocker 47 is OFF (returnable state), for example, when an error occurs in a situation where the rendering in the rendering unit 18 (see FIG. 1) is performed, It is conceivable that the effect is canceled (canceled), and the effect unit 18 or the like executes notification of an error. Furthermore, as another aspect, for example, when the blocker 47 is in the OFF state (returnable state), for example, when the effect in the effect section 18 (see FIG. 1) is being executed, for example, while the effect is continued, for example It is conceivable to perform error display on a display device (for example, an acquired number display LED or the like) capable of error notification or to execute error notification by voice using the speaker 50. Further, as another aspect, similarly, in the state where the blocker 47 is OFF (returnable state), for example, in the rendering unit 18 (see FIG. 1), high expectation indicating that the degree of expectation for winning some role is high. If an error occurs while executing a specific effect such as a production or a continuous performance that is continuously performed across multiple games, notification of an error is performed after stopping the entire body. It is possible to do. For example, when the sub control means (here, the sub control board 31) receives the main command based on the input error setting process (see FIG. 25), the predetermined notification mode A (liquid crystal, first lamp, and When an error is reported by the notification mode using an amplifier (speaker) and the main command based on the error display process (see FIG. 24) is received, another notification mode B (liquid crystal, first lamp, second) The notification may be made by using a lamp of (1) or a notification form using an amplifier (speaker). At this time, the second lamp is a lamp capable of navigating the operation order during AT game (notification game), and the player is not disadvantaged in the game even when an error occurs. It is possible to control the second lamp, and so on.
<Control mode related to game stop>

Further, as a control mode relating to game stop, for example, in the timer interrupt process, the selector passage sensor 46 and the insertion sensor 45 are monitored by error management (see FIG. 20) or the like (see FIG. 38). Then, after proceeding to the error display process (FIG. 24), instead of performing the loop process in S240 or S248 in FIG. 24 to stop the game, the game is immediately stopped in the error check (FIG. 38) ( For example, blocker OFF processing may be performed. Furthermore, it is conceivable to execute an error notification using the effect unit 18, the speaker 50, and the like under the control of the sub control board 31 in synchronization with the timing of game stop.
<Other control modes related to error detection>

  Further, the blocker 47 is in the ON state (passable state), and the error management process (FIG. 20) from the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18) detects an error based on the closing sensor 45 by the error check (FIG. 38). If it is determined that there is no need to wait for the error display process (FIG. 24), for example, the process may immediately shift to a process for stopping the game (eg, blocker OFF process) within the error check (FIG. 38). Conceivable.

  Furthermore, when an error based on the insertion sensor 45 or the like is detected by various processing in the game progress main processing (see FIG. 14), monitoring of the selector passage sensor 46 or monitoring of the insertion sensor 45 by timer interrupt processing is performed. It is possible not to execute the process for Furthermore, as described above, while the processing for monitoring the selector passage sensor 46 and the monitoring for the insertion sensor 45 by the timer interrupt processing is not executed, the payout provided to the game medal payout device 63 (see FIG. 2) A command set that performs monitoring of a sensor (not shown) based on the timer interrupt cycle, and sends an error command associated with the abnormality to the sub when an abnormality such as stagnation or backflow of the game medal is detected by the payout sensor. It is conceivable to execute processing for

In addition, when the above-mentioned door (front door portion 11) is open (when the door switch is in the open state), an error notification relating to the door opening is performed using the LED or the speaker 50. However, although the main control board 61 recognizes the occurrence of an error relating to the door opening, it does not recognize it as an error applicable to stop the game, and transmits a command relating to the occurrence of the error to the sub control board 31 Do. Then, the sub control board 31 executes the door open error notification. For this reason, even if the front door unit 11 is opened, it is possible to play a game involving reel control. Furthermore, when the front door unit 11 is closed in a situation where the door open error notification is performed, the sub control board 31 determines that the door open error release condition is satisfied, and the door open by the LED or the speaker 50 is performed. End the error notification. The sub control board 31 may end the door open error notification after waiting for a predetermined time (for example, several seconds) after the front door unit 11 is closed.
<Various modes related to management of minimum game time>

In the present embodiment, as described above, the management of the minimum game time is performed in various modes according to the situation. In the following, first, basic functions and management modes relating to the minimum game time will be described, and subsequently, various management modes of the minimum game time at the time of occurrence of a normal error or a predetermined error will be described with reference to FIGS. It explains based on.
<< Basic functions and management aspects related to minimum game time >>

  First, as described above, the minimum game time does not start the rotation of the current game unless the predetermined time (4.1 seconds in this case) has elapsed from the start of the rotation of the previous game. It is intended to And, as described above, the timer measurement of the time (game time) related to the minimum game time is due to the process (S551) of the timer measurement in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18). Here, in the timer measurement process (S551), counting (subtraction herein) of all the timers is performed. Then, in the timer measurement process (S551), as described above, the 1-byte timer and the 2-byte timer are measured, but the minimum game time is counted using the 2-byte timer.

  Furthermore, when the time required for one game exceeds the minimum game time, bet setting (bets) of the game medals is made, and when the start lever 25 (see FIG. 1) is operated, the above-described respective turn drums 51L to 51 No rotating drum rotation standby period (weight period) which does not perform rotation occurs, and each rotating drum 51L to 51 starts rotating. Here, in the present embodiment, the period of one game is a period from the start of rotation of the drums 51L to 51 to the stop of rotation.

  On the other hand, even if the bet setting (bet) of the game medal is made and the start lever 25 (see FIG. 1) is operated, if the minimum game time set at the previous game has not yet passed, It is a spinning drum rotation standby period (waiting period) in which the spinning drums 51L to 51 are not rotated until the minimum game time has elapsed. In addition, during the rotation rotation standby period (wait period), even if the stop buttons 24L to 24R described above are operated, these operations are not accepted.

  In the following, after the operation of the start lever 25 is detected after the rotation of the drum in the previous game is stopped, a period during which the rotation of the drum in the current game is not started is waited for the start of rotation of the drum after rotation stops. It is called a "wait period" which is a period, and is distinguished from the aforementioned "4.1 second wait" corresponding to the minimum game time. Further, the above-mentioned "wait period" can be counted using the timer included in the "other game standby measurement timer" in the timer measurement process (see S551 in FIG. 18).

The check of whether or not the minimum game time has elapsed, and the setting of a timer (sometimes referred to as a "minimum game time timer" hereinafter) relating to the minimum game time are the game progress main processing (FIG. 13) as described above. It is executed in the rotation start standby state of the rotating cylinder, which is used in the internal lottery start process (S60). That is, the progress check of the time concerning the minimum game time and the timer set are performed not by the interrupt process but by the process executed according to the progress of the game. Further, the timer measurement of the time related to the minimum game time may be performed in a mode of counting down the timer value, or may be performed in a mode of counting up.
<< Management mode at normal time >>

  FIG. 50 (A) shows a management mode of the minimum game time at the normal time. Here, in the present embodiment, it can be said that “normal time” is in a broad sense as a normal state in which a game can be played. Then, in the present embodiment, for example, a situation where a recoverable error or a recoverable error as described later occurs (see FIG. 50 (B) or FIG. 51 (A)), a situation where a set value is confirmed (figure 52 (B) etc. can be excluded from this "normal time".

  Further, in the narrow sense, the above-mentioned "normal time" is, for example, at the time of clearing or inserting the game medals described later (see FIG. 51 (B), FIG. 52 (A)), etc. A situation in which the management mode of the minimum game time is described can be excluded. It should be noted that the status at the time of clearing or inserting the gaming medals (see FIG. 65B and FIG. 66A) is also included in the “normal time”, for example, “basic time” shown in FIG. It is also possible to call the situation at the time of settlement or insertion of the game medals shown in FIG. 51 (B), FIG. 52 (A) or the like “normal normal” or “normal normal”. .

  In (a) to (g) in FIG. 64 (A), the minimum game time timer, the rotation start permission state, the lever operation, the first torso, the second toroid, the third toroid, and the display determination The respective timings related to are schematically shown. In addition, the first, second and third rotating cylinders in the figure are the same as the above-described first, second and third rotating cylinders 51L, 51C and 51R (see FIG. 1). It corresponds.

  In (a) to (g) of FIG. 50 (A), in the minimum game time of (a) shown at the top, the rising of the chart as shown at timing T1 is the above-mentioned timer measurement related to the minimum game time. Corresponds to the start of the. As described above, this minimum game time is not to start the current rotation only after a predetermined time (4.1 seconds in this case) has elapsed from the start of the rotation in the previous game. It is for. And, as described above, the timer measurement related to the minimum game time timer is performed by the process (S551) of the timer measurement in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18).

  Furthermore, in FIG. 50 (A), in the minimum game time timer of (a), the period in which the chart is rising (period from T1 to T2) indicates that the minimum game time timer continues counting. The trailing edge of the chart shown at timing T2 indicates that the counting of the minimum game time timer has stopped. Then, in the normal state shown in FIG. 50 (A), the timer measurement related to the minimum game time timer is continued for 4.1 seconds, which is a period in which it is not possible to start rotation of the next game. It stops by progress and the count of the minimum game time timer ends.

  Subsequently, with respect to the state of the spinning drum rotation start permission shown in (b) in FIG. 50 (A), during the period when the chart is rising, the first barrel 51L, the second barrel 51C, and the third barrel described above. 51R (see FIG. 1) indicates that it is a period in which rotation can be started. That is, while (b) in FIG. 50 (A) is performing the measurement of the time related to the minimum game time shown in (a), the respective drums 51L to 51R can not start rotation (the start disapproval In the state, while the time related to the minimum game time is not being measured, it indicates that the respective drums 51L to 51R can start the rotation (start permission state).

  Then, in (b) in FIG. 50 (A), as shown at the left end of the chart, the chart is started from the situation where the rotation of the rotating drum can be started (the situation before timing T1) (a When the measurement of the time relating to the minimum game time in) is started (timing T1), it becomes impossible to start the rotation of the rotating drum. Furthermore, when the measurement of the time relating to the minimum game time is stopped (timing T2), it becomes possible to start the rotation of the turning drum, and when the measurement of the time relating to the minimum game time is started again Can not be done (timing T3).

  Subsequently, for the lever operation shown in (c) in FIG. 50 (A), the rising of the chart shown at timing T4 indicates that the above-described operation of the start lever 25 has been detected. Furthermore, (d) to (f) in FIG. 50 (A) show the states of the first torso (51L), the second toroid (51C), and the third toroid (51R), respectively. There is. And the standup of the chart in (d)-(f) in the figure has shown the rotation start of each rotating drum (51L-51C), and the falling of a chart stops the rotation stop of each rotating drum (51L-51C). It shows.

  As shown at the left end in (b) in FIG. 50 (A), if the lever operation is possible as shown in (c) in the figure in a situation where the rotation of the rotating drum can be started (condition before timing T1). (Timing T4) The first barrel (51L), the second barrel (51C), and the third barrel (51R) start to rotate (timing T1). At this time, the timer measurement is started for the minimum game time timer in (a) in the figure, and the rotation can not be started for the rotating drum rotation start permission in (b) in the figure.

  Then, when the above-described stop buttons 24L to 24R (see FIG. 1) are operated in the order of the first stop button 24L, the second stop button 24C, and the third stop button 24R (so-called forward pressing), As shown, the first barrel (51L) and the second barrel (51C) are sequentially stopped, and the third barrel (51R) is finally stopped as shown at timing 5 in the figure. Here, among the above-described respective turning drums (51L to 51R), the game in which the third torso (51R) stops at timing T5 at the end will be described below as the N (N is a natural number of 1 or more) game .

  Further, here, each stop button 24L to 24R is sequentially pressed so that the explanation and illustration are not complicated, and the stop of each turning cylinder is the first time barrel (51L), the second time barrel (51C), the third time The case of stopping in the order of the torso (51R) is described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the stop order of each rotating drum (51L to 51R) is any of six ways: left middle right, left middle, middle left right, middle right left, right left middle, right middle left, right middle left It may be.

  As shown at timing T5 in FIG. 50 (A), when the final rotating drum (here, the third trunk 51R) is stopped, as shown by the rising of the chart at timing T5 of (g) in the figure. The display determination (see S66 in FIG. 14) is performed.

  Here, even if the last rotation stop (in this case, the stop of the third rotation 51R) is performed (timing T5), measurement by the minimum game time timer in (a) of FIG. For example, as shown at timing T6 in (c) in the figure, the rotation of the drum does not start immediately even if there is a lever operation for the next game (the (N + 1) th game). Then, as shown by timing T2 in the drawing, when the minimum game time has elapsed, the rotation of each turning drum (51L to 51R) is started based on the lever operation at timing T6 (timing T3).

  Then, when the operation of each stop button 24L to 24R is performed again by the forward pressing, as shown in (d) to (f) in the figure, the first time barrel (51L) and the second time barrel ( 51C), the third torso (51R) is stopped in this order, and the display determination according to the (N + 1) th game is performed as shown at timing T7 in (g) in the figure.

  Various modes can be adopted for the mode of starting rotation of each rotating drum (51L to 51C) shown at timing T1 and timing T3 in FIG. 50 (A). For example, as shown in the drawing, a mode in which three spinning drums are simultaneously started to rotate, or a case in which a time difference is provided to the timing of starting the rotation of each spinning cylinder can be exemplified. Furthermore, as to provide a time difference between the start timings of the rotations of the respective drums, for example, after the rotation is started for the two reels of the first reel and the next reel, measurement of the time related to the minimum gaming time is started. The aspect which rotates the remaining (last) reel after that can be illustrated. In addition, it is also possible to consider an aspect in which measurement of the time related to the minimum game time is started after the start of rotation of the first reel, and then rotation of the two remaining reels is sequentially started.

In addition to the above, for example, at the time of lever operation, if the minimum game time set at the start of the rotation of the turning drum in the previous game has not passed, as the time difference is provided for the timing of the rotation start of each turning drum , The remaining time (weight period) is divided into three, for example, and when one third of the time has elapsed, the first (first) reel is started to rotate, and when two third of the time has elapsed The second (second) reel is started to rotate, and the third (last) reel is started to rotate when the remaining game time has elapsed and the minimum game time has elapsed. It can be illustrated.
<< Management mode at the time of returnable error >>

  Next, a management aspect of the minimum game time when a returnable error (returnable abnormality) occurs will be described based on FIG. 50 (B). The same parts as those in the normal state shown in FIG. 50A are illustrated in the same manner, and the description will not be repeated.

  In FIG. 50 (B), (a) to (g) are the same as the normal time of FIG. 50 (A), the minimum game time timer, the rotation rotation start permission, the lever operation, the first torso (51L), The 2nd time trunk (51C), the 3rd time trunk (51R), and each chart of display judging are shown. Here, when the game from the rotation start to the rotation stop of each rotating drum 51R to 51L shown on the left side in the drawing is the Nth game as described above, each rotating drum as shown on the right side in the drawing. The game of performing the next rotation and stop of 51R to 51L is the (N + 1) th game as described above.

  Also, (h) to (j) in FIG. 50 (B) show charts of a recoverable error, an abnormal state, and an abnormal release. As described above, in the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is impossible to return to the normal state only by removing the error (error that can be returned to the normal state). Error (unrecoverable error).

  Among these, the recoverable error is an error that can be canceled without starting the above-mentioned setting change device processing (see FIG. 13) and performing the setting change device processing. On the other hand, after the power is turned off after the occurrence of the error that can not be recovered, the setting key can be turned on to start the power supply and start the setting change device processing (see FIG. 13), so that the error can be canceled When the setting key is turned off, the setting change state is exited and the error is returned to the normal time (the state where the game is possible). And, (h) in FIG. 50 (B) shows the detection (occurrence) of a recoverable error among these errors by the rising of the chart (timing T11).

  In this returnable error, as described above, HE error, HP error, HQ error, and FE error related to payout of gaming medals, CP error related to insertion of gaming medals, There are C0 error, C1 error, CH error and CE error. Among these, the HE error is an error when it is determined that the game medal in the game medal payout device 63 is empty, and the HP error is determined that the game medal is clogged at the game medal outlet in the game medal payout device 63 It is an error of the case.

  Furthermore, the HQ error is an error when it is determined that there is an abnormality input in the payout sensor (not shown), and the FE error is an error when it is determined that the game medal auxiliary storage 71 is full. The CP error is an error when it is determined that the inserted gaming medal has passed illegally, and the C0 error is when it is determined that the insertion sensor (here, the insertion sensor 2) has an abnormal input as described above. It is an error of

  Furthermore, the C1 error is an error when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the portion where the insertion sensor 45 and the selector passage sensor 46 are provided in the medal passage 105, and the CH error is played on the selector passage sensor 46 as described above. It is an error when it is determined that the medal has stagnated. The CE error is an error in the case where it is determined that the game medal has stagnated at the portion where the insertion sensor 1 (115) or the insertion sensor 2 (116) is provided.

  The error cancellation condition relating to these errors is that a cancellation operation for changing the signal of the setting / reset button 69 (setting / reset button signal) from OFF to ON is performed in the state where the factor is removed. Furthermore, when the door switch signal relating to the door switch 60 and the setting door switch signal relating to the setting door switch 67 are ON, the above-described release operation becomes effective.

  With regard to (h) in FIG. 50 (B), when a recoverable error is detected (timing T11), an abnormal state occurs as indicated by the rising of the chart (timing T11) in (i) of the figure. Here, the detection timing (T11) of the recoverable error is the timing after all the rotating cylinders (51L to 51R) have stopped.

  Also, as shown in the rising of the chart in (j) after the returnable error is canceled, when the cancellation of the abnormal state is detected (here, timing T2), the above-described abnormal state ends (timing T12). ). In FIG. 50 (B), the abnormal cancellation timing of (j) is illustrated to coincide with the end timing (timing T2) of the measurement by the minimum gaming time timer of (a). Is merely an example, and the timing of the two is not necessarily the same.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, as shown in (h) to (j) in FIG. 50 (B), even in the situation where a recoverable error has occurred (see timing T11 and after), shown in (a) in the figure. As such, the measurement (counting) of the time related to the minimum game time is continued. Then, when 4.1 seconds have elapsed since the measurement of the time relating to the minimum game time is started, the measurement of the time relating to the minimum game time is stopped (timing T2). At this time, as shown in (i) in the figure, if the error state continues, as shown in (a) and (b) in the figure, even if the measurement by the minimum game time timer is completed, It will not be possible to start rotation.

  That is, in the example shown in FIG. 50 (B), as shown in (a) and (b) in the figure, even in the Nth game, even if the minimum game time set in RWM has elapsed (timing T2 ), It is not possible to rotate the drum immediately. Then, when the abnormal state ends (timing T12) as shown in (i) in the figure, the start of the rotation of the drum is permitted (timing T12) as shown in (b) in the figure.

  Furthermore, thereafter, as shown in (c) in the figure, if there is a lever operation in the (N + 1) th game (timing T6), the first ton (51 L), the second ton (51 C), the third The rotation of the torso (51R) is started, and the timer is set according to the count of the minimum game time timer, and as shown in (a) of the figure, the measurement of the time according to the minimum game time is started. Along with this, as shown in (b) in the figure, the rotation start of the rotating drum is not permitted.

  And if each stop button 24L-24R is operated, each rotation drum 51L-51R will stop based on the operation timing and operation sequence of each stop button 24L-24R. Here, in the example of FIG. 50 (B), as in the case of FIG. 50 (A), the stop buttons 24L to 24R are in order for each of the Nth game and the N + 1th game. It is operated by pushing.

  The management mode at the time of this recoverable error can also be described as follows. That is, while the game is stopped due to the returnable error, the measurement (counting) of the time related to the minimum game time is continued. Then, in the Nth game, a period in which the game is performed before the occurrence of the returnable error (period from the start of the game to the occurrence of the returnable error) and a period in which the returnable error occurs (returnable) If the total of error durations) exceeds the minimum playing time (4.1 seconds), the (N + 1) th game can start without a weight period. On the other hand, if the sum of the period in which the game before the returnable error occurred and the period in which the returnable error occurs is less than the minimum game time (4.1 seconds), the N + 1st game is , You can start after the weight period.

  According to the management mode at the time of the recoverable error as described above, when the recoverable error occurs, by continuing the measurement of the time related to the minimum gaming time, it is possible to prevent the passage of the minimum gaming time as much as possible Can control the game machine. Furthermore, regardless of the state of the gaming machine (here, the slot machine 10) or the gaming state, it is possible to count the time related to the minimum gaming time. And, it becomes possible to advance the game smoothly, and it is possible to secure the maximum number of games per predetermined time (for example, the game time by one player, the business hours of the game arcade for one day, etc.) Become.

That is, as described above, the period related to the minimum game time is a period in which the next rotation of the drum can not be started, and by stopping the measurement of the time related to the minimum game time, the next rotation can not be started The period will be extended. For this reason, in order to secure the number of games as much as possible and enjoy the game with the player, it is desirable not to increase the period during which rotation can not be started more than the minimum necessary period (4.1 seconds). . And, according to the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment, it can be prevented as much as possible that the period during which the game can not be advanced increases more than the predetermined time (4.1 seconds), and under the restriction by the minimum game time. However, it is possible to secure as many game times as possible.
<< Management mode at the time of unrecoverable error >>

  Next, a management mode of the minimum game time when a return impossible error (return impossible abnormality) occurs will be described based on FIG. 51 (A). The same portions as in the case of the recoverable error shown in FIG. 50 (B) are illustrated in the same manner, and the description will not be repeated.

  In FIG. 51 (A), (a) to (f) are the same as at the time of the resettable error shown in FIG. Each chart of 51 L), 2nd time trunk (51C), and 3rd time trunk (51 R) is shown. Further, (g) in FIG. 51 (A) shows the state of the power supply, and the rising period of the chart shows that the power is ON.

  Furthermore, (h) in FIG. 51 (A) indicates the detection (occurrence) of the non-returnable error by the rising of the chart (timing T16). As described above, this non-returnable error is an error that can not be canceled unless the setting change device processing (see FIG. 13) is performed. For this reason, when a return impossible error occurs, the game clerk or the like temporarily turns off the power of the slot machine 10 to clear the error (timing T17), and then turns on the setting key switch 68 (see FIG. 4). In this state, the power is turned on again to start up (timing T18), and it is necessary to operate the setting changer (timing T19).

  Such non-recoverable errors include E1 error, E5 error, E6 error, and E7 error as described above. Among these, the E1 error is an error when the power failure recovery can not be normally performed, and the E5 error is an error when the combination display of the symbols at the time of full stop is abnormal. Details of this E5 error will be described later. Furthermore, the E6 error is an error when the set value is out of range, and the E7 error is an abnormal frequency of the clock input to the RCK terminal (not shown) for updating the random number in the main CPU 81, or an internal random number (16 bits) This is an error when an update status abnormality of a random number is detected.

  The E5 error among the above-mentioned various non-returnable errors is determined as a result of the display determination in the display determination (S66) in the above-mentioned main game progress processing (see FIG. 14), as a result of combination display of symbols being abnormal. Occur.

  Subsequently, a return impossible error process will be described based on FIG. In the non-returnable error process shown in FIG. 29, interrupts are prohibited (S411), and error display data is set in the order of the lower digit and the upper digit of the error display (S412, S413). Further, the clear output port address and the number of output ports are set (S414), the output port (0 to 6 here) is turned off (S415), and the next output port address is set (S416).

  Then, the output end is judged (S 417), and if all the output for the output port (0 to 6) is finished (S 417: YES), the error display process (S 418) to the output ports 3 and 4 Output for error display. Then, switching is performed between the upper digit and the lower digit (S419), and the process returns to the above-mentioned setting process of the clear output port address and the number of output ports (S414).

  On the other hand, in the above-described output end determination process (S417), if the output is not completed (S417: NO), the process returns to the output port OFF process (S415). Then, the processing of the output port OFF (S415) and the setting of the next output port address (S416) is repeated until all the output for the output port (0 to 6) is completed. Furthermore, after all the outputs for the output ports (0 to 6) are finished (S417: YES), the process proceeds to the above-mentioned error display process (S418).

  By the detection (occurrence) of the non-returnable error as described above taking the E5 error as an example, as shown by the rising edge of the chart in (i) of FIG. 51A, an abnormal state occurs (timing T16). Then, for example, the game arcade clerk temporarily turns off the power switch 72 (see FIG. 4) (timing T17) in order to operate the setting change device and cancel the return impossible error (timing T17) as described above. With the setting key turned ON, the power switch 72 is turned ON to turn on the power (timing T18). Then, as shown by the rising edge of the chart in (j) in the figure (timing T19), the setting change device operates and the abnormal state due to the non-return error is resolved (at timing T19).

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, in the situation where the return impossible error has occurred, as shown in (a) of FIG. 51 (A), the measurement of the time related to the minimum game time is stopped (timing T16).

  When the error is canceled as shown in (j) in FIG. 51 (A) (timing T19), as shown in (b) in the drawing, the rotation of the rotating drum can be started (timing T2). . Furthermore, thereafter, as shown in (c) in the figure, if there is a lever operation (timing T6), as described above, the first torso (51L) and the second torso (51C) pertaining to the N + 1st game. The rotation of the third torso (51R) is started, and measurement of the time related to the minimum game time is started as shown in (a) of the figure (timing T3).

  The management mode at the time of this unrecoverable error can also be described as follows. That is, while the game is stopped due to the return impossible error, the measurement (counting) of the time related to the minimum game time is stopped. The non-returnable error is an abnormality that can not be canceled unless the setting change device processing (see FIG. 13) is started as described above. Then, when the setting change device processing is performed, the internal numerical values and flags handled by the main CPU 81 are cleared. Therefore, the numerical value of the count accompanying the time measurement is also cleared. That is, since the value etc. of the counter set before that is cleared when the non-returnable error is canceled, the wait period does not occur when the start lever 25 is operated after the non-returnable error is released. The reel will start to rotate.

According to the management mode at the time of the return impossible error as described above, when the return impossible error occurs, it is possible to reduce the load on the program processing by stopping the measurement of the time related to the minimum game time. become. That is, since the non-returnable error is an error that can not be canceled unless the installation change device is operated (initialization operation), there is no measure for error cancellation except for this initialization operation. For this reason, if the measurement of the time related to the minimum game time is continued when the return impossible error occurs, the program processing for continuing the measurement is wasted. Therefore, as described above, by stopping the measurement of the time relating to the minimum game time when the return impossible error occurs, it is possible to prevent the useless program processing from being executed, and the processing load can be reduced. Become.
<< Management mode at the time of game medal settlement >>

  Next, a management mode of the minimum game time in the case of clearing the game medals will be described based on FIG. 51 (B). The same parts as those in the case of the recoverable error shown in FIG. 51B are illustrated in the same manner, and the description will not be repeated.

  In FIG. 51 (B), (a) to (g) are the same as at the time of the recoverable error shown in FIG. 51 L), 2nd time trunk (51C), 3rd time trunk (51 R), and each chart of display determination are shown. Also, (h) in FIG. 51 (B) shows the state of medal clearing, and the gaming medals are being settled by the period of the rising of the chart (period after timing T26). Represents

  Such clearing of game medals is based on the above-mentioned game medal clearing process (see FIG. 28), and processing of game medal management (S56 in FIG. 14 and FIG. 26) according to the game progress main process (see FIG. 14). This is executed when the checkout button is ON (see S325 in FIG. 26). Then, in the game medal clearing process (see FIG. 28), as described above, it is determined whether or not it is a re-game (S371, S372), and according to the determination result, the game bet (betted) is made The process based on (S373-S380 etc.) and the process (S 383-S390 etc) based on the stored game medal are executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, even during the period from the end of the game to the time before the lever operation at the start of the next game is performed, the above-described clearing of the game medals is possible by the operation of the clearing button. And, this settlement of game medals is an operation that is possible even during the minimum game time.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, even in the situation where the game medals are cleared in this way, as shown in (a) of FIG. 51 (B), the measurement of the time related to the minimum game time is continued. . Then, when 4.1 seconds have elapsed since the measurement of the time relating to the minimum game time has been started, the measurement of the time relating to the minimum game time is stopped, and as shown in (b) in the figure, next time (N + 1) It is possible to start the rotational rotation of the second time) (timing T2).

  In addition, if the start timing (T26) of the settlement of the game medals is a situation in which the bet game medals or the stored game medals exist, the game is performed between the Nth and (N + 1) th games. It can occur at various timings based on the will of the person.

  The management mode at the time of game medal settlement can also be described as follows. That is, while the game is stopped due to the game medal settlement, the measurement (counting) of the time related to the minimum game time is continued. Then, in the Nth game, a period in which the game is performed prior to the game medal settlement (a period from the start of the game to the start of the game medal settlement) and a period in which the game medals are settled (game medal settlement If the total of the duration of) exceeds the minimum game time (4.1 seconds), the torso rotation in the (N + 1) th game can start without a weight period. On the other hand, if the sum of the period during which the game is completed before the game medal settlement and the period during which the game medal settlement is performed falls below the minimum game time (4.1 seconds), the number of times in the N + 1st game The torso rotation can be initiated after the weight period.

According to the management mode at the time of game medal settlement as described above, by continuing the measurement of the time related to the minimum game time, as in the case of the above-mentioned returnable error (see FIG. 50 (B)), Game machine control can be performed without disturbing the passage of the minimum game time as much as possible. Furthermore, regardless of the gaming state, it is possible to count the time related to the minimum gaming time. And, it becomes possible to advance the game smoothly, and it is possible to secure the maximum number of games per predetermined time (for example, the game time by one player, the business hours of the game arcade for one day, etc.) Become.
<< Management mode at the time of game medal insertion >>

  Next, a management aspect of the minimum game time when the game medals are inserted will be described based on FIG. 52 (A). Incidentally, at the time of a recoverable error shown in FIG. 50 (B), the same portions as those at the time of game medal settlement shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 52 (A), (a) to (g) are the minimum game time timer, the same as at the time of returnable error shown in FIG. 50 (B) and at the time of game medal settlement shown in FIG. 51 (B). The chart of a drum rotation startable, an operation lever, the 1st time trunk (51L), the 2nd time trunk (51C), the 3rd time trunk (51R), and display judgment is shown. Also, (h) in FIG. 52 (A) shows the state of medal insertion, and the game medal is inserted according to the rising period of the chart (period from timing T5 to T6). Represents that.

  In addition, in the "insertion of medals" mentioned here, allowing game medals to be entered into the game medal insertion slot 21, betting (setting) a game medal that has been stored (credited) by operating various bet buttons (bet). And, it is included that automatic insertion (automatic bet) is performed when the result of the winning combination in the previous game (previous game) is replay.

  When such game medals are inserted, as described above, it is determined that game medals have been inserted as a result of the check (S54) related to the presence or absence of the game medals in the game progress main process (see FIG. 14). (S54: YES), the process proceeds to the above-mentioned game medal management process (see S56 and FIG. 26). Then, in the game medal clearing process (see FIG. 28), as described above, it is determined whether or not it is a re-game (S371, S372), and according to the determination result, the game bet (betted) is made The process based on (S373-S380 etc.) and the process (S 383-S390 etc) based on the stored game medal are executed.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the game medals can be inserted as described above even during a period (wait period) from the end of the game due to the spinning stop until the lever operation at the start of the next game is started. . That is, even during the weight period, the next game is started by inserting medals from the game medal insertion slot 21 (see FIG. 1) or operating the three-sheet insertion button or one-sheet insertion button in the main input unit 26 described above. Bets (setting of bets) can be executed. In addition, it is possible to execute automatic insertion when the winning result in the previous game is a re-game.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, even in the situation where game medals are inserted in this way, as shown in (a) of FIG. 52 (A), measurement of the time related to the minimum game time is continued. There is. Then, when 4.1 seconds have elapsed since the measurement of the time relating to the minimum game time has been started, the measurement of the time relating to the minimum game time is stopped, and as shown in (b) in the figure, next time (N + 1) It is possible to start the rotational rotation of the second time) (timing T2).

  In addition, although illustration is performed here as what starts insertion of a game medal simultaneously with the standup (timing T5) of the chart of the display determination in the Nth game (timing T5), it is limited to this Instead, the game medals are inserted at various timings based on the player's intention to play the N + 1st game after the stop (timing T5) of all turns (51L to 51R) in the Nth game. Can be done at

  The management mode at the time of the game medal insertion can also be described as follows. That is, while the game is stopped by inserting the game medal, the measurement (counting) of the time related to the minimum game time is continued. Then, in the Nth game, a period in which the game is performed before the game medal is inserted (period from the start of the game to the start of game medal insertion) and a period in which the game medal is inserted (game medal inserted) The (N + 1) th game can be started without a weight period if the total of the durations of) exceeds the minimum game time (4.1 seconds). On the other hand, if the total of the period in which the game is performed before the game medal is inserted and the period in which the game medal is inserted is less than the minimum game time (4.1 seconds), the N + 1st game is It can start after the weight period.

According to the management mode at the time of game medal insertion as described above, in the case of the above-mentioned returnable error time (see FIG. 50 (B)), by continuing the measurement of the time related to the minimum game time, and As in the case of medal clearing (see FIG. 51B), game machine control can be performed without disturbing the passage of the minimum game time as much as possible. Furthermore, regardless of the gaming state, it is possible to count the time related to the minimum gaming time. And, it becomes possible to advance the game smoothly, and it is possible to secure the maximum number of games per predetermined time (for example, the game time by one player, the business hours of the game arcade for one day, etc.) Become.
<< Management mode at the time of setting value confirmation >>

  Next, a management mode of the minimum game time when confirmation of the set value is performed will be described based on FIG. 52 (B). The same parts as those in the case of the recoverable error shown in FIG. 50B and the part of the non-restoreable error shown in FIG. 51A are shown in the same manner, and the description thereof will be omitted as appropriate.

  In FIG. 52 (B), (a) to (g) are the same as at the time of the returnable error shown in FIG. 51 L), 2nd time trunk (51C), 3rd time trunk (51 R), and each chart of display determination are shown. Further, (h) in FIG. 52 (B) shows the state of setting value confirmation, and indicates that the setting value is confirmed by the rising of the chart (timing T31).

  In the confirmation of the setting value shown by (h) in FIG. 52 (B), the presence or absence of a game medal is checked in the above-mentioned game progress main process (see FIG. 14) (S54) The process can be shifted to the process (S55) (S54: NO), and can be performed when the set value can be confirmed. In addition, in the state where confirmation of the set value is possible, the progress of the game (see S56 or later) is possible.

  Further, as described above, the setting value is checked by operating the setting key so that the setting key switch 68 is turned on in a state where the slot machine 10 is turned on, and the setting change device is activated. It will be. Then, to confirm the setting value, the setting value (one of “1” to “6” here) is displayed on the setting display LED 66 (see FIG. 4) mounted on the main control board 61 (see FIG. 4) It is possible for the game clerk or the like to visually recognize the displayed set value through the transparent main substrate case 65. In the set value checkable state where the set value can be confirmed as described above, the set value does not change even if the setting / reset button 69 is operated.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, as shown in (a) of FIG. 52 (B), measurement of the time relating to the minimum game time is continued even in the situation where setting value confirmation is performed in this manner. Then, when 4.1 seconds have elapsed since the measurement of the time relating to the minimum game time has been started, the measurement of the time relating to the minimum game time is stopped, and as shown in (b) in the figure, the next time ) Can be started (timing T2).

  The management mode at the time of the setting value confirmation can also be described as follows. That is, while the game is stopped due to the setting value confirmation, the measurement (counting) of the time related to the minimum game time is continued. Then, in the Nth game, a period when the game before the setting value check is performed (a period from the start of the game to the start of the setting value check) and an operator such as a game clerk perform the setting value check If the total of the active time periods (the duration of the setting value check) exceeds the minimum game time (4.1 seconds), the (N + 1) th game can start to rotate the trunk without a weight period. On the other hand, if the sum of the period in which the game before the setting value check is performed and the period in which the setting value check is performed falls below the minimum game time (4.1 seconds), the N + 1st game is After the weight period, it can start to rotate the drum.

According to the management mode at the time of setting value confirmation as described above, by continuing the measurement of the time related to the minimum game time, at the time of the above described returnable error (see FIG. 50 (B)), at the time of medal settlement As in the case of 51 (B) and at the time of medal insertion (see FIG. 52A), game machine control can be performed without disturbing the passage of the minimum game time as much as possible. Furthermore, regardless of the state of the gaming machine (here, the slot machine 10) or the gaming state, it is possible to count the time related to the minimum gaming time. And, it becomes possible to advance the game smoothly, and it is possible to secure the maximum number of games per predetermined time (for example, the game time by one player, the business hours of the game arcade for one day, etc.) Become.
<< Processing mode during measurement of time related to minimum game time >>

  Next, another aspect of the minimum game time management in the slot machine 10 of this embodiment will be described. First, in the present embodiment, processing not related to the minimum game time is not performed between the determination of the passage of time relating to the minimum game time after the start of the next game and the processing of the minimum game time set. .

  That is, for example, if the normal time shown in FIG. 50A is used as an example, in the Nth game as described above, the measurement result of the time related to the minimum game time set at the start of the turning rotation is the timing Starting from T1 and until timing T2 when the measured value becomes 0, the torso rotation related to the (N + 1) -th game is not ready to be started. And, until the measurement result of the time related to the minimum game time becomes 0 or less, the check (whether or not the minimum game time has elapsed) whether the measurement result of the time related to the minimum game time becomes 0 or less The process of determination related to the progress check loops.

  As described above, loop processing relating to such a lapse check of the minimum game time can be performed during the above-described turning drum rotation start standby process used in the game progress main process (see FIG. 14). Further, the process of checking the passage of time relating to the minimum game time loops until the measurement result becomes 0 or less, and when the measurement result becomes 0 or less, the loop of the processing relating to the passage check ends (S 521). Then, in the present embodiment, other processes are not executed from when the process related to the progress check is started until the measurement result becomes 0 or less and the loop is ended.

  Then, if it is determined that the measurement result has become 0 or less by the process related to the minimum game time lapse check, the value of the minimum game time for the (N + 1) th game (next game) is as described above. During the process of turning on the drum rotation start in the game progress main process (see FIG. 14), it is set in the area of the minimum gaming time timer in the RWM (S522), and it becomes possible to start the rotation of the drum. Furthermore, when the minimum game time set here has elapsed, it is possible to start the turning rotation in the (N + 2) th game.

  Here, in the above-mentioned "after the start of the next game" in the management aspect related to this minimum game time, more specifically, in the game progress main processing (refer to FIG. 14) related to the N + 1st game, It can be said that it is after the start (S51). Furthermore, it can be said that the above-mentioned "minimum game time lapse determination" is to check the progress of the time relating to the minimum game time while repeating loop processing after the start of turning rotation during the N + 1st game. . Further, it can be said that the above-mentioned “processing of minimum game time set” is processing of setting the value of the minimum game time to RWM at the start of the (N + 2) th turning drum rotation.

  In addition, when considering the Nth game as a starting point, in the game progress main processing (refer to FIG. 14) relating to the Nth game, these relationships are the minimum game after the rotation of the torso is started (S51) A process not related to the minimum game time until the time is set, the minimum game time is checked by loop processing, and the value of the minimum game time is set to RWM at the start of the (N + 1) th rotation of the body It can also be said that it is something that was not made.

  In addition, even during the measurement of the minimum game time as described above, it is conceivable that a power failure will occur, but the power-off processing related to the power failure in this case is "processing not related to the minimum gaming time". May not apply.

According to such a management mode of the minimum game time, it is possible to measure the time related to the minimum game time without interruption as much as possible. And, by the uninterrupted measurement, it is possible to count the time related to the minimum game time accurately and quickly. And this also prevents, as much as possible, the period during which the game can not progress from increasing beyond a predetermined time (4.1 seconds), and as much as possible even under the restriction by the minimum game time The number of games played can be secured.
<< Management mode related to the relationship with the test signal output >>

  Next, a management mode of the minimum game time according to the relationship with the above-mentioned test signal output will be described. In this embodiment, in the error management process (see FIG. 20) related to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18), the test signal output process (S762) is executed, and the test signal output process is executed every timer interrupt process. . Furthermore, as described above, in the test signal output process (S762), a process of outputting a test signal to a predetermined output port is performed.

  Also, although the output of the test signal is performed using one or more pulses, the first output timing of the pulse representing the output content is determined based on the measurement result of the test signal output timer that measures the timing of the test signal output. Be done. Then, each time the measurement result of the test signal output timer reaches a predetermined time (here, 4.1 seconds or more), the output of the test signal is started. Here, the contents of the test signal include one represented by one pulse (single pulse) and one represented by a plurality of pulses (plural pulses), but the pulse output start timing is the pulse It will be the same regardless of the number.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the setting of the test signal output timer described above is performed immediately after the setting of the minimum game time timer described above. That is, in the present embodiment, as described above, the setting of the minimum game time timer is performed during the turning process of the main processing (see FIG. 14) in the game progress main process (see FIG. 14). Is executed without intervention of other processing as the next processing of the set of the minimum game time timer. Therefore, the relationship between the set of the minimum game time, the test signal output, the end of the minimum game time, and the next test signal output is always kept constant.

  Further, FIG. 53 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the measurement period of time relating to the minimum game time and the test signal output start timing. In FIG. 53, “measurement start” represents the timing of measurement start of the time related to the minimum game time, and “measurement end” in the figure is from “measurement start” of the time related to the minimum game time. It represents the timing of measurement when 1 second has elapsed. In addition, “test signal output start” in the drawing indicates the timing when the above-mentioned test signal output is started.

  Here, as described above, the test signal includes a plurality of pulses and a single pulse, and the timing of the test signal output termination differs depending on the circumstances such as the number of pulses, so in FIG. And a single pulse example, and the description of the test signal output stop timing is omitted.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the test signal output timer set is performed without intervention of other processes as a process following the set of the minimum game time timer. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 53, the start timing of the test signal output is immediately after the timing of the start of measurement of the time related to the minimum game time. Then, in the test phase, it is confirmed that the time interval between the start timing of the test signal output at one time and the start timing of the next test signal output is 4.1 seconds or more. It is possible to estimate that the minimum game time is secured.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the measurement start timing of the test signal output timer is generated via an interval of at least the minimum game time (4.1 seconds). Therefore, in the test phase where monitoring of the test signal is performed, the interval between the output start timing of the test signal output first and the output start timing of the test signal output thereafter (test signal output start interval) If you can monitor and confirm that the interval between the start of the test signal output before and after is secured for 4.1 seconds or more, the minimum game time of 4.1 seconds is indirectly secured by that. Can confirm that
<< Management mode related to the relationship with the power failure judgment >>

  Next, the management aspect of the minimum game time according to the relationship with the above-mentioned power-off process (S543 in FIG. 18, see FIG. 19) will be described. In the present embodiment, as described above, the power failure determination is performed by the power failure process (S543) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18) by the determination of the presence / absence of the power failure detection signal (S561 in FIG. 19). As described above, when the power-off detection signal is detected (S561: YES) in the determination (S561) of the presence / absence of the power-off detection signal, the subsequent processes (see FIG. 19) are executed.

  If the power-off detection signal is not detected (S561: NO), the power-off process is ended, and the process of updating the interrupt counter value (S544 in FIG. 18) is executed. In this interrupt counter value update process (S 544), the timer interrupt is performed by updating the value of the predetermined range (here, “0” to “255”) by “1” at each timer interrupt process. It is possible to confirm that it occurred. Thereafter, as described above, the process of timer measurement (S551) is performed according to the measurement of the time related to the minimum game time.

That is, in this embodiment, the timer measurement process (S551) is executed as a process after the power-off process (S543) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18) as in the power-down process (S543). Then, the power failure determination is performed before the subtraction of the minimum game time timer. Therefore, it is possible to prevent that the time for which the timer interruption process is performed is not used for the game due to the power interruption generated after the subtraction of the minimum game time timer, and the minimum game time is assured only by the game time. Can be secured. Note that the counting mode of the timer is not limited to performing subtraction (counting down), and for example, addition (counting up) may be performed.
<< Relationship between game medal payout and weight period >>

  Next, the relationship between the payout of gaming medals and the weight period will be described. First, in the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment, the display determination is performed at the end of the game (S66 in FIG. 14), and the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined combination to be the target of payout of gaming medals (with payout) is stopped. If it is displayed, the payout of the number of game medals corresponding to the payout is executed (S67). Then, these processes are performed even during the wait period. For this reason, even if the start lever 25 is operated after the bet setting and the rotation of the drums 51L to 51R is not started, the game medal may be paid out.

The present invention is not limited to the embodiments described above, and various modifications are possible. For example, at the normal time or returnable error shown in FIGS. 50 (A) and 50 (B), at the time of game medal settlement shown in FIG. 51 (B), and at the game medals insertion shown in FIGS. Not only at the time of value confirmation but also in other situations, the measurement of the time related to the minimum game time may be continued without stopping.
<Correspondence to non-regular operation in setting change work>

Next, during the setting change using the setting unit 62 (see FIG. 4) described above, a non-regular operation (a non-regular operation) is performed, and a situation such as a power interruption (power interruption) or an error occurs. The response to the occurrence will be described. In the following, first, the procedure of the normal setting change in the slot machine 10 of this embodiment and the processing mode of the data of the setting value (setting value data) will be described, and thereafter, the non-normal operation related to the setting change A specific example of the above and various correspondence patterns in the case where an interruption or an error occurs during setting change due to a non-normal operation will be described.
<< Procedures for changing the regular settings >>

  In the slot machine 10 of this embodiment, the normal operation for changing the setting for the setting unit 62 (see FIG. 4) is performed as follows. First, for example, a game arcade clerk or the like opens the front door portion 11 of the slot machine 10 in the power-off state (see FIGS. 1 and 2). When the front door 11 is opened, as described above, a predetermined key is inserted into the lock portion 23 (see FIG. 1) of the front door 11 locked in the closed state, and the key is released in the unlocking direction. Rotate (for example, counterclockwise).

  Further, the setting door provided in the setting unit 62 shown in FIG. 4 is opened, and although not shown, it is possible to access the setting key cylinder into which the setting key is inserted. Further, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder, and the setting key is turned (ON) in the ON direction (for example, clockwise direction). Then, the power switch 72 described above is turned on to supply power to the slot machine 10.

  When the power is turned on, both the front door portion 11 and the setting door (not shown) are in the open state, so the above-described door switch 60 and the setting door switch 67 are both turned on. Further, since the setting key is rotated in the ON direction, the setting key switch 68 is also turned ON. The door switch 60, the setting door switch 67, and the setting key switch 68 constitute the designation switch (see S9 in FIG. 12) as described above. Therefore, in the process (S9) of determining whether the designated switch is ON in the process (see FIG. 12) when the power is turned on, an affirmative determination is performed (S9: YES).

  Then, if an affirmative determination is made in the above-described determination process (S9), the other conditions are satisfied, and thus the operation change state in which the setting change device process (see FIG. 13) can be performed is achieved. In this embodiment, such a state is referred to as being in the state of "setting change device operation". In the present embodiment, the "other conditions" that enable the execution of the setting change device processing described above are that the power failure recovery data is abnormal (S10: YES), or the setting change impossible flag is ON. It is not (S11: NO).

  Further, as described above, when power is supplied to the slot machine 10, the setting value is displayed on the setting display LED 66 mounted on the main control board 61 (see FIG. 4). For the setting display LED 66, a so-called 7-segment display is used. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, any one of setting values (here, six of “1” to “6”) which are integer values in a predetermined range is displayed on the setting display LED 66, and the displayed setting is displayed. The value becomes visible through the transparent main substrate case 65.

  Here, the setting value displayed on the setting display LED 66 at the time of setting change is a setting value determined at the time of the most recent power-off after passing through the regular setting changing operation. Also, as described above for the setting change device process (see FIG. 13), at the start of setting change, the set value data indicates values within the normal predetermined range (here, “1” to “6”). If not (S29: NO), the displayed set value is "1" which is the lowest for the player.

  When the setting / resetting button 69 (see FIG. 4) is pressed and operated in the setting change apparatus operation state as described above, the display of the setting value changes. In the present embodiment, each time the setting / reset button 69 is pressed, the display of the setting value is incremented by one step. For example, when the power of the slot machine 10 is activated at setting 1 (setting value is 1) and the setting / reset button 69 is operated once, setting 2 is obtained. After that, each time the setting / reset button 69 is pressed, the display of the setting values changes in ascending order such as “2”, “3”,.

  Further, when the setting / reset button 69 is operated once with the setting value 6 being the highest setting value, the setting 1 being the lowest setting value is obtained. Then, with the value displayed on the setting display LED 66 being the setting value to be selected, the game clerk or the like operates the above-mentioned start lever 25 (see FIG. 1) to start the start switch (not shown). The setting value is fixed by turning it on.

  In addition, the mode of the change which concerns on the display of a setting value at the time of pushing the setting / reset button 69 as mentioned above is not limited to what the display of a setting value increments one step at a time, For example, the display of a setting value May be decremented one step at a time and change in descending order. Furthermore, the range of setting values that can be changed by the setting change device process (see FIG. 13) is not limited to six steps of “1” to “6”, for example, four steps of “1” to “4”. May be

  Subsequently, the setting key is turned in the OFF direction (for example, counterclockwise direction), the setting door provided in the setting unit 62 is closed, and the operation of the normal setting change is completed, and the game is possible. State (normal state).

  Further, in the present embodiment, the situation after the operation of the setting / reset button 69 becomes effective after the situation of the “setting change device operation” described above is “the setting change is possible”. It is called. The “set value changeable” is a state where change (selection) of the set value is possible by the operation of the setting / reset button 69.

  Further, in the present embodiment, after “setting value changeable”, the state in which the setting value is determined by the operation (lever operation) of the start lever 25 is referred to as the “setting value determination” state. Then, when the setting value is changed, the setting / reset button 69 is operated as described above in the “setting value changing possible”, and the start lever 25 is operated in a state where the target setting value is reached. Will be in the state of "set value finalization". And in the situation of "setting value decision", even if it operates setting / reset button 69, the display of setting value does not change.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a state waiting for the setting key to be turned off after the above-described “setting value determination” is referred to as a “setting value determination waiting” state. Even in the “wait for setting value determination” state, it is impossible to change the setting value by operating the setting / reset button 69. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to divide the state in the setting change operation (the state related to the setting change in the setting unit 62) into the first state and the second state. When the power is turned on with the setting key turned ON, the state shifts to the first state, and when the start lever 25 is operated thereafter, the first state shifts to the second state. Furthermore, when the setting key is turned off in this second state, the second state is ended.

  As the display mode of the set value in the situation of "set value change is possible", "set value decision", "wait for set value determination", etc., one to be lit, one to repeat blinking, or one of the set values An example can be exemplified in which dots are displayed on the side (in the vicinity of the lower right). Then, the display mode of the setting value in each situation can be made different from the display mode of the settings in other situations so that it can be distinguished.

  Moreover, it is possible to perform display other than the number showing a setting value as a display mode of the setting value after "setting value decision". Furthermore, as a display other than a number representing a setting value, an integer value (for example, “0”) outside the range of settable values, a predetermined character other than a number, a figure, a symbol, and the like can be illustrated. Furthermore, after the start of the operation of the setting / reset button 69, the display mode is also adopted in which the display of the same numbers, characters, figures, symbols, etc. other than the numbers indicating setting values is continued regardless of how many selection operations are performed. It is possible. In addition, it is also possible to adopt a display mode in which a number or the like other than the number indicating the setting value is made different each time the setting / reset button 69 is operated.

After that, in the above-mentioned “setting value determination waiting” state, the setting key is turned in the OFF direction (for example, counterclockwise direction) and turned back (OFF operation), whereby the operation of the change device is completed. It becomes the condition (It may be called a "normal state", a "normal game state", etc.) which can start a game. In this "normal state", the state where the setting change is performed has already been completed, and the display of the set value in the setting display LED 66 and the display indicating that the setting change is in progress are not performed. ing.
<< Processing mode of data related to setting change >>

  Next, processing modes of setting value data and other data when the setting change operation is performed will be described. First, setting value data immediately after the power is turned on is backed up when the power is turned off the last time, and becomes effective when the power is turned on. That is, when the power is turned off, the set value data at that time is stored in a predetermined area in the RWM area that is the target of data backup. Here, the RWM area to be backed up can be referred to, for example, as "power-off storage means" or "power-off storage area", and in particular, power-off in which setting value data is stored. The time storage area can be referred to as a "power-off storage area for setting value data".

  Then, at the time of subsequent power failure recovery (at the time of power failure recovery), the backed up setting value data is used as the setting value data related to the setting value (operation start value) at the time of operation start of the slot machine 10 A return is performed. The above-described operation start value is stored in a part of the storage area in the power-off storage area to be backed up. As described above, it is possible to call the power-off storage area for the setting value data that becomes the operation start value in the setting value data as the “operation start value storage area”.

  In addition, the display of the set value on the setting display LED 66 during the period from when the power is turned on until the first operation of the set / reset button 69 is performed (period before the start of setting value selection) The set value data stored in the start value storage area is referred to.

  Furthermore, after the setting / reset button 69 is operated to start selection of the setting value, setting value data relating to the selected setting value (selected setting value) is stored in a predetermined temporary storage unit of the main control board 61. It is stored in a storage area (a predetermined temporary storage area). Then, for the display of the setting value on the setting display LED 66 after the start of selection, the setting value data (setting value data relating to the selected setting value) stored in the predetermined temporary storage area is referred to.

  Here, as the above-mentioned "predetermined temporary storage means" and "predetermined temporary storage area", a predetermined area of RWM and a predetermined register can be exemplified. The “predetermined temporary storage unit” or the “predetermined temporary storage area” can be called, for example, a “set value temporary storage unit” or a “set value temporary storage area”.

  Further, as described above, when the setting value is displayed on the setting display LED 66 during the setting change operation, various processing modes relating to the reference of the setting value data can be adopted. First, as the first processing mode, an example in which the above-described set value temporary storage area is provided as an RWM area (here, referred to as “temporary storage RWM area”) for temporarily storing set value data can be exemplified. Then, the setting value data is directly read out from the temporary storage RWM area, and the numerical value indicated by the setting value data is displayed on the setting display LED 66.

  Furthermore, as a second processing mode related to the reference of setting value data, for example, both the register and the above-mentioned temporary storage RWM area are provided as the setting value temporary storage area, and the setting value of the temporary storage RWM area is stored in the register Later, it is possible to illustrate what displays the set value with reference to the register. In addition, as the third processing mode, even if a register serving as a temporary storage area is provided, as in the first mode described above, one that reads out setting value data directly from the temporary storage RWM area can be illustrated.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the first processing mode relating to the reference of the set value data described above is adopted. Moreover, it is possible to employ not only this but the above-mentioned 2nd processing aspect and the 3rd processing aspect, for example, when the 2nd processing aspect is adopted, the setting / reset button 69 is operated to set the setting value. The setting value data can be transferred from the temporary storage RWM area to the register each time selection is made, and the setting value can be displayed on the setting display LED 66.

  Further, in the present embodiment, data (setting key state data) indicating the state of the setting key can be mentioned as other data related to the setting change. As the setting key state data, a signal indicating the state of the setting key is monitored, and data acquired based on the monitoring result, data of a flag indicating the state of the setting key, and the like can be exemplified.

  Further, among these, as data acquired based on the monitoring result of the signal indicating the state of the setting key, the level (ON level or OFF level) of the signal is determined, and data acquired based on the level of this signal is exemplified. it can.

  Also, unlike this, an edge when the signal indicating the state of the setting key changes from OFF to ON is acquired as setting key state data indicating the change to ON, and the signal indicating the state of the setting key is It is conceivable to acquire an edge when changing from ON to OFF as setting key state data indicating a change to OFF.

  Furthermore, when the setting change work is finished, the setting value data (setting related to the selected value) held in the above-mentioned setting value temporary storage area is switched by switching the state of the setting key from ON to OFF as described above. Value data) is written to the above-mentioned power-off storage area which is the target of backup. In the present embodiment, the setting value data at the end of the setting change operation is stored in the operation start value storage area described above. Further, in the operation start value storage area before the setting value data at the end of the setting change work is written and overwritten, the setting value data at the start of the setting change work at that time is stored. Here, the data stored in the power-off storage area may be directly acquired from the power-off storage area at the time of power-off recovery thereafter, or may be temporarily stored in a predetermined storage area at power-off recovery. It may be stored and then acquired.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the power is turned on in a state where the setting key is turned on and the state is shifted to the above-described first state, set value data relating to the first of the setting change work is referred to as “first set value data”. It is possible to call setting value data concerning the setting value selected during the first state as "second setting value data". The set value data when the start lever 25 is operated to shift from the first state to the second state is referred to as "third set value data", and the first set value data and the second set value data described above are referred to. And can be distinguished. Then, when the non-regular operation as described later is performed, the above-described power from the first set value data to the third set value data at predetermined timing according to various corresponding patterns also described later. It is possible to store in the temporary storage area. Moreover, it is also possible to make 2nd setting value data or 3rd setting value data into setting value data concerning the first of setting change work according to various correspondence patterns.
<< Specific example of non-regular operation concerning setting change >>

  Next, the non-normal operation (non-normal operation) related to the setting change will be described. First, as a non-regular operation that can be performed during setting change, it is possible to exemplify turning off the power during setting change, inserting a game medal during setting change, and holding it. Then, processing relating to power interruption and processing relating to an error are performed due to these non-normal operations.

  Further, among these emergency situations, it is assumed that a game clerk or the like erroneously performs an interruption during setting change, or an intentional action by an unauthorized person. In addition to the above-described human operation, the power interruption may occur without human intervention, such as a power failure or an instantaneous blackout. Further, there are two types of power-off restoration (also called power-off restoration and power-supply restoration) by manual operation and automatic one by recovery of power supply after a power failure or a momentary power failure.

  In addition, as the occurrence timing of power interruption during setting change, the timing before or after the selection of the setting value by the operation of the setting / reset button 69, and after the start lever operation after the selection of the setting value (after the setting value determination The timing of) can be illustrated. Furthermore, when the power is turned on after the power interruption, it can be assumed that the power is turned on with the setting key turned on, or the power is turned on after the setting key is turned off.

In addition, more specifically, as the error during the setting change, the above-mentioned error (CP error, C0 error, C1 error, CH error, and CE error) relating to the insertion of the above-mentioned game medal, and payout of the skill medal Such errors (HE error, HP error, HQ error, and FE error) can be exemplified. In addition to this, communication errors between the main control board 61 and the sub control board 31, random number abnormality, and the like can be mentioned.
<< First response when interruption occurs (pattern 1 related to interruption when setting key is ON) >>

  Subsequently, various patterns will be described for the case where an emergency as described above occurs during the setting change operation. In the following, first, the first response when power failure occurs during setting change (hereinafter referred to as “pattern 1 related to power failure” or “pattern 1 related to power failure when setting key is on”), This will be described based on FIG. 54 (a). The pattern 1 related to the power interruption is to return the state of the set value to the state at the start of the setting change operation at the time of power failure recovery. Furthermore, in the pattern 1 related to power interruption, if the setting key is turned on, the setting value data at power failure recovery will be the same even if the situation at power interruption occurrence is different.

  Also, (a1) and (a2) in FIG. 54 (a) respectively show the pattern 1 related to power interruption in separate figures based on the difference in the situation at the time of power interruption occurrence. Of these, FIG. 54 (a1) shows a case where power interruption occurs in the state where there is no operation of setting value determination by the start lever operation (hereinafter referred to as “setting value not determined”), and FIG. ) Shows a case where power interruption occurs in a state where there is an operation of setting value determination by the start lever operation (hereinafter referred to as “setting value determined”). Further, the pattern 1 related to the power interruption is one adopted in the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment.

  Further, FIGS. 54 (a1) and 54 (a2) show various situations in the work of setting change from the upper stage to the lower stage according to the order of occurrence (see the "order" field and the "status" field). Further, in FIG. 54 (a1) and (a2), ON / OFF states of the setting key in each situation (orders 1 to 7) are shown in the “setting key” column, and “setting value” is shown. In the column of, set value data in each situation is shown. Further, the display contents of the setting display LED 66 in each situation are shown in the "set value display" column in the figure, and in the "stack content" column described at the right end in the figure, the respective display contents are displayed. In the situation, the return address (return data) stored in the stack pointer is indicated.

  When the setting change operation is performed, as shown at the top of the "Situation" column in FIG. 54 (a1), there is power on (order 1) of the slot machine 10; As shown in the column ", the state of the setting key at this time is ON. Further, in FIG. 54 (a1), the “set value” described as “a” is the set value at the time of the most recent power failure, and the “set value” is set according to the set value at the time of the power failure occurrence. It represents that the contents of "are different. That is, “power on” in order 1 is the power on performed after the power is turned off after the setting change work has been completed according to the normal procedure, and the “set value” at the time of power on is the previous one. It is a set value (one of “1” to “6”) backed up when the power is turned off.

  In addition, at this stage, the display contents of the setting display LED 66 shown in the “setting display” column are blank (blank) because, at this stage, only the normal power on related to the setting change has been turned on, and the display is still started. It represents that there is no. Furthermore, the fact that “stack content” is “n” indicates that return destination data that is not constant is stored in the stack pointer, depending on the situation at the time of the previous power failure.

  After such a power-on situation, the above-mentioned "setting change device operation" situation (order 2) is obtained. And in this "setting change device operation", as shown in FIG. 54 (a1), the status of "power on" (the order 1) in the "setting key", "setting value" and "content of stack" There is no change compared with). However, “setting display” which is the display content of the setting display LED 66 is “a” based on the setting value data.

  Subsequently, when the setting value change possible state is reached (order 3), the “setting key” remains ON, but when the setting / reset button 69 is operated, as shown in FIG. 54 (a1 As shown in), the "setting value" changes to a selected new value "b", unlike "a" up to that point. Further, "b" corresponding to "set value" is also set for "set display", and "n" remains for "content of stack".

  Then, in the case of “without setting value determination” shown in FIG. 54 (a1), when the “setting value changeable” is turned off (order 4), the setting value data of “setting value” is “b”. Although it remains, “stack content” is the return destination data in the immediately preceding “setting value changeable” status (order 3). That is, when a power failure occurs, the return address after power failure recovery is set (stored) in the stack pointer (see S568 in FIG. 19). Then, in the example of FIG. 54 (a1), return destination data relating to “setting change possible” is set in the stack pointer, but in the figure, “stack contents at power off” to indicate this. "" Is described as "order 3".

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 54 (a1), when the power is turned on while the setting key is ON (order 5), the “setting value” is set in the subsequent “setting change device operation” state (order 6) "" Returns to the same "a" as before the power failure occurred, and "setting display" also becomes "a". In addition, even in the situation (order 7) in which “setting value change is possible”, “setting value” and “setting display” remain “a”.

  In addition, for example, it is possible to cause the setting display LED 66 to start blinking display of the setting value in the state of “setting change device operation” in order 2. Then, in this case, after the “power on” of order 5 is performed and the setting change device is activated after the order 6 becomes, the power failure recovery is performed in a state where the setting display LED 66 blinks. Is possible.

  Next, the case of “setting value determined” shown in FIG. 54 (a2) will be described. In addition, description is suitably abbreviate | omitted about the part similar to the case without the above-mentioned setting value decision. In the case where the setting value is determined, after “setting value change possible” shown in order 3, “setting value determined” shown in order 4 is performed. At this time, there is no change in the "setting key", "setting value" and "setting display", and they are "ON", "b" and "b" as in "setting value change possible" in order 3 respectively. .

  Furthermore, as shown in order 5 in FIG. 54 (a2), the above-mentioned “wait for setting value determination” is set, but the “setting key”, “setting value”, and “setting display” also change at this time. There are no “ON”, “b” and “b” respectively. When the power is turned off in this state (order 6), there is no change in the "set key", the "set value" and the "set display". In addition, because a power interruption occurred before the "setting key" was turned off, it means that the setting change work in a normal procedure was not performed, so "b" which is the setting value data at this time is It is not stored in the above-described power-off storage area (here, the above-described operation start value storage area). Then, “a” remains stored as the setting value data in the power-off time storage area.

  Subsequently, when the power is turned on (order 7) and the status of "setting change device activated" (order 8), power interruption occurs before the "setting key" is turned off, and the selected setting value is selected. Since "b" is not stored in the power-off storage area and is not backed up, "set value" becomes "a" before the selection operation, and "set display" is also based on set value data. It becomes "a".

  That is, in the situation (order 5) of “wait for setting value decision” after “setting value decision” shown in FIG. 54 (a2), if power failure occurs while “setting key” is ON, “stack contents” The return address is not set, and the "stack content" remains empty. Then, when the power is turned on after that, the processing after that is performed with reference to the state of the setting key (which remains ON in this case) with reference to the state of the setting change device.

  Here, for example, when the setting display LED 66 starts blinking display of the setting value in the situation of “setting change device operation” of order 2, and the operation of “setting value confirmation” of order 4 is performed, the setting value blinks It is also possible to end the display and switch to the lighting display. And, in this case, when "power on" of order 7 is performed, and when it becomes "operation of setting change device" of order 8, turn off and restore power in the state where the setting display LED 66 blinks. Is possible.

  Further, in pattern 1 related to power interruption shown in FIG. 54 (a), in the case where the set value is not determined (see FIG. 54 (a1)) or in the case where the set value is determined (see FIG. 54 (a2)) Although illustration is omitted, when the setting key is turned off when the setting change operation is finished properly, the setting value data is backed up from the above-mentioned temporary storage area (for example, a register etc.) The data is transferred to a predetermined area of the storage area (here, an operation start value storage area).

  As described above, in the pattern 1 related to power interruption, after the selection of the setting value by the operation of the setting / reset button 69, the correspondence in the case of power interruption in a state where the setting key is not turned off is defined. Also, in pattern 1 related to power interruption, the data processing mode when power interruption occurs in the situation where the setting value has not been determined yet, and the data processing when power interruption occurs in the situation where the setting value is established An aspect is defined.

  Then, in the pattern 1 related to the power-off, after the setting value is selected, the setting selected in any of the case where the setting value is not determined and the setting value being determined unless the setting key is turned OFF. The value is not written in the power-off storage area, and power-off and recovery is performed without taking over the selected setting value. Then, in pattern 1 related to power interruption, power failure recovery is performed using setting value data (operation start value) in the state of “setting change device operation” before power interruption occurrence. Further, according to the pattern 1 related to the power failure, if the power failure occurs in the non-normal procedure during the setting change, the setting value data is not backed up.

  From these things, according to pattern 1 concerning power failure, when power failure occurs in the middle of the work of setting change, the work of setting change can be performed again from the state of the same set value data. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the setting value from being changed when the setting change operation is performed according to a non-regular procedure other than the regular procedure related to the setting change as described above. And when setting change is performed by procedures other than a regular procedure, it can prevent that an unexpected disadvantage arises by drawing the setting value data at the time of power failure return at the time of power failure return.

  Here, as a setting change operation in a procedure other than the normal procedure, for example, a setting value having a high degree of advantage is selected, and it is intentionally performed in the middle before the work in the normal procedure related to the setting change is finished. The form of fraudulent activity such as power cycling can be illustrated. And, even if there is such an illegal activity, according to the above-mentioned pattern 1 related to power interruption, it is possible to prevent the setting change from being performed illegally by returning to the power interruption without taking over the selected setting value. it can.

  In the pattern 1 related to power interruption, the setting value is selected by the setting / reset button 69 and the setting value is determined by the start lever 25. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of the combination of the above, the setting value may be selected by providing a dedicated setting button. Further, for example, the setting value determination may be performed using another existing button such as a button provided in the sub input unit 27 (see FIG. 1). Furthermore, a dedicated button for setting value determination may be provided, for example, in the setting unit 62 in the housing unit 12.

  Also, in pattern 1 related to power interruption described above, processing at power failure recovery is performed using data of “stack content” (eg, in the case where the set value shown in FIG. 54 (a1) is not determined), Not limited to this, it is also possible to perform processing at the time of power failure recovery without using data of "stack contents". Then, as a processing mode of performing processing at the time of power failure recovery without using data of “stack content”, a mode of state setting using a predetermined flag can be considered.

Furthermore, as a mode of state setting using the above-mentioned predetermined flag, for example, when the setting key is turned on and the power is turned on, the "setting change flag" is turned on, and the setting key is switched off while the power is on. Thus, the above-mentioned “setting change flag” is turned OFF, but it can be exemplified that the setting change flag remains ON even if the setting key is turned OFF during power-off. When such a state setting mode is adopted, the state after power failure recovery can be set with reference to the setting change flag, and if the setting change flag is ON, even if the setting key is OFF, Subsequent processing can be performed in the setting change state (the state in which the change of the setting value made in advance is effective).
<< 2nd correspondence at the time of a power failure occurrence (pattern 2 related to power failure when setting key is ON) >>

  Next, as another example of the correspondence pattern relating to the occurrence of a power failure, the second response (in the following, “pattern 2 relating to a power failure” or “power at the setting key ON”) "Pattern 2 related to disconnection" will be described based on FIG. 54 (b). The same portions as those of the pattern 1 (see FIG. 54 (a)) related to the above-mentioned electric disconnection are similarly illustrated, and the description of the overlapping portions will be appropriately omitted.

  In pattern 2 related to the power failure, when power failure occurs in the condition that the setting value is not determined in “setting value change possible”, the power failure recovery is performed as in pattern 1 related to the power failure described above. At the same time, return the state of the setting value to the state at the time of power interruption. However, when a power failure occurs under the condition that the setting value is determined to be "during change of setting value", unlike the pattern 1 related to the power failure described above, the state of the setting value is It becomes the state at the time of interruption occurrence.

  That is, (b1) in FIG. 54 (b) is a case where a power failure occurs in the state where there is no operation of setting value determination by the start lever operation, as in FIG. 54 (a1) of pattern 1 related to power failure. Correspondence is shown, and FIG. 54 (b 2) shows a case where a power failure occurs in the state where there is an operation of setting value determination by the start lever operation, as in FIG. 54 (a 2) of pattern 1 related to power failure. It shows the correspondence.

  Then, in the case where the setting value is not determined in the pattern 2 relating to power interruption, as shown in FIG. 54 (b1), the operation of selecting the setting value is performed in “setting value change possible” and the setting value “b Is selected and the power is turned off in a situation where the setting value is not determined (order 4), the setting value data of “set value” at this time is the selection operation as in the pattern 1 related to power interruption The latter value is "b". Furthermore, “stack content” is return destination data indicating the status (order 3) of “previous set value change possible”. However, the setting value data "b" at this time is still stored in the temporary storage area and is not stored in the storage area at power failure, and the setting value data of the storage area at power disconnection is the start of setting change work It has been left as "a" at the time.

  Furthermore, when the power is turned on while the setting key is ON (order 5), in the subsequent situation (order 6) of "setting change device operation", "set value" is the setting of the storage area at power failure Based on the value data, it returns to the same "a" as before the occurrence of power interruption, and "setting display" also becomes "a". Also, even in the condition (order 7) of “setting change device operation”, “set value” and “set display” remain “a”.

  On the other hand, in the case where there is a set value decision of pattern 2 relating to power interruption (refer to FIG. 54 (b2)), “set value decision” shown in order 4 after “set value change possible” shown in order 3 To be done. At this time, there is no change in the "setting key", "setting value" and "setting display", and they are "ON", "b" and "b" as in "setting value change possible" respectively. However, based on the fact that "setting value determination" has been performed, the setting value data "b" at this time is also stored in the storage area at power failure, and the setting value data of the storage area at power failure is the setting change work It becomes "b" selected after the start of.

  Furthermore, as shown in order 5 in the figure, the above-mentioned "wait for setting value determination" is set, but there is no change in "setting key", "setting value" and "setting display" at this time, respectively. It remains as "ON", "b" and "b". When power is turned off in this state (order 6), there is no change in the "set key", "set value" and "set display", but when the power is turned on thereafter (order 7) Unlike the pattern 1 (see FIG. 54 (a2)) related to disconnection, both the “set value” and the “set display” are “b”.

  That is, in pattern 2 related to the power interruption, when the setting value is determined by the start lever operation or the like, the setting value data held in the predetermined temporary storage area is the backup target at the time of power interruption. It is written in a predetermined area of the storage area (storage area at power-off for set value data). Then, the setting value data is backed up when a power failure occurs (order 6), and data is restored when power is turned on thereafter (order 7). Then, in the condition (order 8) of “setting change device operation”, “set value” and “set display” become “b” based on the restored set value data. Note that the power-off storage area for setting value data when the setting value determination operation is performed as described above can also be referred to as “power-off storage area for confirmation setting value data”. .

  According to the pattern 2 related to power interruption as described above, when the setting change operation is performed according to the non-normal procedure for generating the power interruption before the setting value is determined, the pattern 1 Similar to FIG. 54 (a), power failure recovery is performed without passing over the set value data. On the other hand, when the set value determination is performed, the set value data is handed over, and the power failure recovery is performed based on the set value data in the situation where the set value determination operation is performed.

  Therefore, when a power failure occurs in a situation where setting value determination has not been performed (see FIG. 54 (b1)), the same function and effect as the pattern 1 described above can be obtained. Unpredicted disadvantages can be prevented from occurring by subtracting setting value data at the time of interruption occurrence. In addition, if a power failure occurs in the situation where the setting value is determined (see (b2) in FIG. 54), the power failure occurs even if the remaining work such as setting key OFF related to the setting change is not completed. It is possible to end the setting change at a time, and the setting changing operation can be simplified as compared with, for example, the case where the setting value is not determined as shown in FIG. 54 (b1).

  That is, when the set value is not determined (refer to FIG. 54 (b1)), the set value changed before the power failure is not taken over after the power failure, so the setting change operation is often performed again after the power is turned on. As a result, the setting change operation may be complicated. However, as in the case where the setting value is determined as shown in FIG. 54 (b2), the setting value is taken over even if the setting change operation is not completed, so that the work until the setting value determination is performed after the power is turned on. It is possible to simplify the setting change work.

  In pattern 2 related to power interruption, although the setting value data is stored in the power-off time storage area when the setting value determination operation is performed, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, whether or not the setting value determination operation has been performed is represented by predetermined data (setting value determination data), and this setting value determination data is regarded as a backup target each time the setting value determination operation is performed. It is possible to store in a predetermined area (the power-off storage area for the setting value determination data) of the power-off-time storage area.

Furthermore, it is possible to provide an area (selected value storage area) for storing the set value data selected each time the setting value selection operation is performed as the power-off storage area for the set value data. Then, at the time of power failure recovery, it is determined whether or not set value determination data is stored, and if the set value determination data is not stored, the set values stored in the operation start value storage area as described above It is possible to employ processing such as performing power failure recovery using data and performing power failure recovery using the setting value data of the above-mentioned selected value storage area when the setting value determined data is stored. It is. In addition, the above-described set value determination data may be a set value determination flag.
<< Third correspondence when interruption occurs (pattern 3 related to interruption when setting key is ON) >>

  Next, as another example of the correspondence pattern relating to the occurrence of a power failure, the third correspondence (in the following, “pattern 3 relating to a power failure” or "Pattern 3 related to disconnection" will be described based on FIG. 54 (c). The same portions as those of the pattern 1 (see FIG. 54A) according to the above-mentioned electric disconnection are similarly illustrated, and the description of the overlapping portions is appropriately omitted.

  (C1) in FIG. 54 (c) shows the response when a power failure occurs in the state where there is no operation of setting value determination, and (c2) in FIG. 54 (c) is the setting value determination It shows the response when a power failure occurs while the operation has been performed. In pattern 3 relating to this power interruption, as shown in FIG. 54 (c1), when power interruption occurs in the state of “setting change possible” (order 4), when power is turned on (order 5), “setting” The "value" and "setting display" are "b". Then, in the subsequent “setting change device operation” and “setting value change possible”, “setting value” and “setting display” are maintained as “b”.

  That is, in pattern 3 relating to the power interruption, different from the various patterns described above, the setting value data is selected each time the setting value is selected, even in a situation where the setting value is not determined by the start lever operation or the like. Are written from the temporary storage area to the above-mentioned power-off storage area. Then, the setting value data is stored at the time of power interruption (order 4), and data is restored and referred to at the time of power on (order 5) thereafter.

  Furthermore, also in the status of “setting change device activated” (order 6) and in the status “setting value change possible” (order 7), “set value” and “setting display” are based on the restored set value data. It will be "b". Here, in the case where the set value is determined in the pattern 3 related to the power failure (see FIG. 54 (c2)), “the set value determined” in the pattern 2 related to the above-described power failure illustrated in FIG. The same as in the case of.

  According to the pattern 3 related to power interruption as described above, the setting value data is handed over both before and after the setting value is determined, and the power failure recovery is performed based on the setting value data. Therefore, it is possible to complete the setting change at the time of power interruption even if the remaining work such as setting key OFF related to the setting change is not completed regardless of the setting value confirmation. Then, the setting change operation can be further simplified as compared to the pattern 2 related to power interruption.

  Further, according to the pattern 3 related to the power interruption, the setting value data is written to the power-off storage area to be backed up every time the setting value is selected. It is unnecessary to store value data and transfer and write the setting value data to the RWM to be backed up when the setting value is determined. For this reason, a temporary storage area for temporarily storing setting value data in the storage area at the time of power interruption becomes unnecessary, and it becomes possible to reduce the memory capacity and the processing.

According to the pattern 3 related to the power interruption, the work of changing the setting value is completed without, for example, performing the work of setting value setting without stepping on the two-step procedure of setting value selection and setting value determination. Will be able to For this reason, it is possible to further reduce the burden on the person who performs the setting change work even in the procedure of the regular setting change work.
<< Fourth correspondence at the time of power interruption (pattern 1 concerning setting key OFF during power interruption) >>

  Next, based on FIGS. 55 (a) to 55 (d2), corresponding patterns in the case where the setting key is turned off while the power is turned off as another correspondence form in the case where the power is turned off during the setting change operation. explain. Then, in the following, first, regarding the fourth correspondence when power failure occurs during setting change (hereinafter referred to as “pattern 4 related to power failure” or “pattern 1 related to setting key OFF during power failure”), This will be described based on FIG. 55 (a). In addition, the same illustration is given about the same part as each above-mentioned corresponding pattern, and description of the overlapping part is abbreviate | omitted suitably.

  In pattern 4 relating to power disconnection shown in FIG. 55 (a) (pattern 1 relating to setting key OFF during power disconnection), the sequence from 1 to 4 corresponds to the above-described power disconnection shown in FIG. 54 (a1). It is the same as pattern 1 (pattern 1 related to power interruption when the setting key is on). Then, first, the slot machine 10 is powered on (order 1), and the state of the setting key at this time is ON, as shown in the "setting key" column on the right side of the figure. Furthermore, the “set value” and “stack content” at power-on are “a” and “n”, as in the pattern 1 related to power interruption (see FIG. 54 (a1)).

  After the above-mentioned power-on situation (order 1), it becomes the situation (order 2) of "setting change device operation". And there is no change in “setting key”, “setting value” and “content of stack” in comparison with the status of “power on” (order 1), but “setting display” which is the display content of setting display LED 66 Becomes “a” based on the setting value data.

  Subsequently, when the setting value change possible state is reached (order 3), the “setting key” remains ON, but when the setting / reset button 69 is operated, as shown in FIG. 54 (a1 As shown in), the "set value" changes to "b" different from the previous "a". In addition, "b" corresponding to "set value" is also set for "set display", and "n" remains for "content of stack".

  Then, when the power is turned off in the “set value change possible” status (the order 4), the set value data of the “set value” remains “b”, but the “set value change possible” operation is not performed. The content of the stack is data whose return destination is the immediately preceding “setting value changeable” status (order 3). Furthermore, when the setting key is turned off and the power is turned on in the state of the setting key turned off as shown in order 5 in FIG. 55 (a), the “set value” at this time is “b” after the selection operation. “Stack contents” returns to the data of the return destination address in the situation of order 3. Then, in the subsequent “setting change device operation” status (order 6), the setting key remains OFF, and “setting value” and “setting display” are order 3 “setting change device operation” Likewise, both are "b".

  That is, in the pattern 4 relating to the power interruption, even in a situation where the setting value is not determined, the setting value data of the “setting value” and the return destination of the “stack content” are selected each time the setting value is selected. Data is written to the aforementioned storage area upon power failure. Then, the setting value data and the return destination data are stored at the time of power interruption (order 4), and at the time of power on thereafter (order 5), determination processing of whether the setting key is OFF or not is executed. The setting value data and the return destination data are restored on condition that the setting key is OFF.

  In addition, even if the setting key is OFF when the power is turned on, it is possible to use, for example, return destination data of “stack contents” when the power is turned on in order to recognize that the setting change operation is in progress. Then, in this case, if the return destination data at the time of power-on indicates the process during the setting change operation, it is possible to set the state at the time of power failure recovery as the condition during the setting change operation. .

  In addition, in pattern 4 related to this power interruption, “setting value” and “setting display” also in the condition (order 6) of “operation of setting change device” and the condition (order 7) of “setting value change possible” Becomes “b” based on the restored setting value data. Here, even when the set value is determined, the set value data may be written to the above-mentioned power-off storage area.

  According to pattern 4 related to power interruption as described above (pattern 1 related to setting key OFF during power interruption), a power interruption occurs in “setting value change possible” and the setting key If it is OFF, the setting value data and the "stack content" are taken over, and the power failure recovery is performed in the state of "setting value changeable". Then, if the setting change operation is performed according to the non-regular procedure of turning off the power without fixing the set value and turning off the setting key while the power is off, the setting key is turned off. Regardless of this, the power failure recovery will be performed in the state of “setting value changeable”.

  That is, when the setting change work is performed in a normal procedure, the setting key is in the ON state if the setting value change is possible. However, when the above-described non-regular operation is performed, the normal operation is performed in which the “setting key” is OFF and “setting value change is possible”. Can create a situation that never happens.

  Therefore, it is possible to notify the person in charge of the hole that the setting change work has been performed according to the incorrect procedure by the difference in the situation from the time of the regular work. And, by providing such a function, it becomes easy to detect fraud. In addition, it is possible to exert a deterrent against fraudulent acts and to prevent unauthorized alteration of settings.

  Here, in other words, regarding the pattern 4 related to the above-mentioned power-off (pattern 1 related to the setting key OFF during power-off), the pattern is not changed in the setting procedure in the normal procedure. It can be said that it is what makes a trace remain. In addition, as another mode of processing for leaving such a trace, processing of detecting the combination of the state of the setting key and the situation under the setting change, and further determining the propriety of the detection result is executed, and the setting key is OFF. An error notification may be performed when a non-normal combination of situations is detected, such as the situation where “setting value change is possible”.

  The confirmation that the setting key is OFF may be performed by detecting a rising (or falling) edge when the signal indicating the state of the setting key changes from ON to OFF. Alternatively, it may be performed by detecting whether the level of the signal indicating the state of the setting key is ON or OFF.

Further, in the pattern 4 related to the power interruption, when the state of the setting key is ON even when the power is turned on, the pattern 2 related to the above-mentioned power interruption (see FIG. 54B) or It is possible to perform processing with the same pattern as the pattern 3 (see FIG. 54C).
<< 5th correspondence at the time of power interruption (pattern 2 concerning setting key OFF during power interruption) >>

  Next, FIG. 55 (hereinafter referred to as “pattern 5 related to power failure” or “pattern 2 related to set key OFF during power failure”) corresponds to a fifth case where power failure occurs during setting change (FIG. 55) The explanation is based on b). The same portions as those of pattern 4 (pattern 1 related to setting key OFF during power off) described above shown in FIG. 55 (a) are similarly illustrated, and the description of the overlapping portions is appropriately omitted. Do.

  The pattern 5 concerning this power interruption assumes the case where setting value decision is performed to "during setting value change possible". That is, as shown in FIG. 55 (b), the order 1 to 3 is the same as the pattern 4 (see FIG. 55 (a)) related to the above-mentioned power interruption, but in the "set value changeable" When the setting value is selected and the setting value determination operation is performed (order 4), “setting value”, “setting display”, and “stack content” become “b”, “0”, and “n”, respectively. Here, that “setting display” is “0” indicates that the setting value is determined by the setting value determination operation, for the purpose of the description of the following situation.

  Then, in the "wait for setting value determination" waiting for the setting key to be turned off (order 5), "setting value", "setting display", and "stack content" are the same as before "b" and "0" , “N”, but if a power failure occurs (order 6), “stack content” becomes the return destination data in the “setting value determination wait” status (order 5).

  Further, when the setting key is turned off and the power is turned on in the state of the setting key turned off as shown in order 7 in FIG. 55 (b), the “set value” at this time is “after the above selection b ", and" stack content "returns data indicating the return destination address in the situation of order 5. Then, in the subsequent “setting value determination wait” status (order 8), the setting key remains OFF, and “setting value” and “setting display” are order 5 “setting change device operation” Likewise, "b" and "0" are obtained.

  In pattern 5 (pattern 2 related to setting key OFF during power off), a power failure occurs in the “wait for setting value determination” status after setting value determination (order 5), and the power supply thereafter If the setting key is turned OFF at the time of insertion (order 6), the setting value data and the "stack contents" are taken over, and the power failure recovery is performed in the state of "waiting for setting value determination". Then, if the setting change operation is performed in an irregular procedure of turning off the setting key without turning off the setting key and turning off the setting key during turning off, the setting key is turned off. Regardless of this, the power is restored in the state of “wait for setting value determination”.

  That is, when the setting change work is performed in the normal procedure, if the setting is “wait for setting value determination”, the setting key is in the ON state, but the work of the non-regular procedure as described above is When it is performed, as in the case of pattern 4 related to power interruption described above (pattern 1 related to setting key OFF during power interruption), a situation different from that in the case where a normal operation is performed can be generated. .

  Therefore, it is possible to notify the person in charge of the hole that the setting change work has been performed according to the incorrect procedure by the difference in the situation from the time of the regular work. And, by providing such a function, it is easy to find out fraud. In addition, it is possible to exert a deterrent against fraudulent acts and to prevent unauthorized alteration of settings.

  Here, in other words, the pattern 5 (the pattern 2 relating to the setting key being turned off) relating to the power interruption is the pattern 4 relating to the power interruption (the setting key during the power interruption). Similar to the pattern 1) related to OFF, it can be said that the trace is left when the setting change operation is not performed in the normal procedure. Further, similarly to pattern 4 related to power interruption (pattern 1 related to setting key OFF during power interruption), a non-regular combination of the state of the setting key and the status of “wait for setting value determination” is detected, An error notification may be performed based on the detection result.

The pattern 5 (pattern 2 related to the setting key being turned off during power interruption) according to the power interruption is applied to the slot machine 10 in combination with the pattern 4 (refer to FIG. 55A) related to the power interruption. It is possible. Further, in the pattern 5 relating to the power interruption, when the state of the setting key is also ON at the time of power on, the pattern 2 relating to the above-mentioned power interruption (see FIG. 54 (b)) or It is possible to perform processing with the same pattern as the pattern 3 (see FIG. 54C) according to the above.
<< Sixth correspondence at the time of power interruption (pattern 3 concerning setting key OFF during power interruption) >>

  Next, FIG. 55 (hereinafter referred to as “pattern 6 related to power failure” or “pattern 3 related to set key OFF during power failure”) corresponds to the sixth case where power failure occurs during setting change (FIG. 55) The explanation is based on c). The same portions as those of the pattern 5 (see FIG. 55 (b)) and the like according to the above-mentioned electric disconnection are similarly illustrated, and the description of the overlapping portions is appropriately omitted.

  In the pattern 6 relating to power disconnection shown in FIG. 55 (c), the setting value is “set value changeable” as in the pattern 5 relating to power disconnection (pattern 2 relating to setting key OFF during power disconnection) It is assumed that a decision is made. That is, as shown in FIG. 55 (c), the orders 1 to 6 are the same as FIG. 55 (b). Then, due to the power failure recovery, the status becomes “normal status” as shown in sequence 8. In the "normal state", the state of the setting key is OFF and the setting value data is "b", but nothing is displayed as "setting display".

  That is, in pattern 6 relating to this power interruption, if the setting key is ON at the time of power failure recovery, it is determined that the setting is being changed, and “stack content” is referred to and which state is the setting being changed back? Decide. On the other hand, when the setting key is OFF at the time of power failure recovery, it is determined that the normal state is set, and the normal state is set regardless of the "stack content". The above-mentioned "normal state" represents a state in which normal game is possible after the setting change work is completed. Then, in the “normal state”, “b”, which has been determined as the set value before the occurrence of power interruption, is used, and the state after power failure recovery differs according to the state of the setting key.

  Further, in the pattern 6 related to the power interruption, the setting value selection is performed in the “setting change possible” of the order 3 and the interruption occurs before the “setting value finalization” of the order 4 is performed. If the power is turned on with the setting key ON (if the setting change work in the normal procedure has not been completed), use the return destination data of the "stack contents" to make the setting for "3" in order It returns to the situation before setting value selection of "being changeable" is performed.

  According to pattern 6 related to power interruption as described above (pattern 3 related to setting key OFF during power interruption), power interruption occurs in the state of “setting value determination”, and the setting key If it is OFF, although the set value data is taken over, the "stack contents" are not taken over, and the power failure recovery is performed in the "normal state". Then, when the setting change work is performed in an irregular procedure of turning off the setting key without turning off the setting key and turning off the setting key while the power is off, the setting changing work has not been completed. In spite of that, it will be restored in the "normal state".

That is, the same state is obtained when the setting change work is completed in the normal procedure and when the work in the non-regular procedure as described above is performed. For this reason, even if the work according to the non-normal procedure is performed, if the setting value determination is performed according to the normal procedure, it does not shift to a special situation. Then, for example, when the game arcade clerk in the setting change work unintentionally mistaken the work procedure by mistake, the setting change work can be finished as it is, and the work procedure is simplified. Is possible.
<< Seventh correspondence at the time of power interruption (pattern 4 concerning setting key OFF during power interruption) >>

  Next, FIG. 55 (hereinafter referred to as “pattern 7 related to power failure” or “pattern 4 related to set key OFF during power failure”) corresponds to a seventh case where power failure occurs during setting change (FIG. 55) Description will be made based on d1) and (d2). The same portions as those of the patterns 4 to 6 according to the above-described electric disconnection shown in FIGS. 55 (a) to 55 (c) are similarly illustrated, and the description of the overlapping portions is appropriately omitted.

  In pattern 7 relating to this power interruption, as shown in FIG. 55 (d1), the status of “power on” (order 1) with “setting key” ON, the status of “setting change device operation” (Order 2), proceed with the condition (order 3) that "setting value change is possible", and then "power off" (order 4). Then, the setting key is turned off, and as shown in order 5 in FIG. 55 (d1), the power is turned on in the state where the setting key is turned off.

  Furthermore, with the “setting key change enabled” status (order 6) and the “setting value finalized” status (order 7) progressing with the “setting key” being off, “setting value changing enabled” In the situation (order 6), selection of a new setting value different from "b" is not performed. Then, in the status of “wait for setting value determination” (the order 8), the status of “setting key” continues to be OFF from the previous status, but the power is turned off again in the condition of “waiting for setting value determination” Occurs (order 9).

  Subsequently, the power is turned on again with the "setting key" turned off (order 10). The "set value" at this time is "b", and the return destination based on the "stack content" is "wait for set value determination" which is the situation of order 8 (order 11).

  On the other hand, FIG. 55 (d2) shows the corresponding pattern in the case where the setting value finalization operation is performed with the setting key ON, and the power is turned off thereafter. In the example of FIG. 55 (d2), the process is the same as that of FIG. 55 (d1) described above until “the setting value can be changed” in order 3. Thereafter, “setting value determination”, “setting value determination waiting” There is a "" (order 4 and order 5), and power failure occurs during "wait for setting value determination" (order 6). Then, by the subsequent power-on (order 7), the normal state is established (order 8) regardless of the "stack content" as in the case of the pattern 6 related to the power interruption described above.

  That is, in the pattern 7 relating to the power failure, when the power failure occurs after the “setting value determination”, the state after the power failure recovery differs depending on the state of the setting key. Then, as shown in FIG. 55 (d1), if a power interruption occurs with the setting key “OFF” (see FIG. 55 (d1)) and the state of the setting key at power on is “OFF”, The power is restored to the status of “waiting for setting value determination”. However, similarly, even if a power failure occurs after “setting value determination”, as shown in FIG. 55 (d2), a power failure occurs with the setting key “ON”, and the power is turned on. When the state of the setting key is OFF, the power is restored to the "normal state".

  As described above, it is possible to make the power failure recovery destination different according to a combination of situations before and after power failure (or power on) by executing the following processing. For example, first, data indicating whether or not setting value determination has been performed (the above-described setting value determination data), and data indicating the state of the setting key at the time of power interruption (setting key state data at the time of power interruption) A storage area for setting value determination data and a storage area for setting key status data of the power-off storage area to be backed up are stored respectively.

  Then, when the power is turned on after power interruption, the state of the setting key at that time is confirmed, and the setting value finalization data stored before power interruption, the setting key state data, and the setting key at power interruption recovery Refers to data indicating the status (setting key status data at power on).

  Furthermore, when the data of the current "setting key" is compared with the data of the "setting key" after data recovery and the setting key is switched from OFF to ON at the time of power failure and at the time of power on, Alternatively, if the setting key remains ON and does not change, it is determined that the setting key is ON. When the setting key is switched from ON to OFF, or when the setting key remains OFF, it is determined that the setting key is OFF.

  In the example shown in FIG. 55 (d1), in the case of the turn-off of order 4 and the turn-on of order 5, the setting key is switched from ON to OFF, and setting value determination is performed. Because there is no, the “set value” after power-on is “b” selected as “set value changeable” in order 3 and the status after power failure recovery is the same as order 3 according to “stack content” It becomes "during setting value change possible" (order 6).

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 55 (d1), in the case of the turn-off of order 9 and the case of the turn-on of order 10, setting value determination is performed unlike the case described above (order 7). However, since the state of the setting key before and after power-off (or power-on) is both OFF, the status after power-off return is the same as turn 8 according to “stack contents” as in the above case. "Wait for setting value determination" (order 11).

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 55 (d2), the setting value determination (order 4) is performed before the turn-off in order 6, and the setting key is turned on before and after the interruption (or power on). Since it has been switched from OFF to OFF, the “set value” after power-on is “b” selected in “set value changeable” in order 3 and the status after power failure return is “stack content” It becomes "normal state" without using (order 8).

  In the pattern 7 relating to the power interruption, when the state of the setting key is not changed while the setting key is ON, the pattern 2 relating to the above-mentioned power interruption (see FIG. 54B), or It is possible to perform processing in the same pattern as pattern 3 (see FIG. 54C) related to power interruption.

  In the case of the pattern 7 related to power interruption as described above, in the case as shown in FIG. 55 (d1), the normal procedure is performed in the same manner as the pattern 5 related to power interruption (see FIG. 55 (b)). It is possible to leave a trace when the setting change operation is not performed. And, by providing such a function, it becomes easy to detect fraud. In addition, it is possible to exert a deterrent against fraudulent acts and to prevent unauthorized alteration of settings.

  Further, in the case of the pattern 7 relating to power interruption, in the case shown in FIG. 55 (d2), as in the case of the pattern 6 relating to power interruption (see FIG. 55 (c)), If the setting change operation is performed in the non-regular procedure of turning the key OFF, the power failure recovery will be performed in the “normal state” even though the setting change operation has not been completed ( Turn 8). And it will be in the same state by the case where setting change work is performed by a regular procedure, and the case where the work of the above-mentioned non-regular procedure is performed.

  Therefore, for example, when the game arcade clerk in the setting change work merely accidentally makes a mistake in the work procedure, the setting change work can be finished as it is, and the work procedure is simplified. It is possible to

  In addition, it can be said that the pattern 7 related to such power interruption is changed in the state after power interruption and recovery depending on the presence / absence of switching of the setting key ON / OFF before and after the power interruption (or power on). . In addition, it can be said that the state after power failure recovery is set by looking at the state after switching of the setting key.

Further, in the pattern 7 related to the power interruption, the state of the setting key can be determined based on the level of the signal as described above. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the determination of the state of the setting key may be made by detecting the signal edge as described above. That is, the state of the setting key can be determined also by detecting the rising (or falling) edge when the signal indicating the state of the setting key changes from ON to OFF. Such detection of the edge of the signal can be performed, for example, at power-on (see the order 5 and the order 10 in FIG. 55 (d1) and the order 7 in FIG. 55 (d2)).
<< First response when an error occurs (pattern 1 related to an error) >>

  Next, as a response to the occurrence of an emergency other than power interruption, a pattern of error notification when an error occurs will be described. The same portions as those of the various patterns described above are illustrated in the same manner, and the description of the overlapping portions will be appropriately omitted. Then, first, a first countermeasure (hereinafter referred to as “pattern 1 related to an error”) when a predetermined error occurs during setting change will be described based on FIG. 56 (a).

  In pattern 1 related to this error, when a predetermined operation causing an error is performed after setting values are selected during setting change work, the state of the setting key is turned off after setting value determination by start lever operation etc. Then, an error notification is performed.

  That is, conventionally, when an operation causing an error occurs during setting change, the setting change operation is performed by setting the setting value to a value outside the prescribed range (here, a value other than “1” to “6”). There was something to ban. In addition, when the setting change operation is prohibited, there is also a case where the error notification is not performed unless the power is turned off. And in these conventional correspondence patterns, smooth implementation of setting change and judgment of error occurrence were not easy.

  On the other hand, in the pattern 1 according to the error of the present embodiment, when an error occurs during the setting change, the end of the setting change is waited, and the error notification is performed after the operation of the post setting change device is stopped. Then, while the setting change device is in operation, the setting change operation can be continued even if an error occurs. Further, the selection result of the setting value is also reflected each time the selection operation is performed, and the display of the setting value data and the setting value is switched.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 56 (a), when the power is turned on with the setting key turned on (order 1), as in the various patterns described above, the state of “operation of setting change device” becomes (order 2), "set value change is possible" (order 3). In this situation, for example, even if an error (CE error) occurs when it is determined that the gaming medal has stagnated at a portion provided with the above-mentioned insertion sensor 1 (115) or insertion sensor 2 (116), The "value change is possible" continues (order 5), and after the set value determination (order 6), the status "wait for set value determination" is obtained. Then, as shown in the figure, when the "setting key" is turned off, an "error state" is set (order 8), and an error notification is executed.

  Here, as an error that occurs during "setting change device operation", selector passage sensor abnormal passage (C1 error), coin passage sensor stagnation error (CE error), inserted game medal when detecting backflow of game medal Error when Clogged (C1 error, CH error, CE error) Error when game medal to be paid out is clogged (HP error), Error when there is an abnormal input in the payout sensor (not shown) (HQ) An error (FE error) when the game medal auxiliary storage 71 becomes full can be exemplified. In addition to this, there are a communication error that occurs when the main control board 61 and the sub control board 31 are broken, an error that occurs when an incorrect payout of gaming medals is detected, and a random number abnormality. And, in the pattern 1 relating to this error, an error condition such as giving an error notification even when various errors occur such as being treated as an error and giving an error notification if a normal state where a normal game is possible can be made I do not.

According to the pattern 1 related to the error as described above, when an error occurs during the setting change operation, the error notification is performed after stopping the operation of the setting change device, thereby performing the error notification without disturbing the setting change operation. It becomes possible. And thereby, smooth execution of setting change work is attained. Note that, for example, the priority of error notification may be determined in advance based on the degree of importance of error, and error notification during setting change may be performed only when an error of a predetermined priority or higher is detected. .
<< Second response when an error occurs (pattern 2 related to an error) >>

  Subsequently, as another example of the correspondence pattern relating to the occurrence of an error, FIG. 56 (b) regarding the second correspondence (hereinafter referred to as “pattern 2 relating to an error”) in the case where a predetermined error occurs during setting change. It explains based on). The same parts as those of the pattern 1 related to the above-mentioned error are similarly illustrated, and the description of the overlapping parts will be appropriately omitted. In pattern 2 related to this error, when a predetermined operation causing an error is performed after setting values are selected during setting change work, the state of the setting key is turned off after setting value determination by start lever operation etc. Even if it does not, error notification is not performed and it shifts to a normal state.

  That is, in the pattern 2 relating to an error, when an error occurs during setting change, no error notification is given even after stopping the operation of the setting change device, and normal gaming is possible after the operation stopping of the setting change device It becomes "normal condition".

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 56 (b), for example, even when a CE error relating to the retention of gaming medals occurs in the situation of “setting value changeable” (order 3), it relates to the error Similar to the pattern 1 (see FIG. 56A), "during change of set value" continues (order 5), and after the set value is determined (order 6), the state "wait for set value determination" is obtained. Then, as shown in the figure, when the "setting key" is turned off, the "normal state" is set (order 8), and the error notification is not executed.

  According to Pattern 2 pertaining to an error as described above, if an error occurs such that an error notification is given if it is treated as an error if the normal state in which a normal game is possible during the setting change operation. By not performing the error notification even after the setting change device is stopped, it is possible to suppress the error notification in an unnecessary scene and to improve the efficiency of the setting change operation. And thereby, smooth execution of setting change work is attained, without interrupting setting change work.

The present invention is not limited to the embodiments described above, and various modifications are possible. For example, as to various data processing modes relating to power interruption or error during setting change, and various storage area configurations, various types of data processing may be employed as long as they enable similar processing. is there. Further, the setting key switch 68 shown in FIG. 4 may be provided separately from the setting unit 62.
<Various measures in other complex situations>

Next, various measures that can be taken when a problem such as a power failure or a rotation failure occurs during effect display or rotation control in the slot machine 10 will be described. The same components as those described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the detailed description thereof is omitted.
<(1) Countermeasures against problems in special status display (Countermeasure pattern 1)>

  Below, the countermeasure in case an effect display and various defects are combined is demonstrated. Here, special state display is assumed as effect display. Furthermore, as the "special status display" assuming measures against problems, consider, for example, a moving image displayed on an image display means such as the effect unit 18 (FIG. 1) in the special status different from normal. be able to. Here, “the effect unit 18 and the like” is used because it is possible to provide a display device for effect display besides the effect unit 18.

  Furthermore, as a special state, the above-mentioned bonus (main bonus) such as BB and RB, RT (replay time), AT (assist time), and ART (assist replay) in which replay and bell are established with higher probability than usual. The state of time can be illustrated. Among these special states, bonuses such as BB and RB and RT are managed by the main control board 61. The special states AT and ART other than this may be managed by the sub control board 31 or may be managed by the main control board 61.

  In addition, as a special state, an advantageous section (advantage game state) and the like in which a player can perform an advantageous game state can be exemplified. As this advantageous section, a gaming state in which it is possible to play a game such as AT or ART by managing the main control board 61 can be illustrated. In this advantageous section, the AT or the like may or may not play a game, for example, in the case of winning a predetermined lottery or in the case where control for displaying a predetermined symbol combination is performed, AT , Etc. can be controlled. Also, the advantageous section can be ended at a predetermined period (e.g., a period of 1500 games). Moreover, there may exist multiple types of period of this advantageous section.

  Furthermore, as a special state, the gaming state of the so-called special additional zone can be illustrated. The additional specialization zone is a period of game state in which the addition of the number of games is easily performed (the probability of the increase is increased) for the game such as AT or ART determined in advance. Then, the period of the additional specialization zone may be one type or plural types.

  As a special state display relating to such a special state, a series of displays can be considered as being divided into a plurality of segments arranged in time series. And as a display classification of the special status display, the display of the start of the special status (display of the special status start), the display during the special status (display during the special status), the display of the end according to the special status (the special status end display) It can be illustrated. As each of these displays, what comprises a series of display content can be illustrated using several display data in time series. Furthermore, among these, as the special state start display, it is possible to illustrate video display and effect sound output as, for example, an introduction effect of about several seconds to several tens of seconds. The video display may include moving image display, still image display, or a combination thereof. For example, it is possible to adopt a display mode of displaying a predetermined still image or another predetermined moving image after displaying a predetermined moving image, and transitioning to a display during a special state described later as the special state start display is there.

  In addition to this, for example, freeze (start freeze) effects that can be performed in various modes as described above using the rotating drums 51L to 51R by the management of the main control board 61 as effects at the time of displaying the special state start In addition, it is possible to exemplify what is executed together with the video display by the management of the sub control board 31 and the output of the effect sound.

  Here, the relationship between the freeze effect which is the effect by the management of the main control board 61 and the effect (display effect related to the freeze effect) such as the image display by the management of the sub control board 31 can be determined variously It is. For example, freeze production and production such as video display can be started at the same timing, production such as video display can be started before freeze production, or production such as video display can be started later than freeze production It is possible to

  More specifically, when the freeze effect is started by the management of the main control board 61, the sub control board 31 can start the effect related to the freeze effect based on the command from the main control board 61. . Moreover, before the start of the freeze effect, it is possible to transmit a command related to the freeze effect from the main control board 61 to the sub control board 31, start the effect by managing the sub control board 31, and then start the freeze effect is there. Furthermore, after the start of the freeze effect, it is also possible to transmit a command related to the freeze effect from the main control substrate 61 to the sub control substrate 31 to start the effect by managing the sub control substrate 31.

  Furthermore, as the above-mentioned special state display, for example, the progress status such as the number of games sequentially increased during the special state (the number of elapsed games) and the number of obtained game medals is sub-controlled based on the command from the main control board 61 The management of the substrate 31 can be exemplified to display with the effect. The special state display may be, for example, "normal display in special state" or "normal screen in special state".

  Further, as the above-mentioned special state end display, for example, the appearance of a character (a leading character, an ally character, etc.) of an effect wins or defeats an enemy character in a battle effect by management of the sub control board 31 And the like can be exemplified to be executed subsequently to the effect in the special state. Furthermore, as the special state end display, any or all of the game results such as the number of games executed during the special state, the number of game medals acquired, and the number of continued sets, etc. The so-called ending effect to be displayed based on the command from the main control board 61 can be illustrated. The above-mentioned “number of continued sets” represents the degree of accumulation of special states by the number of sets in which a plurality of game numbers (40 games, 70 games, 100 games, etc.) are regarded as one set.

  The display of the game result in the special state, such as the number of games, the number of obtained sheets, and the number of continued sets in the ending effect, for example, additionally displays the number of games, the number of obtained, and the number of continued sets one by one. It is possible to display them one by one. Furthermore, it is also possible to perform the ending effect in a mode of displaying all of a plurality of types of game results such as the number of games, the number of obtained sheets, the number of continuous sets, etc.

  Furthermore, at the time of ending effecting, it is also possible to execute the above-described freeze effect by the management of the main control board 61 in combination as an end freeze effect. In addition, it is possible to illustrate a presentation mode in which the ending presentation as described above is performed after the presentation of the story in which the main character, the ally character, and the like lose the enemy character.

  Furthermore, for example, when the special state continues as in the case of transition from ART to bonus, the special control end display related to the previous special state is displayed by management of sub control board 31 based on a command from main control board 61. Subsequently, a special state start display relating to a later special state may be performed.

On the other hand, power failure (power failure) judged by the main control board 61 can be mentioned as a problem which occurs in the situation of a special state display. In the following, the control operation (basic operation) in the case where no malfunction occurs will be described, and thereafter, the difference from the basic operation will be described in two cases where the occurrence timing of the power-off is different.
<< Basic operation concerning special status display (basic operation concerning countermeasure pattern 1) >>

  In FIG. 58 (a), various operation states in the basic operation in which no trouble occurs are shown in chronological order from top to bottom, with reference numerals G1 to G10. In this basic operation, first, the rotating drum stop operation (G1) detected under the control of the main control board 61 during the normal game is used as a starting point, and thereafter, under the control of the sub control board 31, the special state After the state (G2) of the start of the start display, the transition to the start display progress waiting state (G3) is made.

  Among them, the rotating drum stop operation (G1) shown in the uppermost row is for the rotating drum (third stopped rotating drum) which is finally stopped among the first to third drums 51L to 51R. It indicates that the operation of the stop button (one of the first stop button 24L to the third stop button 24R) is performed. Then, when a button operation (third stop) for stopping the third stop rotating drum is detected under the control of the main control board 61 (G1), the above-mentioned special state start by the control of the sub control board 31 is started. Shift to the display start status (G2).

  As described above, the special status display can be considered in stages, such as the special status start display, the special status display, and the special status end display. Execution time (not limited to one) is determined in advance for the special state start display, the special state in-progress display, and the special state end display. Then, these times can be referred to as "start display time", "special state display time", "end display time" and the like.

  Furthermore, waiting for the elapse of these “start display time”, “special state display time”, and “end display time” are “wait for start display progress”, “wait for special state display progress”, and , “Wait for end display progress” or the like. Furthermore, these waiting states can be referred to as “start display elapsed waiting time”, “special state display elapsed waiting time”, “end display elapsed waiting time” and the like.

  In the example of FIG. 58 (a), when the special state start display is started (G2), it becomes a state of waiting for the start display progress, and clocking of the start display progress waiting is performed (G3). And, during this start display progress waiting time, for example, various effects can be considered as effects to be executed in the effect unit 18 etc. However, for example, when the above-mentioned freeze effect by management of the main control board 61 is performed Based on a command from the main control board 61 to the sub control board 31, it is possible to execute an effect display related to the freeze effect.

  When the above-mentioned start display elapsed waiting time ends (G4), the special state start display ends (G5), and the state shifts to the special state display state (G6). Then, after the start of the special state display (G6), when a predetermined special state end condition (described later) is achieved (G7), the state of the special state end display is entered (G8). Here, as the special state end condition of G7, the number of game medals paid out during the special state has reached a predetermined number, the number of games during the special state has reached a predetermined number, or a predetermined symbol It is possible to adopt that the combination is displayed, and the like. Then, it is possible to set any one of these as the special state end condition or to set a plurality of combinations as the special state end condition.

Further, when the special state end display is continued and the end display elapsed waiting time is ended (G9), the special state end display is ended, and the game state is shifted to the subsequent game state according to the situation (G10). In the example of FIG. 58 (a), when the end display elapsed waiting time ends (G9) and the special state end display ends, a normal middle state (also referred to as a normal state) different from the special state is started at G10. ing.
<< Disruptive pattern 1 during special status display (measure pattern 1-1) >>

  Subsequently, a first combination of the special state display as described above and the power-off as a defect (power-off pattern 1 during the special state display) will be described with reference to FIG. The same reference numerals are given to the same situation as the basic operation shown in FIG. 58A, and the description thereof will be omitted. In the example shown in FIG. 58 (b), when the power-off (G17) occurs in the condition from the start display progress waiting status (G3) to the end of the start display elapsed waiting time (G4) Is assumed. For example, as described above, when the freeze effect is being performed during the start display elapsed waiting time, the power is turned off during the freeze effect.

  In such a case, when the start display elapsed waiting time starts (G3), a power failure occurs (G16), and then there is a power failure recovery (G17; hereinafter referred to as "power recovery"), the main While there is no reception of a command relating to the special state start display from the control board 61, a predetermined start end wait display is started in the effect unit 18 and the like by management of the sub control board 31 (G18). That is, in the sub control board 31, in a state where the sub main CPU 86 does not receive a command from the main control board 61, the start end wait display (G18) is executed as the effect display after the power is restored.

  Here, the display data (first display data) related to the special state start display at the time of the occurrence of the power failure is configured by sequentially executing a plurality of display data of, for example, display data A, display data B, and display data C, The display data (second display data) related to the start end wait display (G18) after power recovery can be configured by a plurality of display data of display data D and display data E. Furthermore, it is possible to set the second display data to the special state display which is a general screen of the special state which is shifted after the end of the freeze. As a result, it is possible to cause the player to recognize that the player is in the special state when power is restored and power is restored during freezing, so that the player is given a sense of security even if there is an accident of power off. Can.

  It is also possible to configure the last few seconds of the special state start display by looping the display of the predetermined display data. For example, display data A is defined as 0 seconds to 10 seconds, display data B as 10 seconds to 18 seconds, and display data C as 18 seconds to 20 seconds. Then, it is conceivable to loop the display by the display data C. At this time, in display data B, as described above, a plurality of types of game results such as the number of games, the number of obtained sheets, and the number of continued sets are sequentially displayed, and display data C is displayed in a plurality of types. Display data of the mode to be displayed. In such a mode, the display data A and the display data B can be used as the first display data, and the display data C can be used as the second display data.

  In addition, the configurations of the first display data and the second display data can be changed depending on circumstances such as the timing of occurrence of a power failure. For example, if a power failure occurs in a situation where display data B is being executed after display data A, the first display data will be up to display data B, which is used for waiting for start completion display after power recovery. The display data D to be displayed and the display data E constitute the second display data. Furthermore, when the power is cut off in the situation where the display data A is being executed, up to the display data A becomes the first display data, and the display data D and the display data E are the second display data as described above. It constitutes the

  Further, the configuration of the first display data may be configured such that the display of the start of the special state is ended by the execution of the display data C when the power is not interrupted. Furthermore, in the configuration of the first display data, other display data (for example, display data F, display data G, etc.) is executed after the display data C when the power is not interrupted, and the special state start display is ended. It may be like that.

  The second display data may be configured by three or more display data. Further, the second display data is not limited to being configured by a plurality of display data, and, for example, the second display data is configured by only the display data E described above (or only the display data D). It may be. Furthermore, the second display data can be considered as a single display data by integrating the display data D and the display data E.

  Further, if the freeze effect by the management of the main control board 61 is being executed at the time of displaying the special state start, the command related to the freeze effect information such as indicating the remaining time of the freeze effect, for example, There is no transmission or reception of For this reason, the sub control board 31 freezes the effect based on the start end wait display (G18) using the second display data (here, the display data D and the display data E) without the information related to the freeze effect. Run in parallel with

  The start time end wait display (G18) here is, for example, a display for a special state, a display for a game not in a special state (normal state), or a standby state not for a game. Among the predetermined standby display, any predetermined display can be adopted. If the display for the special status is performed as the start end wait display (G18) using the second display data, indicating that the special status resumes to the player after the power is restored. Can. In addition, when the display during the special status is not being played (normal status) or the above-mentioned standby display is performed as the start end wait display (G18), or after the power is restored, It can indicate to the player that the display control has been started again.

  As described above, the display content of the start / end wait display (G18) is based on the second display data, and the second display data is a plurality of display data (here, display data D and display data E). Can be configured using time series.

  More specifically, for example, a moving picture of a battle (fighting) scene is displayed as the display data D, and a display of the final phase of the battle is repeatedly displayed (loop display) as the display data E. Be In this case, the battle (fighting) scene is shifted to the final scene of the battle, and the player is expected to be in the special state, and then the special state display related to the special state is executed.

  Further, it is also possible to exemplify display contents in which a still image is used as the display data E, display of the still image after the moving image (display after start) and transition to display during special state.

  In addition, it is also possible to execute the remaining effects of the effect interrupted due to the power-off as the start-time end waiting display (G18). In this case, it is possible to manage the progress of the effect using a timer or the like, save the information on the progress when the power is turned off, and resume the effect based on the saved information when the power is restored. .

  Moreover, as the above-mentioned "standby display", a demonstration display (display of a demonstration) that displays the contents of an effect or a game during standby, a brand display that displays a company name, a model name, and the like can be illustrated. As display data for the demonstration display and the brand display, it is possible to use what is displayed when the slot machine 10 is powered on. Furthermore, it is also possible to display a selection menu of the language (Japanese, Korean, Chinese, English, etc.) used for displaying the characters of the game explanation during standby display. And such standby display can also be constituted by a plurality of display data (for example, display data D, display data E).

  Here, in the example of FIG. 58 (b), the special state start display is not completed due to the power-off which occurs during the special state start display. For this reason, after the end (G4) of the start display elapsed waiting time described above, the status of the display during the special status, not the status of the end (G5) of the special status start display in the basic operation of FIG. Transition to (G6). After that, as in the basic operation of FIG. 58A, the state shifts to the state after the start of the special state display (G6).

  In addition, in the case of power supply return (G17), not only the information of the remaining time of the freeze effect is held in the sub control board 31, but also the control mode which does not store the information (status information of effect) indicating the progress of the effect Conceivable. When such a control mode is adopted, for example, at the end of the start display elapsed waiting time (G4) or at the start of the special state display (G5), the main control board 61 to the sub control board 31. Send a command (a command during start freeze) indicating that freeze production at the start of the special state is being performed. Then, in the sub control board 31, based on the command during start freeze, the effect associated with the freeze effect is executed, or one of the effects is selected and executed from among a plurality of effects. Conceivable.

  In addition, after the power is restored from the power supply in the situation where the freeze effect and the special state start display are being performed, the start end wait display (G18), the special state display such as ART (for example, "ART normal display The following control mode can be considered in the case of transitioning to “ART” or “ART normal screen”.

  First, as a first control mode (a first control mode at the start) here, the sub control board 31 performs a start end wait display (G18) after power is restored, and receives a command from the main control board 61. wait. The start time end display (G18) at this time uses display data of contents related to the freeze effect at any timing (which may be from the beginning). Further, the main control board 61 transmits to the sub control board 31 a command (the freeze presentation end command related to the start of the special state) for notifying the end of the freeze presentation at the end timing of the freeze presentation. Then, in the sub control board 31, based on the received freeze effect end command, it recognizes that the freeze effect is ended, ends the start end wait display (G18), and starts the display of the above-mentioned ART normal screen. .

  Subsequently, as a second control mode (a second control mode at the start), during the freeze effect relating to the start of the special state, the main control board 61 counts (counts) a timer, and the count value (freeze effect progress The sub control board 31 is notified of the time value). In the sub control board 31, when the count value reaches a predetermined value (when the freeze effect end time comes), the display contents of the effect unit 18 and the like are shifted from the special state start display relating to the freeze effect to the ART normal screen.

  Then, at the time of power loss recovery from the power loss during the display of the special state start, the main control board 61 transmits the count value continued to the count value at the power loss occurrence to the sub control board 31. In the sub control board 31, as in the case where the power is not shut off, when the count value reaches a predetermined value, the display contents of the effect unit 18 and the like are shifted from the special state start display relating to the freeze effect to the ART normal screen.

  Subsequently, as a third control mode (a third control mode at the start), the main control board 61 transmits, to the sub control board 31, a state command (status command) indicating a state of effect. For example, as the state command, a state command indicating that the gaming state is in the freeze effect, a command indicating that the special state is in progress, and a command indicating that the normal state is in progress are provided. Then, in the sub control board 31, when receiving the state command indicating that the freeze effect is being performed, the effect related to the freeze effect is started, and when the state command indicating that the special state is being received, for example, If the command is received, the ART normal screen is displayed, and if the command of the bonus state is received, the effect during the special game such as the bonus normal screen is started. In addition, during the freeze production, for example, the main control board 61 performs predetermined timing during the freeze production (by rotating the rotating drum so as to align seven designs on a straight line, reversely rotate the rotating drum) at predetermined intervals. State command (standby command) indicating that it is time to

  Furthermore, at the time of power loss recovery from the power loss during the special state start display, the sub control board 31 starts the start end wait display (G18) based on the above-described standby command. In this case, the standby command is provided with information indicating the progress status (progressive stage) of the freeze effect, and when power is restored, display data is selected based on the received standby command, and continued from the special state start display before the power is turned off. It is conceivable to perform a sexually displayed image. As described above, it is possible to set the second display data as the ART normal screen.

  As described above, when the power is turned off during the special state start display, the start end wait display (G18) is performed when the power is restored, even if the power is turned off during the special state start display, It is possible to prevent an unexpected operation from being performed after the power is restored, and it is possible to reliably end the status of the special state start display standby. Then, by executing the start end wait display (G18) using the second display data, the main control board 61 does not interrupt the display even if there is no transmission of a command specifying an effect at the time of power return. It is possible to wait for the start time elapsed waiting time to end smoothly (G4).

  Furthermore, by performing a start end wait display (G18), when a power failure occurs in a situation where the freeze effect is being performed by the management of the main control board 61, the rotating drum is used when the power is restored. It is possible to prevent a situation in which only the freeze effect is performed and the effect display in the effect section 18 or the like is not performed at all.

  For example, considering a case where a special condition start display and a freeze effect are executed together by winning a BB or the like managed by the main control board 61, the effect from the main control board 61 is restored when the power is restored. There is no command transmission for display specification. For this reason, it may happen that nothing is displayed in the effect unit 18 or the like. In addition, as the start end wait display (G18), it may be considered that a game is not in the special state (in the normal state) or the above-described standby display is performed. Then, in such a case, it may be considered that the player resumes control, but gives a fear that the winning is canceled due to the power-off.

  However, if the display for end at start (G18) is displayed at the time of power recovery, and the display for the above-mentioned special state is performed as the start end wait display, the player is also kept special even after power recovery. It can be shown that the game in the state is guaranteed. Then, it is possible to execute control such that the player can be given a sense of security without causing the player to be uneasy due to the power-off.

  In addition, as the start end wait display (G18) using the second display data, the player is not in the special state (during the normal state) or when the above-described standby display is performed, It can be shown that the game can be continued after that. For this reason, it is possible to give the player a sense of security and a pointer relating to the operation state thereafter, as compared with the case where nothing is displayed in the effect unit 18 or the like after the power is restored.

Further, by performing the start end wait display (G18) by the standby display, it is possible to secure a preparation time for moving image display to the effect unit 18 and the like. For example, in the case of displaying a real-time 3D moving image in which 3DCG (three-dimensional computer graphics) are drawn in real time, it takes a corresponding time to start image display. However, by performing the above-described standby display as the start end wait idea (G18), the preparation time is secured using a video with a small amount of data and processing load, and correspondence to CG animation with high reality is realized. It becomes easy.
<< Disruptive pattern 2 during special status display (measure pattern 1-2) >>

  Subsequently, pattern 2 (measure pattern 1-2) relating to the combination of the special state display and the power-off as a defect will be described based on FIG. 58 (c). The same reference numerals are given to the same situation as the basic operation shown in FIG. 58A, and the description thereof will be omitted. In the example of FIG. 58 (c), it is assumed that the power failure occurs in the condition from the status (G8) of the special status end display to the end (G9) of the end display elapsed waiting time period. .

  In such a case, power off occurs (G16) after the start of the special state end display (G8) using the first display data for end time, and if there is power supply recovery (G17) thereafter, the effect section In step 18 and the like, predetermined end time end waiting display using the second display data for end time is started (G21).

  Similar to the first display data for start time, the first display data for end time described above should be composed of a plurality of display data (for example, display data K, display data L, display data M, etc.) Can. Furthermore, power-off may occur in any of the display data K, the display data L, and the display data M. The first display data for termination may be configured by two or more display data, or may be configured by a single display data.

  In addition, as the above-mentioned end-time end waiting display (G21), any of the predetermined display among the above-described display of the normal state or the above-described standby display can be adopted. Furthermore, as display data for end-time end display using the second display data for end-time, a plurality of display data (for example, display data N) is displayed in the same manner as the start-time end wait display (G21 of FIG. 58 (b)). , Display data O etc.). Note that the second display data for end time may be configured by three or more display data or a single display data.

  Here, in the example of FIG. 58 (c), the special state end display is not completed due to the power-off which occurs during the special state end display. Then, while executing the above-mentioned end-time end display (G21) using the second display data, while waiting for the end of the end display elapsed waiting time of G9 described above, the end display elapsed waiting time is ended (G9), The special state end display ends, and in accordance with the situation, the game mode is shifted to the subsequent gaming state (here, the normal state) (G10).

  As described above, when there is a power failure during the special status end display using the first display data, the special status wait display (G21) is performed at the time of power recovery using the second display data. Even if a power failure occurs during termination display, it is possible to prevent an unexpected operation after power recovery, and it is possible to reliably terminate the status (G9) of the termination display waiting. Then, by executing the end waiting display at the end of G21, it is possible to wait for the end display elapsed waiting time to end smoothly (G9) without interrupting the display.

  In addition to the special state end display, there may be a case in which the freeze effect by the management of the main control board 61 is performed. In such a case, as the freeze effect after the power is restored, an effect that is continued to the effect at the time of the power failure is executed. Furthermore, as the end end wait display (G21) by the management of the sub control board 31, effects such as displaying the game result according to the special number such as the above-mentioned number of acquired game medals, the number of games, and the number of continued sets An aspect can be illustrated.

  In addition, as a display of game results, a batch result display (final display) in which all of them are displayed together, instead of displaying the number of obtained game medals, the number of games, the number of consecutive sets, etc. Can also be illustrated. Then, display data of such collective result display as the above-mentioned display data O, for example, after displaying the display data N such as a main character character or a defeat character of an ally character, display collective result display based on the display data O It is also possible to do.

  Furthermore, when the power is cut off in the situation where the freeze effect is being executed together with the special state end display, the command is not transmitted from the main control board 61 at the time of the power return, and the management of the main control board 61 It is also possible to assume that only the freeze effect according to is performed and the effect display by the management of the sub control board 31 is not performed at all. However, by displaying the end upon termination (G21) after the power is restored, it is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring even if there is no command transmission from the main control board 61.

  Furthermore, when the player is in the middle of a game not in the special state (normal state) or the above-mentioned standby display is performed as the end time end waiting display (G21), the special state at that time ends for the player. Can indicate that For this reason, it is possible to give the player a sense of security and a pointer relating to the operation state thereafter, as compared with the case where nothing is displayed in the effect unit 18 or the like after the power is restored.

  In addition, when the special effect is finished, when the freeze effect by the management of the main control board 61 and the special state end display by the management of the sub control board 31 are performed, the special state end display is shifted to the subsequent game state Various control modes related to transmission and reception of commands can be considered. Then, as the gaming state after the special state end display, the normal middle state (G10) which is not the special state can be considered.

  First, as the first control mode at the end of the special state (first control mode at the end), the main control board 61 gives a command (special to convey the end of the freeze effect) as in the first control mode at the start described above. The freeze effect end command related to the state end is transmitted to the sub control board 31. More specifically, the sub control board 31 waits for a command from the main control board 61 while executing an end wait display (G21) after power recovery after power off during the special state end display. The end time end display (G21) at this time uses display data of contents related to the freeze effect at any timing (may be from the beginning) (for example, the main character or the ally character is in a battle) Such as the content of defeating). Furthermore, it is possible to perform the above-mentioned ending effect (including the case of the batch display result) at the final stage (which may be from the beginning) of the end-time end waiting display (G21).

  The main control board 61 transmits to the sub control board 31 a freeze production end command related to the end of the special state described above at the end of the freeze production. Then, the sub control board 31 recognizes that the freeze effect has ended based on the received freeze effect end command, and ends the end wait display (G21) at the end to display the above-mentioned normal state (G10) Display of display using data (in normal state screen) is started.

  Subsequently, as a second control mode (a second control mode at the end time), as in the second control mode at the start time described above, during the freeze effect relating to the end of the special state, Clocking is performed, and the count value is notified to the sub control board 31 (the value of the freeze rendering elapsed time). In the sub control board 31, when the count value reaches a predetermined value (when the freeze effect end time comes), the display contents of the effect unit 18 etc. are shifted from the special state end display related to the freeze effect to the normal state in progress screen.

  Then, at the time of power loss recovery from the power loss during the special state end display, the main control board 61 transmits the count value continued to the count value at the power loss occurrence to the sub control board 31. In the sub control board 31, when the count value reaches a predetermined value, the display contents of the effect section 18 and the like are shifted from the special state end display relating to the freeze effect to the screen in the normal state.

  Subsequently, as a third control mode (third control mode at the time of termination), a state command (in which the main control board 61 indicates a state of effect to the sub control board 31) as in the third control mode at the start described above Send status command). With regard to the freeze effect, the main control board 61 transmits the state command indicating that the freeze effect is being performed to the sub control board 31 at the timing when the freeze effect is started. Further, for example, at predetermined intervals, the main control board 61 performs predetermined timing (during rotation of the rotating drum so as not to align 7 designs on a straight line) or stops the rotating rotating drum. Sends a standby command indicating that it is time to When the sub control board 31 receives the state command indicating that the freeze effect is being performed, the sub control board 31 executes the special state end display related to the freeze effect, and the special state is ended, indicating that the normal state is being performed. When the command is received, the display state related to the normal state (G10) is entered, and the display of the normal state screen is started.

Furthermore, at the time of power failure recovery from the power failure during the special status end display, the sub control board 31 starts an end termination wait display (G18) based on the above-mentioned standby command. In this case, the standby command is provided with information indicating the progress status (progressive stage) of the freeze effect, and when power is restored, display data is selected based on the received standby command, and the special status end display before power interruption is continued. It is conceivable to perform a sexually displayed image. Also, it is possible to set a normal screen as the second display data. As a result, when the power is turned off during the end freeze and the power is restored, the normal screen can be displayed instead of the ART screen, so that the power restoration process can be performed without giving the player excessive expectation.
<(2) Countermeasures against problems in rotating drum acceleration (measure pattern 2)>
<< Overview of Spindle Speed Control >>

  Next, the relationship between the toroidal acceleration and the failure will be described based on FIGS. 59 and 60. FIG. First, the term "rotational drum acceleration" as used herein refers to a period (acceleration period) in which an acceleration state is in an acceleration state when the condition of the rotational speed of the rotational drum changes as schematically shown in FIG. Means the control state of More specifically, as shown at the left end in FIG. 60 (a), the rotating drums 51L to 51R start rotation through start lever operation (lever ON) and part extraction and gradually increase the rotational speed. The constant speed is reached, and after the acceleration period, the "constant speed" on the control of the drum is reached.

  After that, when the corresponding stop button (one of the first stop button 24C to the third stop button 24L in this embodiment) is operated and there is a stop input (stop input), the rotation of the rotating drum is braked, A prize determination is made along with the stop of rotation of the cylinder. Here, the rotational speed mode shown in FIG. 60 (a) shows a basic operation, and for example, immediately after lever ON or immediately after stop input, etc., rotating drums 51L to 51R operate on effects not shown. There are also cases such as (operation of freeze production).

As described above, a four-phase stepping motor (not shown) is used for the rotating unit 54 (see FIG. 4). More specifically, the control related to the control of the rotating drum rotating device 54 is mainly performed by the above-described processing (S 546 in FIG. 18) of the driving control of the rotating drums 51C to 51L. One step of the rotating stepper motor is about 1.071 °, and each rotating cylinder makes one rotation in 336 steps. In addition, the number of symbols of the one time barrel is 21, and the number of steps of 1 symbol is 16 steps. In addition, when the number of symbols of a one time trunk is set to 20, for example, the number of steps of 16 symbols and 17 symbols are provided.
<< Start of rotation of the torso >>

At the start of rotation of the drums 51L to 51R, in order to start acceleration of the drums 51C to 51L, predetermined data is set in each RWM that controls the drums 51C to 51L. Specifically, for each of the rotating cylinders 51C to 51L, 1 indicates the start of rotation standby for the rotating cylinder drive state number, 1 for the rotating drum drive pulse output counter, and 10 for the number of times of rotational drive pulse switching (during acceleration) , FFH representing that the rotation sensor has not passed in the symbol number (for passing position), FFH representing that the symbol number is not set in the symbol number (for stop position), and rotation failure detection The counter is set to 0. In addition, description is abbreviate | omitted about the process of the rotation start standby performed at the time of a drum rotation start.
<< acceleration processing of the spinning drum >>

  Subsequently, an operation in the acceleration processing of the rotating drum will be described. The acceleration process is the same in each rotating cylinder. In the state where the drum drive state number is 5 (during acceleration), the drum drive pulse output counter is decremented by 1 at each interruption, and when it becomes 0, the following processing is performed. First of all, 1 is added to the counter for motor drum drive pulse data search, the excitation output is performed by the data taken out from the motor drum drive pulse table based on the lower 3 bits (0 to 7), and the motor drum is moved 1 step Let The number of times of switching the driving cylinder pulse during acceleration is decremented by one, and if it is not 0, data is taken out from the rotating cylinder rising pattern table based on the numerical value, and it is set in the rotating cylinder drive pulse output counter. Then, when the number of times of rotation of the drum drive pulse at the time of acceleration becomes 0, the drum drive state is set to 4 (during constant speed).

With respect to the acceleration time of the spinning drum, the excitation switching time from the start of the spinning of the spinning drum is defined in accordance with the number of steps from the start of rotation. In the present embodiment, the excitation switching time in the first step from the start of rotation is about 114 ms corresponding to 51 interrupts, about 70 ms corresponding to 31 interrupts in the second step, and about 9 ms corresponding to 4 interrupts in the third step. Steps 4 to 7 are about 6.7 ms corresponding to 3 interrupts, 8 steps about 4.5 ms corresponding to 2 interrupts, 9 steps reaching constant speed are about 2.2 ms corresponding to 1 interrupt ing. Furthermore, the cycle of one interrupt is 2.235 ms as described above, and the total number of interrupts from the first step to the ninth step is 92 (= 51 + 31 + 4 + 3 + 2 + 1) times.
<< Constant speed processing of spinning drum >>

  Subsequently, constant speed processing of the rotating drum will be described. With regard to the operation in the constant speed processing of the rotating drum, the following processing is performed every one interrupt in the state where the rotating drum drive state number is 4 (during constant speed). That is, the rotary drum drive pulse output counter is decremented by 1, and it is confirmed that the rotary drum drive pulse output counter is 0, and 1 is set to the rotary drum drive pulse output counter again. Further, when the counter for driving the drum drive pulse data is even, one is added to the rotational defect detection counter for the trunk. Furthermore, the counter for driving the drum drive pulse data is incremented by one, and excitation output is performed based on the value (0 to 7) of the lower 3 bits based on the value (0 to 7) of the drum drive pulse table. Let Then, when the rotation sensor signal changes from OFF to ON and detects the home position (initial position) of the rotation drum, 4 for the step number of 1 symbol, 0 for the symbol number (for passing position), rotation rotation defect detection counter Set to 0.

  When the origin position of the rotating drum can not be detected (except when the rotating drum sensor signal is switched from OFF to ON), the step number of one symbol is decremented by 1 every interruption. When the result of subtraction of the step number of 1 symbol is 0, the step number of 1 symbol is set to 16 and 1 is added to the symbol number (for passing position). Furthermore, if the result of adding 1 to the symbol number (for passing position) exceeds 20, 0 is set to the symbol number (for passing position).

With regard to the design of the rotational speed in constant speed processing of the rotating drum, the time required for one rotation of the rotating drum in the constant speed state is that excitation switching for 336 steps is performed at each interrupt (2.235 ms) at constant speed. Therefore, it will be 750.96 ms. Therefore, the design rotational speed in the constant speed state is 79.90 revolutions / minute.
<< Processing when the rotating drum has a rotation defect >>

  Subsequently, a process in the case where the rotation drum has failed in rotation will be described. During rotation of the rotating drum, the passage of the initialization (index) that interrupts the rotating drum sensor may be delayed due to rotational failure of the rotating drum. In such a state, the number of interrupts required for one rotation will exceed 336 times, which may make it impossible to detect an accurate symbol position. Therefore, a (rotation drum) rotation defect detection counter is used to inspect the rotation defect of the rotation drum.

  The rotation failure detection counter is incremented by one when the rotation drum drive pulse data search counter is even when the rotation drum drive state number is 4 (during constant speed), and is usually counted in the range of 0 to 167. However, if passing of the initialization (index) blocking the rotation sensor is not confirmed, the count is exceeded as it is. Here, although the rotation of one rotation of the rotating drum is controlled by 336 steps, in the slot machine 10, counting is performed every even step, and the count number becomes a value of 0 to 167 as described above.

  The following processing is carried out for the detection of the rotation defect of the drum. That is, it is determined that the rotational drum rotation is defective when the rotational drum rotation defect detection counter reaches 184 or more. In order to reaccelerate the toroid, data is set in each RWM that controls the toroid. Specifically, for each spinning drum, the spinning drum drive state number indicates 5 during acceleration, 1 for the spinning drum drive pulse output counter, 10 for the number of times of spinning drum drive switching (during acceleration), symbol number ( For pass position) FFH indicating that the rotation sensor has not passed, FFH indicating that the symbol number is not set for the symbol number (for stop position), and 0 for the rotation failure detection counter Is set.

Here, the reason why the value of the turning drum rotation defect detection counter is determined to be 184 or more when it is determined that the turning drum rotation is defective is as follows. That is, when the rotation is defective, the value of the rotation defect detection counter is a value exceeding one rotation (here, 167) of the rotation drum. However, if the threshold value for the judgment of rotational drum rotation defect is "167" and judgment of rotational drum rotation defect is immediately performed when the index non-detection period exceeds one cycle, it is excessive. In some cases, it may be determined that the rotation of the drum is defective. In addition, if the threshold value of the counter value for determining the rotational drum rotation defect is set too large, the detection accuracy of the rotational drum rotation defect decreases. Under such circumstances, the threshold value of the counter value for determining the rotation defect of the rotating drum is set to "184", and the appropriate rotation defect detection of the rotating drum can be performed.
<< deceleration processing of the turning drum during normal game >>

  Subsequently, details of the deceleration processing of the rotating drum during normal game will be described. When the stop buttons 24C to 24L are received, the symbol numbers to be displayed are set to symbol numbers (for the stop position), and 3 (deceleration start) is set to the rotating drum drive state number. In the deceleration start processing of the rotating drum related to the normal game, in the state where the rotating drum driving state number is 3 (deceleration start), the step number of 1 symbol is 13, and the symbol number (for passing position) and the symbol number (stop If the position matches, 2 (decelerating) is set to the spinning drum drive state number.

In the process during deceleration of the rotating drum related to the normal game, in the state where the rotating drum drive state number is 2 (during deceleration), the excitation output outputs 4 phases ON, and the value of the rotating drum drive pulse output counter is from 85 1 is subtracted for each interrupt, and the result is 0, and when approximately 190 ms (= 85 × 2.235 ms) has elapsed, set 0 (in stop here) to the drum drive state number and excite output Turn off.
<< Basic operation to be performed during toroidal acceleration >>

  The basic operation of the rotary cylinder by the above-described rotary cylinder control can be schematically shown as shown in FIG. 59 (a). Here, in FIG. 59 (a), although a failure (rotational drum rotation failure) occurs during the constant speed state of the rotation drum, an operation in the case where no failure occurs during the rotation of the rotation drum is a basic operation. There is. As a basic operation, it is also possible to assume an operation in which a rotation failure does not occur even if detection of a rotation failure is performed in a constant speed state.

  In FIG. 59 (a), various situations in the basic operation are indicated in order from top to bottom, with reference numerals H1 to H9. In this basic operation, first, when the above-described start lever 25 is operated in a state where it is possible to start the game, the condition (H1) of the rotating drum starting operation is obtained. The status (H1) of the drum start operation corresponds to the status in which the main CPU 81 of the main control board 61 detects the drum start operation. Further, the drums 51L to 51R start to rotate and shift to the acceleration state (H2), and the processing of the acceleration state (acceleration state processing) as described above is performed (H3).

  The control state of the main CPU 81 is also shown for the acceleration state (H2) of the rotating drum here and the process (H3) for the acceleration state. The acceleration state (H2) of the spinning drum and the processing (H3) in the acceleration state correspond to the processing in a situation where the above-described spinning drum drive state number is "5" during acceleration. Then, processing for causing the ninth step to reach a constant speed is performed by the acceleration processing for the predetermined period (here, nine steps, 92 interruptions) described above, and the acceleration state ends (H4).

When the acceleration state is finished (H4), the constant speed state (turning drum constant speed state) as described above is established (H5). The constant speed state (H5) corresponds to the processing in the situation where the above-described rotating drum drive state number is in the constant speed of "4". Then, the constant speed state is maintained (H6), and in the case of a rotational speed defect due to some cause in the constant speed state (H7), the rotation defect is detected in the detection of the rotation defect (H8) and reacceleration It becomes a situation (H9). The processing here corresponds to the various types of processing described above as << processing in the case where rotation failure occurs in the spinning drum >>. The process for reacceleration may be the same as or different from the acceleration state process (H2 to H4).
<< Rotating failure pattern 1 during acceleration of the rotating drum 1 (Countermeasure pattern 2-1 (other than power-off)) >>

  Subsequently, a pattern 1 relating to the combination of the toroidal acceleration and the rotation failure will be described based on FIG. 59 (b). The same reference numerals are given to the same situation as the basic operation of FIG. 59 (a), and the description will be omitted. In the example of FIG. 59 (b), it is assumed that a rotation failure (H7) occurs due to a factor other than power-off in a situation between acceleration state processing execution (H3) and acceleration state processing end (H4). There is. As a mode of the rotation failure here, it can be exemplified that, for example, due to a step out of the motor or other factors, any of the rotating cylinders being accelerated can not rotate in the scheduled acceleration state. As the above-mentioned "other factors", it becomes difficult to rotate by contact with the display window (turning-body display panel 28) due to an error or aged deterioration at the time of assembly, etc. Can be illustrated. Moreover, it is also possible to assume the injustice which hold down a rotating body manually as "other factors".

  In such a case, detection of the rotation failure (rotation failure detection) is not performed in the situation where the rotation failure (H7) occurs, and the processing of the remaining acceleration state is continued (H11). The process (H11) of the acceleration state at this time corresponds to the process in a situation in which the above-described turning drum drive state number is “5” during acceleration. Then, even if acceleration of the rotating drum can not be performed in the scheduled manner, the acceleration state processing is finished to the end (H4), and the constant speed state (rotation drum constant speed state) as in the basic operation shown in FIG. (H5), and the constant speed state is maintained (H6). The constant speed state at this time corresponds to the processing in the situation in which the above-described rotating drum drive state number is in the constant speed “4” as in the basic operation. Furthermore, in this situation, rotation failure detection (processing for detection of step-out) is performed (H8), and since rotation failure occurs here, rotation failure is detected, and the condition of reacceleration as described above and (H9).

  By doing this, even if a rotation failure occurs during the acceleration state, it is possible to prevent an unexpected operation from being performed, and it is possible to reliably end the acceleration state. Then, it is possible to quickly shift to the constant speed state, and also quickly shift to major situations such as processing for notification of the result of the role extraction and payout processing (including processing for storage) of gaming medals. It is possible to do

  Also, for example, when accelerating the rotating drum by repeating a predetermined number of interrupts as described above, the state of the rotating drum reaches a constant speed rotation even if it does not normally require all the required number of interrupts. The case may also be assumed. In other words, even if a predetermined number of interrupts are repeated to accelerate to a constant speed under control, the constant speed may be reached within a limited acceleration time after the power is restored, depending on the situation. Then, in that case, the rotation failure is not detected, and the reacceleration (H9) is not performed.

  That is, at the time of power recovery, regardless of the actual situation of the rotational speed of the drum, if the same number of interrupts as in the normal case is always executed for acceleration, time is wasted. However, as described above, in the situation where the rotation failure (H7) occurs, the detection of the rotation failure (rotation failure detection) is not performed, and the processing of the remaining acceleration state is continued (H11). By finishing the acceleration state process to the end (H4) even if the rotation of the drum can not be accelerated, it is possible to smoothly advance the rotation control of the drum without spending unnecessary acceleration time.

  Here, it is also possible to adopt the following as a control mode during toroidal acceleration. For example, with regard to the processing of the main CPU 81, the processing for accelerating the spinning drum is performed without interrupting the interruption, and the processing for stopping the spinning drum is performed with the interruption prohibited for some period. . More specifically, at the time of acceleration of the rotating drum, even if any interruption occurs, the rotation of the rotating stepping motor is continued in control. As a result, if the rotation stepping motor is not broken or the contact between the rotation drum and the display window (rotation drum display panel 28) does not occur, the rotation drum is at a considerable rate even if any interruption occurs. Continues to accelerate and is considered to reach a constant speed.

With respect to such a concept of rotational acceleration, more precise and accurate control is required at the time of rotational stop, so interrupts are prohibited and rotational control is affected by the interrupt, and accurate accurate rotational control. To prevent it from For example, when the number of steps of one symbol is 16, symbol A and symbol B are continuous, and stop is accepted by the eighth step of symbol A, symbol A is stopped, and the ninth step of symbol A starts symbol B When the stop is accepted by the 8th step, the symbol B is assumed to be stopped. Here, when the turn stop control process is performed without performing the process of interrupt prohibition, the process of the stop acceptance by some interruption Is delayed, the process for accepting the stop is performed out of the proper timing, and it is thought that the symbol to be stopped is shifted by one symbol and stopped by performing stop acceptance at the position after the 9th step obtain. However, it is possible to prevent the stop position of the symbol from shifting and prohibit accurate symbol stop by prohibiting the other interrupt process only while performing the interrupt process involved in accepting the stop.
<< Rotational failure pattern 2 during rotational acceleration (measure pattern 2-2 (power off)) >>

  Subsequently, pattern 2 (measure pattern 2-2) relating to the combination of the toroidal acceleration and the rotation failure will be described based on FIG. 59 (c). The same reference numerals are given to the basic operation shown in FIG. 59 (a) and the situation similar to that of rotation failure pattern 1 (countermeasure pattern 2-1) during accelerating of the rotating cylinder shown in FIG. 59 (b) Is omitted. In the example of FIG. 59 (c), it is assumed that a rotation failure caused by a power failure (H16) occurs in a situation between the acceleration state process execution (H3) and the acceleration state process end (H4). There is.

  In such a case, the power is turned off (H16) after execution of acceleration state processing (H3), and if there is a power return (H17) after that, the turning drum is stopped and the condition of the turning defect (H18) However, in this situation, detection of rotation failure (rotation failure detection) is not performed, rotation of the rotating drum is started, and processing in an acceleration state is executed (H11). The process (H11) of the acceleration state at this time corresponds to the process in a situation in which the above-described turning drum drive state number is “5” during acceleration. Further, as an execution mode of the acceleration processing here, an aspect in which the processing in the acceleration state is executed from the beginning, an aspect in which the processing is executed only in the remaining time, and the like can be considered. Then, even if acceleration of the rotating drum can not be performed in the planned manner, the acceleration state processing is finished (H4), and the basic operation shown in FIG. 59 (a) and the countermeasure pattern 2-1 shown in FIG. 59 (b) Similarly, a constant speed state (turning constant speed state) is established (H5), and the constant speed state is maintained (H6). As in the case of the countermeasure pattern 2-1 described above, depending on the situation, constant speed may be reached during the limited acceleration time after power recovery, so acceleration processing for the same period as normal time is not performed again By doing this, it is possible to smoothly advance the rotary control of the drum without spending unnecessary acceleration time. Further, in this situation, the rotation failure detection is performed (H8), and when the rotation failure is occurring, the rotation failure is detected and the reacceleration state as described above is obtained (H9). If the rotation defect is not detected in the above-mentioned rotation defect detection (H8), although it is not shown in the drawing, not the reacceleration (H9), but the normal rotary drum rotation control is performed.

In this way, even if power failure occurs during the acceleration state, the same operation and effect as those of the above-described defective rotation pattern 1 (countermeasure pattern 2-1) during the toroidal acceleration can be obtained. Furthermore, as soon as power is restored, the remaining processing up to the constant speed state can be performed.
<(3) Countermeasures against problems in stop acceptance (measure pattern 3)>

Next, the relationship between stop acceptance and problems when stop operation of the rotating drum is performed will be described. First, “stop acceptance” mentioned here is that, as described above, it is detected that there is an operation to any one of the first stop button 24L to the third stop button 24R in a situation where stop acceptance is possible. Means. And here, the relation with the fault in the case where there is already stop acceptance for two rotating bodies (two rotating bodies have already stopped) and there is a stop acceptance for the remaining one rotating drum will be explained. As described later, similar measures can be taken for the first stop acceptance and the second stop acceptance.
<< Basic operation concerning stop acceptance >>

  FIG. 61 (a) schematically shows the basic operation of stop acceptance in the case of winning a winning combination such as Bell, for example. In the example of FIG. 61 (a), as shown at the top, when the winning combination is won (J1), the rotation of the drum is started (J2). In the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment, the first stop 51L to the third times the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination that has been won regardless of the order in which the first stop button 24L to the third stop button 24R are pressed. The barrel 51R can be stopped.

  As described above, when rotating, each of the rotating bodies 51L to 51R passes through the acceleration state and shifts to the constant speed state (J3). And each rotation drum 51L-51R maintain a constant speed state (J4), and if the above-mentioned minimum game time has passed, it will shift to a state of being able to receive stop (J5). Furthermore, when the player presses the stop button (any one of 24L to 24R), the stop button (and rotation drum) for which the stop operation is performed first is accepted for stoppage. (J6).

  Here, the stop acceptance pertaining to the first torso in which the stop operation has been performed is referred to as the “first trunk stop acceptance”, and the stop acceptance pertaining to the subsequent stop operations is sequentially referred to as “the second trunk stop acceptance”, “ It is referred to as the “3rd toll stop”. Moreover, the turning drum according to the "first stop of the trunk" is referred to as the "first stop turning drum", and the turning drums of the "second stop receiving the second stop" and the "third stop receiving the third stop" are respectively 2) It is referred to as "stop rotating cylinder" and "third stop rotating cylinder". Also, when there is a first acceptance stop of the torso, the processing of the main CPU 81 (FIG. 5A) shifts to a turning toll stop state for stopping the first tote stop, but in FIG. 61A. Illustration of the spinning stop state is omitted.

  In the example shown in FIG. 61 (a), since the winning combination is won, the symbols constituting the combination of symbols of the winning combination are displayed for the above-mentioned first stop winding drum (J7). Subsequently, the second stop rotation acceptance (J8) transfers the rotation stop state (not shown) of the above-mentioned second stop rotation to the illustration, and then the symbols constituting the winning combination symbol combination are displayed ( J9).

  Further, after the third stop rotation receiving state (J10) is shifted to the rotation stop state for the above-mentioned third stop turn drum (J11), the symbols constituting the combination of winning combination are displayed (J12). After these conditions, it becomes the condition of the stop (J13) when all the cylinders have stopped, and after the prize determination, the payout (including the storage) of the game medals according to the winning combination is started (J14) . The “winning determination” mentioned here can be performed in the display determination (S66) of the game progress main processing (see FIG. 14).

Further, at the time of payout of the game medal (J14), output of a predetermined payout sound (payout sound output) is performed. Here, for any of the first stop turn to the third stop turn to display the symbols that make up the symbol combination of the winning combination (J7, J9, J12), stop acceptance (J6, J8, J10) However, the condition is that it is performed at the timing within the above-mentioned number of shifted frames (pull-in point).
<< Rotation fault pattern 1 (measure pattern 3-1 (power off)) after acceptance of stop >>

  Subsequently, pattern 1 (measure pattern 3-1) relating to the combination of stop acceptance and rotation failure will be described based on FIG. 61 (b). The same reference numerals are given to the same situation as the basic operation shown in FIG. 61 (a), and the description will be omitted. In the example of FIG. 61 (b), there is a third acceptance stop (J10), and it is assumed that the power is cut off (J16) in a state (J11) in which the rotating drum has stopped.

  In such a case, as shown in FIG. 61 (b), the rotating drum moves to the stop position (J17), and the main CPU 81 executes the aforementioned power-off process (see FIG. 19) (J18). After that, when the power is restored (J19), the winning combination is displayed on the third cylinder (described later) (J12), and all the cylinders are stopped in the same manner as the above-mentioned basic operation (FIG. 61 (a)) Under the condition of the rotation stop (J13), the payout of the number of game medals corresponding to the winning combination is started (J14).

  That is, in the slot machine 10, payout is not performed by determining whether or not the symbol has stopped at the normal position (whether or not the actual result is correct). Then, if the processing in the main CPU 81 is progressing normally without any abnormality, the processing proceeds as the result is correct, the symbol does not stop at the normal position, and there is a gap in the stop position of the symbol in appearance Even if, it will be paid out as usual.

  The above-mentioned "winning combination display" is a situation where the symbol corresponding to the winning combination is illuminated from behind by driving or blinking the above-mentioned backlighting LED for a turning cylinder in a predetermined color It means (the situation where back light production is done). In addition, the display of the winning combination is not limited to the driving of the backlight LED for the turning drum, and, for example, the display of the combination using the effect unit 18 or the like (the image display of the symbol showing the winning combination), the front door It is possible to include the driving of the above-described effect light source of the unit 11 or the like.

  In addition to the winning combination display, it is possible to perform an output (a winning sound output) of a sound effect notifying a winning. As this winning sound output, it is possible to share the above-mentioned payout sound output and make it common to any one. Furthermore, it is also possible to comprehensively refer to the winning combination display and the winning sound output performed by the sub control board 31 and to refer to, for example, "representation concerning a winning combination" or "a winning combination effect". In addition, there is also a display unit that performs management with the main control board 61. Examples of this type of display unit include the display units (acquired number display unit, replay display unit, etc.) of the operation unit 14 (FIG. 1) described above. be able to. Then, among the display units to be managed by the main control board 61, for example, a notification from the display unit used when there is any win in the winning combination such as a re-play display unit or a winning lamp (so-called WIN lamp). However, it is also possible to include it in the above-mentioned "representation concerning a winning combination" and "a winning combination presentation".

  By doing this, when a power failure occurs between the third acceptance stop (J10) and the winning combination display (J12) for the third stop rotation, an unexpected operation is performed after a power failure return. This can be prevented, and it becomes possible to surely execute a winning combination display and payout according to the third stop loop.

FIG. 61 (b) shows an example in which the power-off (J16) occurs after the third cylinder stop acceptance (J10). However, for example, the information of the third trunk stop acceptance may be updated after the detection of the power-off and before the operation of the main CPU 81 is stopped. Then, in this case, there is a third acceptance stop (J10) after the start of the power-off process (J18), and power is restored based on the information of the third acceptance stop (J10) at this time. A situation in which the later processing is performed can also be assumed.
<< Rotational failure pattern 2 after acceptance of stop (Countermeasure pattern 3-2 (other than power off)) >>

  Then, the pattern (measure pattern 3-2) which concerns on the combination of stop acceptance and rotation defect is demonstrated based on FIG.61 (c). The same reference numerals are given to the same situation as the basic operation shown in FIG. 61 (a), and the description will be omitted. In the example of FIG. 61 (c), there is a third acceptance stop (J10), and it is assumed that rotation failure occurs due to a factor other than power off in the situation (J11) where the machine has shifted to the spinning stop state. Yes (J21). As a mode of the rotation failure here, as in the case of the rotation failure pattern 1 (countermeasure pattern 2-1) in which the turning cylinder serving as the third stop turning cylinder is accelerating the turning cylinder, the step out of the motor or the other It can be illustrated that the rotating drum can not perform the scheduled operation due to a factor. Moreover, as a mode of rotation failure at the time of the rotation stop of this countermeasure pattern 3-2, in the condition where rotation of a rotation drum should be performed at constant speed, a thing whose rotation speed does not become constant, and a brake on control are not used and it is normal. It is possible to illustrate things that can not be decelerated.

  In such a case, when a rotational defect is detected (J21), the design to be stopped on the effective line can not reach the target effective line in appearance (on the surface) (J22). ). 60 (b) and 60 (c) show an example of a situation where a shift occurs in the stopped symbols, and FIG. 60 (b) shows an operation (basic operation) in the normal case, and FIG. c) shows the operation when the misalignment of the symbol occurs. And FIG.60 (b), (c) has shown the operation | movement in the case of stopping the symbol of symbol number "10" in all.

  Then, if normal, as shown on the left side of FIG. 60 (b), when there is a third cylinder stop operation, stop control for the rotation stepping motor is performed, and the rotation speed of the corresponding rotation drum is fixed. After shifting from the constant speed of spinning drum drive state No. 4 in the high speed state to the deceleration start state of spinning drum drive state No. 3 in the same constant speed state and moving to the target position, the brake is applied It shifts during the deceleration of spinning drum drive state number 2. At this time, for example, if it is assumed that the position corresponding to the eighth step is stopped on the effective line for the symbol having the symbol number “10”, the turning drum is in a rotating position several steps before the eighth step. The brake control of the stepping motor (here, all the four phases described above are ON) is performed. Then, due to a factor such as an inertial force at the time of rotation, the rotary drum stops at the point where the eighth step is advanced. When the turning drum has stopped, the main CPU 81 holds information corresponding to the symbol of the symbol number "10" as information of the stop symbol, and also the stop symbol on the predetermined effective line seen by the player , Becomes the symbol of the original symbol number "10".

  That is, as shown in FIG. 60 (b), when it is normal, the main CPU 81 recognizes a symbol (here, symbol of symbol number "10") recognized as being stopped in control and a predetermined effective line There is no wrinkle between the symbol actually stopped at (the symbol of the symbol number "10" here as well), and both are in agreement.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 60 (c), the cause of the rotation failure has occurred and the situation before the symbol having the symbol number "10" reaches the target stop position The torso has stopped. Then, in the example of FIG. 60 (c), the situation where the position corresponding to the symbol of symbol number "9" (the position corresponding to the 16th step of the symbol of symbol number "9", etc.) stops on the effective line It has become.

  As described above, when the rotation failure occurs, the main CPU 81 recognizes that the symbol which is recognized as being stopped in control is the symbol of symbol number "10", but the appearance is that the predetermined effective It is not possible to determine if it is stopped on the line whether it is the symbol of symbol number "10" or a symbol other than the symbol of symbol number "10" (here, symbol of symbol number "9") , It becomes a situation where the symbol of symbol number "9" is stopped. And a wrinkle has arisen between the stop symbol on control, and the stop symbol on appearance, and both are not in agreement. In addition, although the symbol of symbol number "10" is generally located on the target effective line, it may be considered that the symbol has a gap even when it is slightly deviated from the regular stop position. Can.

  Then, in the countermeasure pattern 3-2 shown in FIG. 61C, as in the example of FIG. 60C described above, the third stop winding drum does not reach the planned rotational position (normal stop position). Even if it is (J23), the above-mentioned winning combination display is performed by driving the back light LED for the drum. Here, not only the winning combination display but also the winning combination presentation of the broader meaning described above may be adopted. Then, as in the above-mentioned basic operation shown in FIG. 61 (a), the condition (J13) of the turning stop with all the turns stopped is obtained, and thereafter, the payout of the number of game medals according to the winning combination is started It is done (J14).

  That is, in the example of the countermeasure pattern 3-2 shown in FIG. 61 (c), even when the symbol relating to the winning combination deviates from the original stop position, the winning combination is displayed as in the case where there is no rotation failure. It is designed to carry out medal payouts. And, this is the same even if the symbol to be stopped has passed the regular stopping position.

  In this way, unexpected rotation is caused when a cause other than the power failure occurs between the third acceptance stop (J10) and the third acceptance turn display (J12). It is possible to surely execute a winning combination display relating to the third stop loop and payout of game medals without performing an operation. Then, the winning combination display is performed in a state where the symbol combination is not properly configured, and control is performed so as not to be disadvantageous to the player even when an inconsistency in appearance (appearance or appearance) occurs. Is possible.

  Here, the function to pay out when a problem occurs as in the above-mentioned countermeasure pattern 3-1 or the above-mentioned countermeasure pattern 3-2 is more effective for a symbol combination having a draw-in rate of 100% (PB = 1). It is believed that there is. That is, in the slot machine 10, the order of the first stop button 24L to the third stop button 24R or the order of the first stop button 24L to the third stop button 24R for so-called common bells (bells established regardless of pushing order) and replay (replay) symbol combinations The symbol arrangement of the respective turning drums 51L to 51R is determined so that the symbol combination is always displayed even when pressed at the timing.

  For this reason, even if the design does not stop at an appropriate position in appearance due to a problem such as a step out or a power cut, the condition that the design is properly aligned under control of the CPU 81 is, for example, watermelon or cherry It is more likely to occur than a symbol or symbol combination that does not become PB = 1 like. Therefore, for the winning combination in which PB = 1, the function of countermeasure pattern 3-1 and the function of countermeasure pattern 3-2 are more effective than in the case where the winning combination in which PB = 1 is not achieved. It can be used to

  Although the third stop has been described as an example for the countermeasure pattern 3-1 and the countermeasure pattern 3-2, the same process can be performed not only for this but also for the first stop and the second stop. is there. That is, even if the rotation defect occurs at the time of at least one of the first stop and the second stop, and the symbols pertaining to the first stop and the second stop do not stop at the regular position, the winning combination in control It is conceivable to pay out if

  In addition, measures against rotational failure at the time of acceptance of stop are not limited to those exemplified as the countermeasure pattern 3-1 (FIG. 61 (b)) and the countermeasure pattern 3-2 (FIG. 61 (c)), and the other It is also possible to adopt a response. For example, the rotation cylinder (here, the third stop rotation cylinder) is rotated so that the initial position (initial position) related to the rotation of the rotation cylinder can be detected at the time of power restoration or in a situation where a rotation failure other than power interruption is detected. It is also possible to stop the rotating drum at a planned original stop position (a position where the symbol of the winning combination is stopped on a predetermined effective line) based on the detected initial position information.

  For example, it is also conceivable to adopt a control mode in which the number of shifted frames (pull-in point) described above does not become constant at the time of power failure recovery. For example, information on a predetermined number of shifted frames (here, three symbols) is held in the RWM, and using this information, a part of the number of shifted frames is equal to the number of symbols (here, two symbols). Consider the situation where a pull-in is taking place.

When the power is cut off in this situation, and then the power is restored, the information about the number of frames (2 symbols) already drawn is not stored, and the above-mentioned number of shifted frames (3 symbols) is again stored. Pull-in is performed. As a result, a total of 5 symbols (2 symbols + 3 symbols) are pulled in before and after the power is turned off. In addition, if a power failure occurs in a situation where one symbol has been pulled in, a total of 4 symbols (1 symbol + 3 before and after the power failure) can be performed by pulling in three symbols again after the power is restored. Design) drawing in will be performed. As described above, the symbol displayed to be stopped after power recovery may be different depending on the occurrence timing of the power failure at the time of acceptance of stop.
<Countermeasures against problems related to winning determination (Countermeasure pattern 4)>

  Next, the relationship between the winning determination and the defect will be described. First, the "winning determination" mentioned here can be performed in the display determination (S66) of the game progress main processing (see FIG. 14) as in the countermeasure pattern 3 described above. Further, it is assumed here that there is a small winning combination established (here, the establishment of a bell of PB = 1) by the “winning determination”. This "small part combination formation" means a situation where a winning combination is played for a winning combination, and a symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped on the activated line.

  In addition to power-off, the “fault” illustrated here includes door opening, setting key operation, game medal insertion, and the like in an irregular (non-regular) procedure. Among these, door opening means the above-mentioned door opening error (error concerning door opening) which the front door part 11 is unlocked and opens.

Furthermore, the basic action here is that a small winning combination is established (the bell is established), and the payout (including storage) of the game medals is performed when the pressing of the stop button pertaining to the above-mentioned third stop loop is finished. It can be mentioned. Then, in this basic operation, when a game medal is paid out, a winning combination display (backlight effect) and a winning sound output are performed. Here, pressing of the stop button relating to the third stop loop is hereinafter referred to as "third stop pressing". In addition, releasing the stop button by releasing the finger from the stop button according to the third stop press is hereinafter referred to as "release", "third stop press release" or the like.
<< Corresponding to the payout over the interruption (measure pattern 4-1) >>

As measures pattern 4-1 concerning measures (measure pattern 4) to the trouble in this winning a prize judgment, it is necessary to consider measures against the situation where processing from formation of a small winning combination to payout of gaming medals is performed across power interruption it can. Furthermore, several situations can be assumed as this countermeasure pattern 4-1.
<< Response to power off and power recovery while pressing down the third stop (measure pattern 4-1-1A) >>

  For example, it is possible to consider a case where from the power-off to the power-supply recovery is performed in the situation of the third stop pressing at the time of the bell winning as a small role. Hereinafter, measures for such a complex situation are referred to as "measure pattern 4-1-A". In addition to the situation where the player releases in a short time (about less than 0.5 seconds) by the normal pressing operation, the player continues the pressing operation longer than usual as a situation where the third stop pressing is detected. The third stop button or the third stop button stop button sensor 49 (see FIG. 5) A situation in which a signal representing a pressed state is continuously output due to the operation failure of 3) can be mentioned. FIG. 62 (a) schematically shows the countermeasure pattern 4-1-1A. In FIG. 62 (a), the states of the start lever operation, the first stop, the second stop, and the third stop are shown in the order from the left end in the figure. Then, in the example of FIG. 62 (a), the power-off occurs in the situation where the third stop (the third stop and press) is performed.

  Further, for example, the power is restored in a state where the third stop pressing is continued without releasing the finger from the stop button, and the third stop pressing is continued even after the power is restored. After that, the third stop press release is performed, and the third stop press release is detected. Further, in the example of FIG. 62 (a), although illustration is omitted, in the situation of winning a winning combination such as a bell, the payout of the game medal is executed along with the third stop pressing release. In addition, it is also possible that a power-off generate | occur | produces in the condition where the 3rd stop pressing is continued. In this case, it is possible to define processing for executing both the winning combination display (backlight effect) and the winning sound output, executing any one, or not executing both.

  By doing this, it is possible to perform processing in which the player's profit is prioritized with respect to the power-off in a very short time when the small winning combination is established. Also, by not performing the winning combination display and the winning sound output, it is possible to distinguish the notification mode of the small winning combination formation from the normal (non-normal mode), and if the power failure is intentional due to the fraudulent act Even if it is, it is possible to give a chance to notice a fraudulent behavior to a game clerk who passes by the side or a surrounding game player.

  Here, as described above, in the game progress main process (FIG. 14), the process of the full turn stop check (S64) and the process of payout of game medals due to winning (S67) are executed. And in the processing (S64) of the full-turn stop check as described above, it is not in a state where one of the stop buttons 24L to 24R is continued to operate, etc., and it is checked whether these operations are properly completed. It will be. Then, the determination as to whether or not the above-described third stop pressing is continued, and whether it has been released or not may be performed in the processing (S64) of the full-turn stop check.

  In addition, regarding this countermeasure pattern 4-1-A, it is possible to define the relationship with the sound effect (third stop sound) notifying the third stop. For example, it is possible to output the above-mentioned third stop sound (perform the third stop sound output) when there is a third stop press release after power recovery.

  Furthermore, regarding this countermeasure pattern 4-1-A, it is also possible to define the relationship with, for example, the display performed by the effect unit 18 or the like. More specifically, for example, in the case where a power failure occurs during AT (assist time), an assist display indicating a stop button to perform the third stop in the effect unit 18 or the like when the power is restored It may be considered that the display to make the mark disappear is executed again.

  Furthermore, regarding the countermeasure pattern 4-1-A, the process of making the internal LED emit light to light up the button is performed at the time of power recovery, regarding the three-sheet insertion button (MAX bet button) of the main input unit 26 described above. It is possible to perform processing such as not accepting button operation of the three-sheet insertion button.

  Further, regarding the countermeasure pattern 4-1-A, even if there is a third stop pressing release after power recovery, for example, various other buttons (first stop being managed by the main CPU 81 during continuation of the third stop pressing) It is possible not to execute payout even if the third stop press release is performed after pressing at least one of the second stop, the main system button such as bet and start, and the like. That is, it can be set as the condition of payment that none of the main system various buttons are operated.

  The present invention is not limited to this, and it is also conceivable to pay out if another predetermined button is not operated even if any of the predetermined buttons is operated. For example, when power is restored, if one of the stop buttons is being pressed and the start lever is operated, no payout is made as it is, but all the stop buttons are released in this situation. It would be possible to pay out. In addition, it is also conceivable that, when the start lever and any one of the stop buttons are both in the ON state, releasing the stop button performs payout.

  Further, with regard to this countermeasure pattern 4-1-A, it is conceivable that the payout of the game medals is executed without performing the third stop pressing release. Furthermore, in this case, it is possible to define processing such as not displaying a winning combination display (backlight effect) or winning sound output. More specifically, even if the third stop is being pressed at the time of the power failure return, after the power return processing (FIG. 21), the processing (S67) of game medal payout due to the winning of the game progress main processing (FIG. 14) It can be exemplified that it is executed to pay out.

Also, when an error occurs, the cause of the error is removed, and it is possible not to pay out even if the release operation of operating the error release button (here, the setting / reset button 69) is performed as described above. For example, consider the above-mentioned HE error (error when it is determined that the gaming medal in the gaming medal payout device 63 is empty) as a situation that can be combined with the third stop pressing, powering off, payout of gaming medals, etc. Can. That is, when the power is shut down while pressing the third stop, and when the HE error occurs in the situation with the third stop being pressed when the power is returned and there is a payout, the game medal is replenished while the third stop is pressed. Error cause is eliminated, and even if the error release button (setting / reset button 69) is operated, since the third stop is being pressed, the control mode is such that the release of the error is not achieved and the payout is not performed. Can be illustrated.
<< Corresponding to the third stop press release before power recovery (measure pattern 4-1-1B) >>

  Subsequently, it is also possible to define processing in the case where there is a third stop pressing release while the power is off. FIG. 62 (b) shows a countermeasure pattern 4-1-1B in the case where there is a third stop pressing release before power recovery (during power shutdown). In this countermeasure pattern 4-1-1B, the situation until the operation of the start lever 25, the first stop, the second stop, the third stop (pressing the third stop), and the occurrence of the power-off is shown in FIG. The same as the countermeasure pattern 4-1-1A. However, while the power is off, there is a third stop press release, and then the power is recovered (power recovery). In this case, although illustration is omitted, it is conceivable to execute payout along with the return of the power supply.

  In addition, even in the case where there is the third stop pressing release during the power-off as described above, it is possible to define the relationship with the third stop sound and the like. More specifically, if there is a third stop press release while the power is off, it is possible to pay out when the power is turned on (when the power is restored) and to output a third stop sound when the power is restored.

In the countermeasure pattern 4-1-1A and the countermeasure pattern 4-1-1B shown in FIGS. 61 (a) and 61 (b), the relationship between the third stop and the power shutdown or power recovery has been described. For example, when there is a power loss and power recovery between the start lever operation and the first stop, or between the first stop and the second stop (or between the second stop and the third stop), for example. It is also possible to assume a case where there is a power failure and a power recovery. Then, in these cases, it is possible to set the same relationship as the relationship between the third stop and the power-off or the power-supply recovery.
<< Correspondence to the third stop pressing and power off and door opening (measure pattern 4-1-2) >>

  Subsequently, as another pattern of the countermeasure pattern 4-1, it is possible to consider a countermeasure (countermeasure pattern 4-1-2) in the case where door opening is combined with the third stop pressing and the power-off. More specifically, at the time of bell hit as a small part, the power is turned off in the third stop pressing situation, and when the power is restored with the third stop pressing situation, the front door portion 11 is closed and the door opening is released. You can think of the case. Also in this case, it is possible to define processing such as performing payout as in the case of the above-described countermeasure pattern 4-1 and not displaying a winning combination display or winning sound output.

By doing this, it is possible to achieve the same function and effect as the above-described countermeasure pattern 4-1-1. Furthermore, even if the power-off is accompanied by an unauthorized door opening, if the front door unit 11 is closed, the notification mode is set to the non-normal mode without preventing the progress of the game. It is possible to perform processing such as stopping. Here, the door opening also occurs in the above-mentioned setting change and setting value confirmation.
<< Response to power supply recovery and door opening after the third stop press release (measure pattern 4-1-3) >>

  Subsequently, as another pattern of countermeasure pattern 4-1 (countermeasure pattern 4-1-3), consider a countermeasure to the case where the power failure is restored in the situation where the third stop pressing is released (released) after the power failure. Can. More specifically, in the countermeasure pattern 4-1-2, as described above, after the power is turned off in the third stop pressing situation, the stop button related to the third stop pressing is released instead of the third stop pressing situation. It is possible to consider the case where the power is restored after that. In this case, as in the case of the above-described countermeasure pattern 4-1-2, even if the front door unit 11 is closed after the power is restored and the door opening is canceled, the payout is executed and the winning combination display and the winning sound output are It is possible to define processing that is not performed.

By doing this, processing that assumes more situations will be performed. That is, in the case where the power-off is resolved in a short time as in the case of a momentary power failure, it is relatively easy to assume a situation in which the power-off and the power recovery occur while the third stop pressing state is present. However, in many cases, even if a power failure occurs during pressing the third stop, it is considered that the power returns after the release of the stop button. Therefore, by adopting the countermeasure pattern 4-1-3, it is possible to cope with more situations regardless of whether the door opening is due to a fraudulent act or not.
<< Corresponding to the payout across the setting value confirmation (measure pattern 4-2) >>

Next, it is possible to consider a countermeasure (measure pattern 4-2) for the payout across the setting value confirmation. The “payout across setting value confirmation” indicates a situation in which the processing from the establishment of the small winning combination to the payout of the game medal is performed across the confirmation (setting value confirmation) of the setting value. Furthermore, several situations can be assumed as this countermeasure pattern 4-2.
<< Correspondence to pressing the third stop and setting key ON (measure pattern 4-2-1) >>

  First, as described above, in the setting value confirmation, when the slot machine 10 is powered on, the door switch and the setting door switch described above are on, and the setting key is further set when the bet is not made. By operating the setting key so that the switch 68 (FIG. 4) is turned on, the setting confirmation mode (setting value confirmation enabled state) is entered. Then, as a first countermeasure (countermeasure pattern 4-2-1) in the countermeasure pattern 4-2, for example, power is not cut off in the situation of pressing the third stop at the time of the bell hit as a small role, and setting is made. A situation in which the key is turned on can be assumed.

  Here, as a condition that enables setting value confirmation as described above, excluding the state of the setting door switch, if the two switches of the door switch and the setting key switch are in the ON state, the setting value can be confirmed. It may be in a state of

  Furthermore, although it is assumed here that the front door portion 11 is open (door open), the door open timing may be before, simultaneously with, or after the start of pressing the third stop. Then, in the situation where the third stop is pressed, it is possible to consider the case where there is a release of the third stop after the front door portion 11 is closed and the door opening is released (after the door is closed) .

  In this case, although the setting key remains ON, it is possible to prevent the transition to the setting value checkable state as described above. Further, it is conceivable that the progress of the game is possible, and that the next game and the subsequent games can be performed (games after the next game). Then, when a symbol combination other than replay is displayed in the game, the door can be opened to shift to the set value checkable state. In other words, transition to the setting value checkable state is performed when all three conditions of setting key ON, door opening, and no betting setting are satisfied, and any one of these is missing. For example, it is possible not to shift to the setting value checkable state.

  When the setting value checkable state is entered, notification can be made that the setting value checkable state is possible. As the notification that the setting value can be confirmed, the display of the setting value on the setting display LED 66 (FIG. 4) as described above, the display of characters and images in the rendering unit 18 (FIG. 1) and the like are exemplified. be able to. Further, when the door is opened during the game (for example, during a period from betting setting to winning determination), it is possible not to shift to the set value confirmation enabled state.

  By doing this, the relationship between the third stop, the door opening, and the setting value confirmation can be appropriately determined in advance, and unexpected operations can be prevented from being performed. Then, the setting value can be confirmed when it is appropriate.

  Here, when transitioning to the setting confirmation mode (setting value confirmation enabled state), it was necessary for the plurality of switches to be in the ON state, but when the setting confirmation mode is ended, only the setting key switch is confirmed. It has become so. That is, it can be said that the condition for ending the setting confirmation mode is relaxed compared to the condition for starting.

  Moreover, it is also possible to define the following relationship regarding this countermeasure pattern 4-2-1. For example, in the countermeasure pattern 4-2-1, as described above, there is a third stop pressing release after the front door portion 11 is closed and the door opening is released (after the door is closed). I assumed. However, different from this, it is possible to assume a case where there is a release of the third stop in the set value checkable state without the door opening being released. In this case, it may be considered that the payout is performed, and that the setting value can be confirmed after the payout is completed.

  Furthermore, after completion of the payout, it is conceivable that the display unit 18 or the like does not display the setting value confirmation, but displays a mode (display at normal time) different from the state of the setting value confirmation. And the game after the next game is impossible. As an aspect in which the game after the next game can not be made, it is conceivable to make both the bet operation (the bet setting operation) and the game medal input, or one of them impossible. In this case, it can be considered that the main CPU 81 is in a state where the set value can be confirmed. Then, when the door is opened, it is possible to display that the set value can be confirmed by the effect unit 18 or the like.

  Moreover, regarding the case where there is the third stop pressing release in the setting value checkable state, it is conceivable to start the payout when the release is performed. In this case, after the end of the payout, it may be possible to play the game with the setting key ON without shifting to the setting value checkable state. And although it is possible to play a game after that, it is possible to shift to a set value checkable state when the door is opened.

Here, for example, at the time of bell hit as a small role, in the situation of pressing the third stop, it is assumed that the power is not turned off and the setting key is turned on. Since the setting key is ON at the time of return, it is possible to clear the information indicating that the setting change device is activated and win the small role, and the payout of the game medals is not performed after the power is restored.
<< Correspondence to 3rd stop pressing and setting value confirmation possible state notification (measure pattern 4-2-2) >>

  Subsequently, as a second countermeasure (countermeasure pattern 4-2-2) in the countermeasure pattern 4-2, the front door portion 11 is closed and the door is opened as in the case of the countermeasure pattern 4-2- 1 described above. Consider the case where there is a third stop release after being released. After that, unlike the countermeasure pattern 4-2- described above, the setting value confirmation enabled state is entered, but notification that the setting value confirmation enabled state is not made can be performed. The other processes can be performed in the same manner as the countermeasure pattern 4-2-1.

  By doing this, it is possible to achieve the same working effects of the invention as the countermeasure pattern 4-2-1 described above. In addition, after release of the third stop, by not notifying that the set value can be confirmed, the set value can be confirmed to a person who tries to confirm the set value illegally after the winning determination. It is possible to conceal certain things.

  In the various countermeasure patterns in the countermeasure pattern 4-1 described above and in the various countermeasure patterns in the countermeasure pattern 4-2, the processing of the items such as the possibility of payout when the small winning combination is established, the possibility of confirmation of the set value, etc. It is targeted. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to consider measures such as the stop button operation, the possibility of re-playing, and the possibility of confirmation of the set value in the case of winning a replay.

  For example, it is possible to restore the information indicating the right to play the replay game when the power is cut off and the power is restored while pressing the third stop in the situation of winning the replay. In addition, when the power is restored, if there is a third stop press release with the setting key ON, when the replay information returns, it will be in a bet state, so setting is made even if other conditions are satisfied. It is possible to perform processing such as not to be in a state where value confirmation is possible.

In addition, regarding the handling of such replays, regarding the various countermeasure patterns (countermeasure patterns 4 to 3 to countermeasure patterns 4 to 9) to be described later, as long as no contradiction or duplication occurs, it is assumed that the small winning combination is replayed, It is possible to assume a countermeasure pattern as what will be a situation in which betting is done after the power is restored, replacing the payout with replay.
<< Correspondence to door opening and payout (measure pattern 4-3) >>

Next, as a countermeasure pattern 4-3, it is possible to consider a countermeasure against a situation related to the payout while the front door portion 11 (front door) is open. For example, when the small winning combination is established, if there is a release of the third stop during the opening of the front door, it is possible to pay out. The timing of door opening may be before, simultaneously with, or after the third stop pressing. Also in this case, it is possible to define processing such as executing a winning combination display or winning sound output. By doing this, the relationship between the third stop, the door opening, and the payout can be properly determined in advance, and unexpected operations can be prevented from being performed.
<< Response to door opening and game medal insertion (measure pattern 4-4) >>

It should be noted that, as a situation related to the above countermeasure pattern 4-3, it is possible to consider a situation relating to the game medal input while the front door portion 11 (front door) is open. For example, when a game medal is inserted while the front door is open, it is possible to detect the inserted game medal as usual, count the game medal, and turn on the insertion display LED. . Furthermore, in this case, it is possible to perform sound output (output of input sound) along with the detection of the game medal. Moreover, it is possible not to output an input sound not only according to this but with detection of a game medal. By doing this, the relationship between the door opening and the game medal insertion can be properly determined in advance, and unexpected operations can be prevented from being performed.
<Other measures related to measure pattern 4>
<< Corresponding to the payout before releasing the third stop press (measure pattern 4-5) >>

  In relation to the countermeasure pattern 4 as described above, for example, the following countermeasure can be taken. First, in the main flow at the time of power supply recovery (game progress main processing (see FIG. 14)), it is possible to execute the payout processing before confirming the presence or absence of the release of the third stop pressing.

  As shown in FIG. 14, in the game progress main process, processing of full-turn stop check (S64) and processing of payout of gaming medals by winning (S67) are executed. And in the processing (S64) of the full-turn stop check as described above, it is not in a state where one of the stop buttons 24L to 24R is continued to operate, etc., and it is checked whether these operations are properly completed. It will be. Therefore, for example, the execution order of the process for checking the full-body stop (S64) and the process for paying out gaming medals due to winning (S67) is changed, and the process for paying out gaming medals due to winning (S67) is stopped all around By performing the process before the check process (S64), it is possible to execute the payout process before confirming the presence or absence of the release of the third stop press.

  By doing this, when the power is restored, the processing of the payout is given priority over the check of the stop button, and the payout can be reliably performed regardless of the state of the third stop pressing. And it can prevent that an unexpected operation | movement is performed regarding the operation | movement with 3rd stop pressing release.

In this case, at the time of normal payout with no problems, both the winning combination display and the output of the payout sound are executed, while the third stop button is turned on during the power-off (or before the power-off). When the third stop button is released after the power is restored, it is possible not to execute both the winning combination display and the output of the payout sound.
<< Correspondence to door opening after the third stop press release (measure pattern 4-6) >>

  Subsequently, in relation to the above-mentioned countermeasure pattern 4-2-1, after the release of the button of the third stop, even if the above-mentioned setting key is turned on, it is possible to continue playing the subsequent game It is possible. And, in this case, even if the game start condition including the insertion of the game medal is satisfied, the main CPU 81 can not shift to the setting checkable state.

  More specifically, for example, after the prescribed number (three in this case) of game medals are inserted, the reels (rotation drums 51L to 51R) start rotating by the operation of the start lever 25, and the operation of the stop buttons 24L to 24R. The corresponding reel stops. Furthermore, in games other than the establishment of replay, when the door is opened after the third stop button is released and the door is opened, it is possible to shift to the set value checkable state by turning on the setting key. Make it On the other hand, in the game of replay establishment, even if the door is opened after the release of the third stop button and the door is opened and the setting key is turned on, the transition to the set value checkable state can not be made, etc. It is conceivable.

In this way, it is possible to prevent an unexpected operation from being performed with respect to the operation involving the third stop and press release and the door opening.
<< Correspondence to door opening and payout sound (measure pattern 4-7) >>

Subsequently, the relationship between the door opening and the payout sound will be described. With regard to the relationship between the door open and the payout sound, it is possible to pay out game medals and output a payout sound even while the door is open. However, when the notification sound (door opening notification sound) when door opening is detected is output, the payout sound is not output when the door opening notification sound and the payout sound compete (overlap) with each other. It is possible. In addition, although the payout sound is output, it is also possible to make the volume of the payout sound a size that can not be heard. By doing this, it is possible to prevent an unexpected operation from being performed with respect to an operation involving door opening and a payout sound.
<< Pattern 1 related to door open alarm sound and payout sound (measure pattern 4-7-1) >>

  FIG. 63 (a) exemplifies the countermeasure pattern 1 (countermeasure pattern 4-7-1) according to the combination of the door opening and the payout sound as described above. The upper part of FIG. 63 (a) shows an operation (basic operation) at a normal time. Further, the middle part of FIG. 63 (a) shows the mutual relation when the payout occurs before the door is opened, and the lower part shows the mutual relation when payout occurs after the door is open.

  In the basic operation shown in the upper part of FIG. 63 (a), the front door 11 (front door) is in a closed (unopened) state, and the output of the door open notification sound indicated by "Sound 1" is It has not been done. Then, in such a situation, when there is the third stop press release, the output of the payout sound indicated by "Sound 2" is performed.

  On the other hand, as shown in the middle part of FIG. 63 (a), in the case where the payout occurs before the door is opened, there is the third stop pressing release in the situation where the front door portion 11 (front door) is closed. As shown in "Sound 2", the output of the payout sound is performed. Then, for example, if the door is opened during the output of the payout sound, the output of the door open notification sound is performed as indicated by “sound 1”.

In the case where a payout occurs after the door is opened, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 63 (a), there is no output of the payout sound as shown in "Sound 2" at the stage of door opening, and shown in "Sound 1". The door open alarm sound is output. Here, in the drawing, the illustration is performed so that the door open alarm sound is output at a predetermined timing after the door open. And if there exists 3rd stop pressing release in the condition of door opening, an output of a payout sound will be performed as shown to "sound 2" in connection with it. Here, there is a third stop pressing release during the output of the door open notification sound, and similarly, the output of the payout sound is performed during the output of the door open notification sound. Then, the output of the payout sound ends after the end of the output of the door open alarm sound.
<< Pattern 2 related to the door open alarm sound and the payout sound (measure pattern 4-7-2) >>

  Subsequently, FIG. 63 (b) shows another example (measure pattern 4-7-2) of the relationship between the door opening and the payout sound. FIG. 63 (b) shows an example of the countermeasure pattern in which the door open notification sound and the payout sound do not compete (overlap) as described above. The upper part of FIG. 63 (a) shows an operation (basic operation) at a normal time. This basic operation is the same as that shown in FIG. Also, the middle row in FIG. 63 (b) shows the mutual relationship when the payout occurs before the door is opened, as in FIG. 63 (a), and the lower row shows the payout after the door opens If you do not have

  In the case where a payout occurs before the door is opened as shown in the middle part of FIG. 63 (b), “front door”, “sound 1”, and “third stop pressing release” are shown in FIG. 63 (a) described above. It is the same as that shown. However, the payout sound of “sound 2” accompanying the third stop pressing release ends at the start of the output of the door opening notification sound accompanying the subsequent door opening.

  Further, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 63 (b), in the case where the payout occurs after the door is opened, the “front door”, the “sound 1”, and the “third stop pressing release” are described with reference to FIG. Are the same as shown in FIG. However, the payout sound of “sound 2” accompanying the third stop pressing release is started upon the completion of the output of the door opening notification sound accompanying the subsequent door opening.

In addition, about the measures for making a door open alarm sound and a payout sound not to compete, for example, in a quiet period between intermittent messages such as "the door is open" in the door open alarm sound, It is also possible to output a payout sound. In addition, when the door open alarm sound and the payout sound do not compete with each other, it is conceivable to measure the output period of the door open alarm sound and to output the payout sound based on the clocked result.
<< Response to door opening and game medal settlement (measure pattern 4-8) >>

Subsequently, in the case where the game medal liquidation is performed while the door is open, payout can be made when the liquidation button in the main input unit 26 (FIG. 1) is pressed and demonstration display can be performed by the effect part 18 etc. It is. In addition, even if the settlement button is pressed, it is conceivable that no payout is made while the door is open. By doing this, the relationship between the door opening and the game medal clearing can be properly determined in advance, and unexpected operations can be prevented from being performed.
<< Correspondence to compounding of door opening and input / release / liquidation (measure pattern 4-9) >>

  Next, various possible aspects of the combination of the door opening and the input / release / settlement will be described. In addition, since it aims at the exhaustive explanation about various compound modes here, what was explained so far is contained in part. In addition, here, when there is a game medal inserted while the door is opened, when there is a payout of the game medal while the door is opened, processing when the game medal is cleared while the door is opened, processing in each case Aspects will be described.

  First, when a game medal is inserted while the door is open, it is conceivable to perform an insertion sound output and detect the inserted game medal (perform recognition of the game medal). Furthermore, when there is a payout of the game medal while the door is open, it is conceivable to output a payout sound and to start payout along with the third stop pressing release. In addition, when the game medal is cleared while the door is open, it is conceivable that the sound is not output and the payout is started with the pressing of the check button. Then, it is conceivable to configure a slot machine combining these processing modes.

  In addition, when the game medal is inserted while the door is open, it is possible not to recognize the inserted coin. Furthermore, it is possible not to pay out when there is a payout of the game medal while the door is open. Furthermore, it is also possible not to pay out when the game medal is cleared while the door is open.

  Further, it is possible to take measures against the case where the game medal settlement and the setting value confirmation are combined. For example, while the set value is being checked (during the setting key is ON), the payout is not made even if the checkout button is pressed, but the third stop is being pressed when the small win is held, and the setting key is turned ON. In the present situation, when the third stop button is released, the payout can be made, and then the state can be shifted to the setting value confirmation mode (setting value confirmation enabled state). That is, normally, the payout is not made even if the checkout button is pressed while the set value is in the checkable state, but if it is in the third stop, it is before the transition to the set value confirmable state. It is possible to do. In this case, even when the setting key is turned on, the case where the payout is performed and the case where the payout is not performed may occur. As a result, even if the setting key switch is turned on in the state where the third stop button is being pressed, there is a payout if the third stop button is released, so the setting key switch has turned on due to a failure or the like. However, the payout can be awarded so that the player is not disadvantaged.

  Although the present invention has been described above by taking the slot machine 10 as an example, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention can be applied to, for example, various other slot machines. Further, the present invention is not limited to slot machines, and can be applied to other types of game machines such as, for example, pachinko machines. Furthermore, the present invention can also be applied to, for example, a casino machine installed in a casino facility.

10-slot machine, 11 front door, 12 case, 15 times display unit,
16 game medal payout openings, 17 saucers, 18 effect units, 21 game medal insertion openings,
24L to 24R first stop button to third stop button, 25 start lever,
31 sub control board, 51L to 51R first to third torso, 61 main control board,
62 setting units, 68 setting key switches, 81 main CPU.

Claims (1)

With multiple reels,
With multiple stop switches,
Setting related switches,
Setting value display means for displaying the setting value;
Internal lottery means,
Reel control means for controlling the reel;
Equipped with
When an event occurs in which the power supply to the gaming machine is shut off, and a power shutoff is detected thereafter, the power shutoff process can be executed.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop the predetermined symbol combination based on the reception of the player's stop operation in the game in which the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop the specific symbol combination based on the fact that the player's stop operation has been accepted in the game in which the specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means.
When the setting related switch changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, there is a case of transitioning to a setting value confirmation state in which the setting value is displayed on the setting value display means,
The setting related switch is the first mode, is a predetermined gaming state, and in the game in which the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, the remaining predetermined one of the plurality of reels is rotated. When the final stop operation of the player corresponding to the predetermined reel is accepted as a result, the specific symbol combination is stopped, and thereafter, when any stop switch is not operated in the game, the specific symbol combination is It is configured to be able to give the corresponding gaming value,
In the game in which the setting related switch is the first mode, the predetermined gaming state, and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery unit, the remaining one predetermined reel of the plurality of reels is rotated As a result, when the final stop operation of the player corresponding to the predetermined reel is accepted, the specific symbol combination is stopped, and then the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the final stop operation is continued in the game. When there is no game value corresponding to the specific symbol combination, and thereafter the setting related switch is in the second mode, the stop switch corresponding to the final stop operation is not continued. When it comes to the situation, it is configured to be able to give the game value corresponding to the specific symbol combination,
In the game in which the setting related switch is the first mode, the predetermined gaming state, and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery unit, a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player is accepted. The symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are respectively stopped on the respective reels stopped thereby, and the predetermined symbol combination is stopped when a stop operation is accepted at a predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation thereafter. After that, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination can be provided.
In the game in which the setting related switch is the first mode, the predetermined gaming state, and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is displayed on each of the reels. The stop operation is accepted at the predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation between the occurrence of an event of stopping the power supply to the gaming machine and the detection of the power off after the occurrence of the event of the power supply being interrupted. After that, even if the predetermined symbol combination is not stopped due to the execution of the power-off process based on the detection of the power-off, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is played at the specific timing after power recovery. A game machine characterized in that it is possible to give to the game.

Images